A G U ID E

TO T HE

D I S S E C TI O N OF THE DOG

O N CHAR N O C K BR A D LE Y
MD . D SC
.

P R I NC I P AL OF T H E R O YA L ( DI C K) V ET ER I N A RY C O LL E G E E DI N B U R GH ; L E CT U RER
,

O N CO MPA R AT IV E A NA T O M Y, U N I V ER S IT Y O F E DI N B U R G H

WI TH 69 I LL US T B A TI O N S

L O NG MA N S , GREEN . A ND CO .

39 P A TE R N O S T E R R O W, L O N D O N

N E W YOR K , B O M B AY A N D C A LCU T TA
'

1 9 12

All r igh ts re s e rv ed
 P R E F A OE

D U R IN G rec ent years the feeling that there was room for a b ook i n Engl ish
deal ing wi th the anatomy of the dog has been steadily gaining ground D oubt .

less i n the opi nion of many the gap c an be adequately filled only by a systematic
, ,

treatise similar to th e classic A natomie des Hundes of Ell enberger and Bau m .

U nt il some such work makes i ts appearance perhaps the pr esent p ublication ,

may serve as a temporary means of supplying the deficiency .

For several reaso ns it was decided to introduce the subj ect of canine
anatomy to the English re ader in the form of short notes pla n ned to aid him in
h is desire to ob tain fi rs t hand knowledge by dissec tion
-
Herein are given .

direc tions which experienc e has shown will help the student to display the
various organs and struc tures i n an orderly and p rofitable ma n ner The .

des criptions which foll ow are p urp osely given i n the bri efest possible form ,

in order that the d issec tion of the whole animal may be accompl ished within
a reasonable length of time .

Whil e primar ily intended for the guidanc e of the student who proposes
to j oin the ranks of a profes sion which already contai ns a fair number of special
is ts whose work nec essitates a close knowledge of the anatomy o f the dog ,

i t is hoped that th ese notes may be of some ser v ice to the student of c omparative
anato my Wh o wishes to gain an ac quaintanc e with the struc ture of an e asily
ob ta in ed mammal .

The nomenclature herein empl oyed is that which may be called the B aden
and S tuttgart modification of the E N A of the hu man anatomist ; and if . . .
,

not perfect is infinitely better than the nondes cript nomenclature crowd ed
, ,

wi th synonyms formerly found i n works on comparative anatomy

,
.

M y thanks are due to my c oll eague Mr W M Mi tchell ,

for
. . .
,

ass is tance in many direc tio ns ; and to the p ubli shers for the cordial m anner in

which they have m et my sugges tions .

0 . CHA RNO CK B RAD LE Y .

E D I N B U R GH : J un e 1 9 1 2 .
 CO LO U R E D I LLU S TR AT I O N S I N T EX T

D i sse c ti on of th e P ec to ral R eg ion

D i ag ram o f th e Crani al Mesente rio Ar te rv
Coeli ac Ar te ry
P orta l Vein
Medial S u rfac e o f t h e R i ght Lu ng
Medi al S urfac e of the L eft L ung
D i ag ram of the T h oracic D u c t
D i ag ram of P art of t h e S y mpath etic N erv ous System
D i ag ram of th e U rinary O rg an s of t h e M ale
S u per fi ci al D issection o f th e Insi de of th e T hi g h
D i ssection of th e Insi de of th e T h i g h
S u per fi ci al D i ssec tion o f th e Gluteal R eg i on and T h i g h
D i ssection o f Gluteal R eg i on an d L ateral A spec t of th e T h i g h
D eep D i ssection o f t h e Glute al R eg ion
D i ag ram of th e Arteries on th e D orsum of th e P es
D i ag ram o f the N erves on th e D orsum of th e Pes
D i ssec tion of t h e L ateral A spect of t h e Le g
D i ssec ti on of Ori g in of T ibi al and Comm on Peroneal N erv es
D i ssection of t h e Medi al A spect of th e Leg
S u per fi c i al Di ssection of t h e S ole
D i ag ram of t h e Pl ant ar N erv es o f th e P e s
D i ag ram o f th e P l ant ar Ar teries of t h e Pes
D i ag ram of th e Extern al Ili ac an d Hypog astric A rteries
S u per fi ci al D i ss ection of t h e S h oulder an d N eck
D i ssec tion of th e S h oul der
D i ssec tion of th e Me di a] A spec t of th e S h oul der Ar m an d Fore arm
, ,

D iss ection of t h e L ateral As pec t of t h e S h oul der Ar m an d Forearm

, ,

D i ssection of t h e Arm
D issection of t h e Medi al A spec t of t h e Forearm
D i ag ram of N erves on t h e D orsu m of t h e M anus
D i ag ram of N erv es on th e Vol ar A spect of th e M anus
D i ag ram of t h e Arteries on th e D orsum of t h e M anus
D i ag ram of th e Vol ar Arteries of th e M anus
D i ssec tion of the S ide of th e N eck and T horax
viii I LLUSTRATIONS

S upe rfi c i al Di ssec tion of th e Fac e

D iss ec tion o f t h e T ongue Ph aryn x
, ,

Di ssec ti on of t h e L arynx
D is se c t i on of th e L aryn x
D i ssec tio n of t h e Orb it
Di ss ec ti on of t h e O rbi t
Ar teries at th e B as e of th e B rain

BLA CK A ND WHIT E ILLU S TR A T I O N S IN T E X T

D i ag ram of th e Brac hi al P lexu s

Posi t ion of th e Abdominal Vis cera
E x tent of Abdomi nal Musc les
th e
T rans v erse S ec tion of th e Abdom en
T ra n sv erse S ec ti on t hr ough th e Abdomen
T ran sv erse S ec tion of th e Ab do m en
T ransverse S ection of the Th orax
T rans v erse S ec tion of th e T hora x
Outline of t h e S pleen
Outline of t h e S t om ac h
L ateral S urf ace of t h e R i g h t Lung
L ateral S ur fac e of t h e L eft Lung
D iaphrag m ati c S urfac e of t h e Lun g s
Outline of t h e H e art as seen f rom t h e L eft
Outline of th e He art as seen from t h e R i g h t
D i ag ram of th e Branc h es of the Bron c hi
O utline o f t h e D i aphr ag m atic S urfac e o f t h e L iver
O ut line of th e Vis c eral S urf ac e of t h e L i v er
Di ag ram of th e Gall bl adder an d its A sso c i ated D uct s
-

Plexus o f Lu m b ar and S ac ral N erv es

Tendons on th e D orsum of th e M anus
T ransv erse S ec ti on of th e S pin al Cord
T ransv erse S ection s of th e S pin al Cord at D i ff eren t L ev el s
L ateral S urfac e of t he Cerebral Hemi sph ere
D orsal V iew of t h e Cereb ral Hemi sph ere
Medi al S urfac e of t h e Cereb ral Hemi sph ere
D i ssec ti on t o s h ow t h e Fl oor of t h e L ateral Ventri c le
L ateral A spe c t o f Hi nd brai n an d Mid brain
- -
 D I SS E CT I O N or T H E D O G

T HE dissec tion of the dog is best begun with the ani mal lying on its back .

I f the subj ec t is a femal e the mammary glan ds shoul d b e examined as far as

,

p ossible before any di ssec tion is carried ou t .

— The mammary glands of the dog are eight to ten i n number ,

arranged in a doubl e row— often asym metric al — along the ventral aspec t of the
thorax and abdomen When ten glands are present they c an generally be
.
,

designated as four thorac ic four abdominal and two pubic

, , .

Though nipples are present i n both sexes mam mary glands as such are
, , ,

seldom demo nstrabl e in the male Even in the female excep t during the
.
,

period of lactation the m amm ae do not generall y form very distinc t proj ec tions
,
.

Each n ipple ( papilla mamm ae ) is c onic al i n form c overed wi th ha irless s kin

, ,

and pierced at i ts apex by numerous ( eight to twel ve ) O penings Each smal l .

orific e leads to a m ilk ca na l ( duc tus lac tifer us ) whi ch traverses the length of th e
,

teat from a m ilk s in us ( sinus lac tifer us ) at its base .

D issecti n
o — M ake a longitudi nal incision along the mid —
ventral line fro m
the middl e of the neck to near the external genital p arts and a transverse ,

incision from the medial aspec t of one elbow to a c orrespondi ng point on

the opp osite limb Two short and two long flaps of skin should now be
.

reflected I n doing this be c areful to avoid removal of the m ammary

.
,

glands O n arriving at the base of the nipple make a c ircular c ut through

.
,

the ski n so as to leave the teat un i nj ur ed and attached to its gland I n .

tur n ing outwards the flaps in the neck avoid removal of the c utaneous
,

muscle which here forms a thi n l ayer of transverse fibres .

If the mammary glands are not active the gland tissue will be scanty and -

form merely a thi n layer u nder th e ski n Generall y the thoracic glands are
.

separate from each other whil e those over the abdomen are c ontinuous Th e
, .

charac ter of the glands is much more ob vious during lactation when they ,

form a c ont inuous lobul ated sheet stretching from the oral b order of th e
,

pec toral muscles to the neighb ourhood of the external ge nital parts .

— Remove the thorac ic mammary glands and define the p ectoral

D iss ection
muscles Then proceed with the d is section as in the male
. .
 D ISSE CTION OF T HE D O G

f
D is s ec tio n — If
o the subj ec t be a
th e Ill a le m ale make an
. i nci sion along
the mid ventral line from the middle of the neck to the prepuce Then
-
.

make a transverse incision from the medial aspec t of one elb ow to a

similar poin t on the O pposite limb Turn b ack four flaps of skin . .

In doing so an extensive bu t thin subcutaneous muscular sheet

— m c utan eus — wi ll be exposed in the neck where its fibres are
,

.
,

transverse and over th e abdomen where they are oblique

, , .

Define the pectoral muscles .

I n clearing the f ascia from the pec toral muscles note s mall vessels and
nerves ( about six ) whic h appear close to the mid ventral line and
,
-

proceed laterally over the surfac e of the muscles These vessels are the .

perforating branches of the internal mammary artery In the xiphoid .

region an artery and vein ( branches of the cranial epigastric vessels )

appear from under the border of the deep pectoral muscle and run ,

obliquely in cando lateral dir ection to supply the mammary region

-
.

These are larger i n the female .

M P E C TO R AL IS SU P E R FI C I AL IS — In the main the fibres of the superficial

. .

pectoral muscle run transversely to the long axis of the body The origin of .

the muscle is from the fir st two segments of the sternu m and from the septu m
between it and its fell ow muscle and i ts insertion— hidden as yet by the ,

brachio cephalic muscle— is to the li ne on the humerus running distalwards

-

from the tuberculum maj us .

Crossing th e superficial pectoral muscle c lose to its insertion and lying i n ,

a narrow S pace bounded by this and the brachio c ephalic muscle are two -

vessels namely a c ommunicating branch from the c ephalic vein to the external
,

j ugular vein and the deltoid ramus of the thorac o acromial artery
,
-
.

D issection —R e fl ec t
the superficial pectoral muscle by cutting across i t
close to its origin and notice in doing so that the muscle increases in
,

thickness towards its crani al border Clean the surfac e of the deep .

pectoral muscle and dissect out the various struc tur es lying in a triangular
space at the root of the neck I n reflecting the superficial muscle observe .

its nerve of supply ( from the brachial plexus ) bendi ng round the crani al
border of the deep pec toral muscle accompanied by the pec toral ramus ,

of the t horaco acromial artery and its satellite vein

-

M P E C TO AL IS P OFUN D US
. R — The deep pectoral muscle is much more
R .

extensive than the superficial member of the same group Consequently a .

,

considerable extent of it is visible before the superficial muscle is reflec ted .

Its fibres are disposed with a varying degree of obli quity Th e most caudal .

fibres are the most obli q ue The caudal border of the muscle is rendered some
.

what i ndefinite from the presence of a narrow band sometimes isolated and ,

a lw ays sep arabl e from the rest , .

 D ISS E CT ION OF TH E DO G 3

Th e origin of t h e muscle is fro m t h e sternu m from th e level of the sec ond

c ostal cartilage to t h e xiphoid process I ts insertion is into the medial tubercle
.

( tuberculu m minus ) of the hu merus and by means of a thin te ndon which

, ,

c rosses t h e origin of the biceps t o t h e lateral tubercle ( tubercul um maj us )

,

j ug ular is er l ern a
“
v .

m b rach w
.
-
crp h al ic us

m . sl er no -cep h al ic us

m p edoral is
.
sup erfi c ial is

medianus
m biceps brach n

n . ulna r is

l
m . t ri ce ps bra ch ii

m tensor f ascia
'
’

i .
b r ach u
ant a

m p ed oral is p rof und us

.

m . red us ab dom inis

FI G . l .
—Di
ss ec t ion of th e pec t ora l reg i on .

als o The most c audal fibres of the muscle are c onnec ted with the c utaneous
.

muscle of the abdomen .

A t the root of the neck is a triangular spac e of some mo ment on acc ount
of the structures c ontained therein The lateral limit of the space is formed
.

by the brac hi o cephalic muscle M edially the sterno c ephali c muscl e forms
- -

its boundary ; while its base —

.

c audal in position— lies at the edge of the

pec toral muscles .

4 D ISSE CT ION OF THE D O G

Within th e spac e will be fou nd the external j ugular vein the c ommu nicating ,

branch from the cephalic vein the omo c ervic al arterial and venou s trunks ,
-

a nd the nerves to the superficial pec toral and brachio c ephalic muscles In -
.

the dep ths of the triangle is part of the brachial plexus of nerves .

A ll these struc tures wi ll b e more fully exposed during the dissec tion of th e
axill ary spac e .

D iss ectio n — B e fl e c t
the deep pectoral muscle by cutting through it a
short di stance from its origin This exposes the axillary space the .
,

struc tures i n which should b e cleaned with great care In reflec ting .

the muscle a lymph gland ( the axillary gland ) will b e found lying over
,
-

the di stal part of the teres maj or and between this and the pectoral
muscle Branches from the brachial plexus of nerves should also b e
.

noted bending round the axillary vessels to sink into and supply the deep
pec toral muscle .

A X I LLA — The axillary spac e is bounded laterally by the scapula and the
.

subscapular muscle and medi ally by the ches t wall and the muscles clothing
,
-

it I n the natural condi tion the space can scarc ely b e said to exist exc ep t as
.

a narrow c hi nk fi lled by areolar and fatty tissue but on di ssec tion its me di al
and lateral walls are separated from each other and a defin i te spac e is produc ed .

Dorsally the two wall s meet at a very acute angle ventrally however they , ,

diverge slightly and the floor of the space is defined by the p ectoral muscles
, .

Craniall y the axillary spac e c ommu nicates with the neck whereas caudally it
i s closed in by the latissimus dorsi and cutaneous muscles The principal .

c ontents of the space are the axillary vessels and the brachial plexus of
nerves .

V B E A AX I LLAR IS —The axillary vessels are among the struc tures first
. . .

exposed on reflecting the deep p ectoral muscle The vein dr ains the blood .

from the limb and j oins the external j ugular vein at the entrance to the
,

chest thus c onstituting one of the roots of the innominate vein Its c o llateral
,
.

tributaries are the lateral thoracic subscapular and omo cervical veins and ,
-

small vessels from the pec toral muscles Occasionally the omo c ervical venous .
-

trunk j oins the j ugular di rect Of the tributari es the subscapular vein is .

by fa r the largest its volume depen di ng mainl y upon the c irc umstance that
,

i t continues the c ephali c vein .

The axi ll ary artery is a c ontinuation of the subclavian artery Com .

m c nc ing on a level with the first rib it runs down the limb as far as the tendon
,

of i nsertion of the teres maj or muscle M ost of its branches wil l b e exa mi ned .

in c onnection with the scapular and arm regions but two should n ow b e ,

noted as supplying the pectoral muscles and their neighbourhood These are .

the thor aco acromial and lateral thoracic arteries

-

—
.

A THO AC O AC O IAL IS
R. R M The thorac o acromial artery soon di vides into
-
.
-

two branches a ramus delto ideus and a ra mus p ectoralis Both of these have
, .
 0

( l li T HE

been al ready no t ed i n c onne c t ion with t h e dissecti o n of t h e pe c t o ral mu scles .

V ery c omm o nly t h e deltoid r a mu s arises from t h e o n t o c ervi c a l trunk -

— l ll c lateral thorac ic artery arises some

.

A T HO R A P A LI S
' ‘

l ittle di s t a n c e f ro m t h e border of t h e firs t r ib s upplies t h e pec toral mu scles , ,

runs along t h e dee p fac e of t h e dee p pectoral mu scl e i n c om pany with t h e nerve
t o t h e latissimu s dorsi and en ds i n t h e c u taneous m u s c le over the abdomen
, .

TR UN C US 0 M O — C E R V I CALIS —T h e omo cervical trunk is a branch of t h e

.
-

subclavian artery A rising within t h e firs t rib i t passes medial to the axill a ry
.
,

artery and the brachial plexus to divide before l ong i nto the ascending cervi c al
a nd t ransverse scapular arteries .

The as ce nding c er vica l a rtery ( a c ervic alis asc endens ) ru ns for a distanc e o n .

t h e medial surfac e of t h e brachio cephalic muscle and finally enters the -

substanc e of this mu scl e .

The tra n svers e s c ap ular artery ( a transversa scapul ae ) passes towards th e .

c ranial border of the subscapular muscl e and divides into s everal branches .

t h e m ai n one of whic h acc ompanies the suprascapular nerve .

N P IIR E N I C U S — The phreni c nerve will b e found between the axillary vei n
. .

and artery dorsal to the om o c ervical arterial trun k I t arises by three roots
-
.

from the ventral divisions of the fifth sixth and seventh c ervic al nerves and , , ,

l eaves the present di ssection by entering the thorax Later i t will b e .

,

traced to the diaphragm to which it c arries m otor impulses .

D iss ec tio n — Cut across th e axillary vessels close to the first rib , . This
allows of a more c omplete inspec tion of the brachial plexus .

P L E XU S B R AC HI AL IS — The brachial plexu s is a somewhat c omplex arrange

.

ment of nerves formed by branches from the last three cervical and the first
two thoracic nerves I t is plac ed b etween the axillary vessel s and the scalenu s
.

muscles .

I ts branches are N erve to th e braclcio c eplz alic m usc le n sn p rascap ula r is -

,
.
,

n . s ubs cap ula r is , n . m usc ulo -

c uta neu s , n . ax illa r is , n . ra dia lis , n . m edia n us ,

n . ulna r is , n . lleorac o clorsa lis , n n thora ca les

-
and n thoracalis long ns . ven tra les , . .

M os t of these will be examined in the dissection of the limb ; bu t the

following points shoul d be noted at the present moment The ve ntral thorac ic .

nerves ( nn t h orac ale s ventrales ) are mainly distribu ted to the pec toral muscles
. .

One of them supplies the skin and cu taneou s mu scle on the side of the ches t
and abdomen The thorac o dorsal nerve ( n thoraco dorsalis ) supplies the
.
-
.
-

latissimus dorsi muscle .

If t h e subj ec t is a mal e the external genital organs should next b e di ssec ted .

PA R TE S G ENIT AL E S E X TE R N A L— The male external genital parts c onsis t

of the scrotu m the peni s and the prepuc e
, ,
.

The scrot um is a membranou s bag with a doubl e cavity in which the t e stes
B 3
 G D ISS E CT ION OF THE D O G

a relodged I t li es between the thighs and forms a rounded prominenc e

.
,

crossed in a cranio caudal direction ( generally ob liquely ) by a shallow groove

-

in which a fain t lin e the raph e scroti may be detected

,
The skin of the ,
.

scrotum is thin and provided wi th c omparatively few hairs .

D issectio n — M ake an incision through the skin along the raphe of the
scrotum and expose the underlying tissues
, .

nn . cervi cales

n .
p h ren z c us

To m “
'

.
p ectoral i s sup erfic ial
( hom eal ts lo ng us
-
n .

To 772 . brach io -
cep h al i cus

n . musc ulo -
c utaneus

n . thora co -d orsalw n . suprascap ular is

\nn . s ubs cap ul arcs

To m
‘

.
p ectoral z s p rof undus

«
n . ax i llarz s

nn
. m edianus cl ul na r i s

n . ra dla] i s

FI G 2 . .
—Diag ram of th e b rac h ial ple x us .

The wall of the scrotum can b e resolved into three layers Of these th e .

most superficial c onsists of ski n U nder thi s is a fibrous tissu e known as th e

.
’

tun ica dartos which wi th its fell ow of the other side forms the medi an s eptu m
, , ,

between the two scrotal cavities — the septum scroti .

Removal of the dartos exposes the third layer c omposed of a fascial tun i c
l ined withi n by a serous membrane The fascia is c ontinuous with that .

c overing the deep fac e of the transverse abdominal mu scle and is in the form ,

of a pear shaped sac the narrow end of which is c onnected with the superficial
-

end of the inguinal canal Al ong the dorsal side of the narrower part of the
.

sac there is a muscular slip the extern al cremaster m uscle ( m cremaster externus )
, .
,

associated wi th the internal obli que mu scle of the abdominal wall on the one ,

hand an d terminatin g on the other hand i n an aponeurosis within the

, , ,

substance of the wall of the scrotum .

 D ISS E CTION OF TH E DO G 7

T UNI CA v ar: IN A I I s tunic a vaginalis is a serou s mem brane c ontinuou s

. .
,

t hrough t h e ingui n al canal with the peritoneu m Like other s erou s membrane s
,
.

it is c om posed of a parietal a nd a visceral part T h e parietal portio n lines .

the i nterior of t h e sc rotu m and is c ontinu ou s with the visceral part i n the
c a udo dorsal region of t h e sc rotal cavity
-
The visceral part of the tu nic will .

be displayed a fter a n examinatio n of th e testis and its su rroundings has

been made
— Cu t through the parietal tunica vaginalis wit h a pai r of scissors
D iss ectio n . .
,

and examine th e c ontents of t h e cavity of the scrotu m .

T ESTIS E T E P I D I D YM Is The testes are two oval organs slightly flattened

.
-
,

l aterally ( especially on the medial surface ) each l odged i n its own c ompartment ,

of the scrotu m The l ong axis o f eac h testis is oblique and runs cando ventral
.
,
-
.

The two surfaces medi al and lateral are smooth and c onvex as is also the
, , ,

ventral border The dorsal b order and the two extremities are c onnected
.

with t h e epididymis .

The epidi dymis of the dog is relatively large I t c onsists of an elongated .

,

l aterally c ompressed mass formed by the tortuou s windi ngs of a long tube held
together by dense c onnective tissue and c overed by the tunica vaginalis .

The body ( c orpu s epididymidis ) or main part of the structure lies dorsal to , ,

the testis The crani al and caudal ends known respec tively as the h ead
.
,

( capu t epididymidis ) and the tail ( c auda epididymidis ) are a dherent to the ,

extremities of the testis The cauda is also firmly bound to the wall of the
.

scrotu m From the c auda the ductus def eren s takes origin The duc t runs
. .

c ra n ial war ds dorso medi al to the testis

-
at first somewhat c onvoluted b ut ,

a fterwards straighter and passes i nto the inguinal c anal

,
.

F U N I C U LU S S P E R M A TI C US — The spermatic c ord c onsists of the duc tu s

.

deferens and c ertain blood vessels nerves and lymphatics The vei n withi n , ,
.

the c ord is richly c oiled and forms a prominent obj ec t extendi ng from the ,

head of the epididymis i nt o the inguinal c anal P artly buried within the .

venou s mass is the i nternal spermatic artery ( a sp ermatic a interna ) . .

The V isceral part of the tuni c a vaginalis may now b e fo llowed I t i s .

applied closely to the testis and epididymis and dip s in between these two ,

organs to form a cavity the s in us ep ididym idis the entranc e to whi ch is

, ,

lateral i n position Continued towards the inguinal canal the tunic enc loses
.
,

the spermatic c ord from which and from the epi di dymis it is reflected as a
,

mesentery c ontaining fi ne nerve filaments I t will be observed that the .

deferent duc t and the external spermatic artery are enclosed i n a special
sheath of the tu nic whi ch is an o ff set from the c overing of the other
c onstituents of the spermatic c ord .

PR E PU TI UM —The prepuce i s a tubular sheath of integu ment enclosing th e

.

glans of the peni s and i n the retrac ted state of thi s organ c ircu mscribing a
, , ,

cavity which c ommu nicates with the surfac e by a slit like orific e The prepuc e -
.

B 4
 D ISSE CTION OF TH E D O G

c onsists of two layers a double parietal layer and a visceral layer intimately ,

adherent to the glans penis The superficial sheet of the pari etal layer is
.

composed of skin diff ering little from that of the neighbourhood This should .

be reflected by maki ng a longitudi nal incision from the preputial orific e to

t h e scrotum .Care must b e taken to preserve the prepu tial muscle ( m pr ee .

p u t ialis ) which as a flattened

,
band springs from the abdominal,
ap oneu r osis

i n the xiphoid region and runs i mmediately u nder the skin to form a l oop
,

round the orific e of the prepuce .

If the deep sheet of the parietal layer be now slit open with a pair of scissors ,

its r esemblanc e to muc ous membrane will be mani fest The surfac e looking .

towards the peni s is longitudinally folded and studded with irregular rows
of flattened rounded elevations caused by masses of lymphoid tissue The
,
.

membrane is directly c ontin uou s with the visceral layer of the prepuce whi ch ,

extends over the glans penis to the urethral orific e where it meets the urethral
mucous membrane .

It sho uld now be noted that the prepuce is supplied wi th blood by the
external pudenda] artery .

Dissectio n — The penis should now b e freed from its surroundings as far as
its root In clea ni ng the organ note the presence of a narrow pal e
.
, ,

muscle the retractor of the penis running al ong its urethral surfac e
, ,

from the anus to the vicinity of the glans P reserve also the dorsal .

vessels and nerves which will b e found on the opposite surfac e .

P ENIS —The peni s c onsists of a middl e part ( its body or c orpus penis ) a
.
,

r oot ( radi x peni s

) attached to the arch formed by the two ischial bones and a ,

free extremity ( glans p en is) of considerable length .

The term dorsum p en is is applied to that aspec t of the organ which is i n

c ontac t with the abdominal wall whereas the opposite aspect is called the
u r eth ra l s ur a ce ( facies urethralis
f ) .

The body of the peni s lies i n the mid dl e line dorsal to the testes and crossed
,

laterally by the ductus deferens I t is c omp osed of three bodies running

.

parallel to each other .

The corpora ca vernosa p en is are two rods of erec tile tissue surrounded and
bound together by a dense fibrous envelope the tun ica albug in ea [ corporum ,

c a ver n o s or um
] and separated from each other by a fibrous septu m ( s ep tum
,

p en is )
.
In the ischial region th e two c orpora diverge each forming a crus ,

p en is which is attached to the border of t h e ischium From abou t the middl e .

of the peni s the c orpora are continued on wards as a bone the os p en is This
,
, .

may be c onsidered as formed by two narrow plates j oined dorsally and di verging
ventrally to enclose a groove i n which t h e urethra l ies The c audal end of the .

bone is trunc ated The cranial end is more pointed and to it is appended a
.

curved process c omposed of fibrous tissue of cartilage — like density .

Th e third erec t il e b ody of t h e penis is the c or us ca ver n os um uretlz rce

p ,
 DISSE CTION O F T H E D O G 9

associate d as i ts name i ndic ates with t h e ure thr a and l odged i n a groove on
, , ,

t h e urethral su rf a c e o f t h e penis .

Th e two c rura penis forming the radix penis are c overed by the ischi o
, .

cavernous mu scl es I n th e m iddle line between th e crura t h e c orpus c aver

.
, ,

n o s u m u re th rz o forms a double expansion the b ulb us u rntlz rce also c overed , ,

b v a muscle the J] bulbo ca vern os us

, .
-
.

T h e glans penis of th e dog is of c onsiderable length Thinnes t abou t th e .

m iddle i t expands into a swelling at each e n d

, The caudal expansion kno wn .

a s the bu lbus
g la ndis is the l arger and is devel oped o n the dorsal side of the ,

os peni s From i t the dorsal veins of the penis take origin

. .

The s maller expansion of t h e glans forms the free extremity of th e penis and
i s more cylindrical i n form than th e bulbu s glandis Its terminal part i s .

pointed and h as the urethral orifice at its apex Running along the urethral .

su rfa c e of the glans is a feeble fold of prepuc e kno wn as the f raen ulum p rceputii .

V v D O R S AL E S P ENIS — The two dorsal veins of the penis arise i n the erec tile
. .

tissu e of the bulbus glandi s Running along the dorsu m of the penis to its.

root they bend round the border of the ischia and form the main roots of the
,

internal pudendal veins .

A A D O R S AL E S P ENIS — The dorsal arteries of the penis lie lateral to the veins
. .

of the same name Each forms the largest terminal branch of the internal
.

pudendal artery of its own side and l eaving th e pelvis by curving ro und the , ,

border of the ischium can be readi ly followed to the glans penis

,
.

N N D O R S AL E S P ENIS — Th e dorsal nerves of th e p e nis branches of the

. .
,

intern al pudendal acc ompany the dorsal vessels each nerve lying lateral
, ,

t o the artery which i t follows .

— Cut through the roots of the brachial plex us and clean up th e

D iss ectio n .

ventral and lateral aspects of the thorax and abdomen In doing thi s .
,

firs t define the extent and attachments of the c uta neou s muscl e as far as
the present dissec tion permits P reserve the branches of the intercostal .

and lumbar vessel s and nerves which appear ab ou t midway bet ween the
mid dors al and mid ventral lines of the trunk Observe that the branch
- -
.

fro m the third or fourth interc ostal nerve is of good size and crosses th e
border of the latissimu s dorsi mu scle to reach the lateral aspec t of the
arm I t i s c onnected with a ventral thoracic nerve from the brachial
.

plexus .

In removing the remains of th e prepuc e of the male or the mamm ae of the ,

female take care not to destroy the external pudendal vessels and the
,

ex ternal sp ermatic nerve which may b e found embedded in an ac c um u

lation of fat in the i ngui nal region The artery and vein can generally b e .

traced to an anastomosis with branches from the crani al epigastr i c

vessel s .
 l ti D ISS E CTION OF TH E DOG

A group of lymph glands will also be found in the inguinal region

-
.

Sever al vessels and nerves pierce the abdominal wall Of these the circ um .

flex iliac vessels and the lateral c utaneous femoral nerve are the most
.

conspicu ous They appear close to the angle of the iliu m and are dis tri
.

buted i n the cutaneous muscle of the abdomen and in the ski n over th e
lateral proximal part of the thigh A little cranial to the point of .

appearance of the circumflex iliac vessels the ph re ni c o abdomi nal artery ,

-

pierces the oblique muscle of the abdomen Branches of the ilio inguinal .
-

and ilio hyp ogastric nerves should also b e noted and preserved
-
.

A P U D EN DA E X TE R N A — The external pudendal artery is generally a

. .

branch of the deep femoral but it may arise from a c ommon tru nk from which
,

springs the caudal epigastric artery as well The origin of the vessel cannot b e .

examined at present Crossing the spermatic c ord me di all y the artery ru ns

.
,

towards the u mbili cus and supplies the inguinal lymph — glands the prepuce , ,

and the surroun ding skin In the female it is larger and f urnishes blood to
.

some of the mammary glands .

N S P E R M A TI C US E X TE R N U S — The external spermatic nerve is a part of the

. .

genito femoral nerve A ppearing through the abdominal wall along with the
-
.

external pudendal vessels it crosses the spermatic c ord and is expended in the
,

external geni tal parts or the mammary glands and the skin of the i nner part
, ,

of the thigh I t is sometimes c onnected wi th the ili o inguinal nerve

.
-
.

M OB L I QUUS E X TE R N U S A B D O M I NIS
.
The external ob lique is the m os t .
-

superficial m usc le of the abdo mi nal wall Its origin is by di gitations from .

the ribs from the fifth or sixth to the last and from the lumb o dorsal fas cia ,
-
.

The muscular fibres run in a cando ventr al di rection as far as the border of th e -

straight abdom inal muscle Here they give pl ac e to an ap oneur osis whi ch.

i s att ached to the li nea alba A n i mp ortant part of the aponeur os is stretch e s
.

from the lateral angle of the ilium to the pubis near the symphysis This .

c onstitutes the i nguin al ligam en t of P oupart ( ligamentum inguin ale

1 11 association with whi ch is the superficial opening of the inguinal c anal
.

Opposite this opening the pectineus muscle takes part of its orig in from the
inguinal ligament A t the same p oint a thi n reflec tion of the aponeurosis to tak e
.

a
p rt in the form a tion of the scrotu m shoul d be notic ed M e di al to the i ng uin al .

c a nal i e in the p ubic regi on the aponeurosis is thin and mixed with fibres from
,
. .

the other abdominal muscles .

From the aponeurosis of the oblique muscle a thin ill defi n ed sheet is ,
-

reflec ted onto the medial aspect of the thigh

—
.

M
M . LA TISSI US D O SI A S its name indicates this is a very broad muscle
R .

i
c over ng the dorso lateral part of the thorax Its origin is from the lu mbo
-

dorsal fasc 1 a by means of which it is attached to the spinous processes of the las t
,

seven thoracic vertebr ae and by fleshy strips from the las t two or three ribs
,
.

i
Its nsert on Is by a flattened tendon into the crista tuberculi minoris of the
i
12 D ISSE CT ION OF TH E D O G

doing so observe its firm attachment to the tendi nous intersections of th e

u n de rlv ing straight m usc le Cut across the fleshy part of the internal .

obl i q ue muscle i n the same manner as was done wi th the external obli que .

R eflec t the transverse muscl e of the ribs .

M . R E C TUS A B D O M INIS — The fibres of the straight muscle of the abdomen

.

run parallel to the middle line of the b ody Generally six ten di nous i nter .

sections cross the muscle i n an irregularly obliqu e manner Of these one .

occurs on a level with the umbilicus two are caudal and three are cra ni al ,

to this point A s has already been seen the superficial sheath of th e muscl e
.
,

i s firmly adherent to the intersec tions .

The cranial attachments of the rectus muscle are by means of a thin ap on e u

ro t ic tendon ( partly c overed by the expanded i nsert ion of the m transversus -
.

c ostarum ) from the cartilage of the fi rst rib and from th e sternal end of th e ,

cartilages of the ribs from the sec ond to the seventh I n ad dition fleshy slips .

l eave the sternal ends of th e eighth and ninth ribs .

Caudally the muscle is attached to the b order of the p ubis .

D iss ectio n — B efl ec t the straight muscl e by a transverse incision about

.

the m id dl e of its lengt h and thus expose the crani al and caudal epigastric
,

vessels as well as certain i nterc ostal and lumb ar nerves and vessels .

A . P IG A ST I CA CA U DAL IS — The c audal epigastric artery either arises in

E R .
-

dependently from the deep f emoral artery or it has an origin in c ommon wi th ,

t h e external pudendal The artery lies on the deep fac e of the rectus muscl e
.

of the abdomen and runs i n a crani al direction It is acc ompani ed by the .

caudal epigastric vei n ( v epigastrica caudalis ) . .

A E T v E P I G A STR I CA CR A NI AL IS — The cranial epigastri c vessels appear

. . .

between the xiphoid process of the ster n u m and the ni nth or tenth c ostal
cartilages that is not far from the middl e line They follow a slightly obli que
, .

direction on the deep surface of the rec tus muscle Superficial branches .
,

piercing the muscl e or crossing i ts medial b order i n the xiphoid region have ,

already been noticed .

N E R V E S o r T HE AB D O MI N AL VVA LL — Lying deep to the internal obliqu e

and rectu s muscles on the one hand and superficial to the transverse musc le ,

on th e other are branches of the last five thoracic and the first two lu mbar
,

nerves .

The last four intercostal n erves are derived from the ventral primary di visions
of the ni nth tenth eleventh and t welfth thoracic nerves They appear from
, , , .

beneath the c ostal arch cross the surfac e of th e transverse muscle and
, ,

disappear u nder t h e rec tus The last th o racic n erve is similarly di sp osed
. .

The ilio h ypogastric and {tic ing uinal n erves arise from the ventral pri mary
-
-

di visions of t h e first t wo lumbar nerves .

N ilio hypogastr ie us — The ilio hy ogastric nerve di vides into l ateral and
-

p
-
. .
 D ISS E CTI ON O F T HE D O G 13

medi a l bran c he s t h e former pierc ing t h e t wo obli q u e mus c le s to pas s ventral

wards on t h e su rfac e of the external obli q ue abou t midway between the l a st
rib and t h e iliu m T h e medial branch is disposed be t ween the internal obli q ue
.

and t h e t ra nsverse muscles i n the same manner as are t h e thora c ic nerves .

N ilio ing uirm lis

.
-
The ilio inguinal nerve has a distri bution very si milar
.
- -

t o that of t h e ilio hypogastric -

.

M T R A N S V E R S U S A B D O M INIS — A S the name suggests the fibres of the

. .
,

transverse muscle of t h e abdomen run for the most p a rt in a direc tio n at right , ,

angles to the long axis of the body Towards the inguinal region however the .
, ,

fibres assume a c a udo ventral obliquity The margin of the fleshy part of the
-
.

muscle is mainly c ontinued towards t h e mi ddle line dorsal to the rec tus muscle ,

bu t abou t midway between the u mbilicus and the pubis the margin o f the
transverse overlaps the ventral surfac e of the straight muscle .

The fibres of the transverse muscle arise fro m the extremities of the
transverse processes of the lumbar vertebr ae and from th e medial surfac e of the ,

l ast four or five ribs and their cartilages .

The aponeurotic tendon which succee ds the fleshy part of the muscl e and by ,

which i t finds att achment to the linea alba is blended with the deep layer of
the in ternal obli que aponeurosis cra nial to the u mbilic us Thus i t shares in the .

formation of the deep sheath of th e rec tus muscle Caudal to the u mb il icus .

the aponeurosis bec omes thin and ab ou t mi dway between the u mbili cus and
, ,

the pubis suddenl y changes from the dorsal to the ventral side of the rec tus
,
.

V A GIN A M R E C TI A B D O M INIS
. The c o n stitution of the sheath of th e
.
-

straight muscle c an now b e fully determined The s uperficial or ventral .

layer of the sheath is mai nly formed by the ap oneuroses of the external and
i nternal obliqu e muscles ; bu t i n the ingui nal region to these is added th e
, ,

aponeur osis of the transverse muscle The superficial layer therefore is .

, ,

c omplete and of c ons iderable stoutness The deep or dorsal layer of the sheath .
,

o n the c ontrary is inc omplete Where the straigh t muscle li es over the c ostal
,
.

c art ilages no sheath i nterposes From the region of the xiphoid proc es s to a
.

variable di stanc e fro m the u mbilicus the sheath i s formed by the aponeurosis
of the transverse muscle and the deeper layer of the aponeurosis of the internal
obli que muscle Caudal to this the trans verse aponeurosis alone for m s the
.

sheath t o a point abou t midway between the u mbi lic us and the p ubis where ,

the aponeurosis passing ventral to the rec tus the deep sheath bec omes deficient , .

Where th e sheat h s of the two recti muscles meet in the mi ddl e line a strong
c ord is formed This is known as the lin ea a lba and stretches fro m the xi phoid
.
,

proc ess of the sternu m to the symphysis p ubis Comp osed of interlacing and .

decussat ing fibres derived fro m th e aponeuroses of the ob liqu e and trans vers e
muscles i t is broadest i n the xiphoid region gradually narro wing towards the
, ,

pubi s A t a p oint on the li nea alba genera lly about two thir ds of the di s tanc e
.
,
-

from the p ubis to the xi phoid is a scar the um bilic us markin g the po int of
, , ,

attachment of the u mbilical c ord of embryoni c lif e .

14 D ISSE CTION OF TH E DO G

C A N AL IS ING U IN AL IS —The inguinal c anal is a passage thr ough the ab

.

do m in al wall i n which lies the spermatic cord of the male or the round ligament
of the female In the male moreover the testis descends into the scrotu m by
.
, ,

way of the canal Th e canal is li ned by a tubular c onnection between th e

.

peritoneum of the abdomen and the tunic a vaginalis of the scrotu m I n .

direction it is obli que its superficial extremity ( a nnulus inguinalis subcutan eus )
being caudal and medial to its deep extremi ty ( ann ulus i ng uina lis abdom ina lis) .

The canal shoul d be examin ed on that side of the ab domen where the
muscles are yet intact Introduc e a prob e or glass rod into the canal an d
.
,

clean i n the first place the subcutaneous r ing T hi s is speaking generally

, ,
.
, ,

an oval opening i n the aponeurotic tendon of the external obli que muscle of
the abdomen The lateral b oundary of the ring is formed by the stout part
.

of the aponeurosis conn ected wi th the origin of the pectineu s muscle Th e .

medi al b oun dary i s formed by the c ombined aponeuroses of the external

and internal ob liqu e and the transverse muscles .

The canal itself has a length of some 3 0 mm and crosses the later al b order .

of the rectus muscle obli quely Near the subcutaneous ring it runs along the
.
,
’
grooved surface of the inguinal ligament ( P oupart s li gament ) Th e canal .

may b e c onsidered as possessing a ventral and a dorsal wall Th e ventral wall .

t h roughout the whole of its extent is formed by the aponeurosis of the external
obli que and throughout the greater part of its extent by the fleshy part o f
, , ,

the internal obli que muscle also Close to the abdo mi na l rin g some fibres of
.
,

the trans verse muscl e may assist in the formation of this wall b ut more c om ,

mo ul y the abdomi nal ring occurs solely i n the fascia of the transverse mus cle .

The dorsal wall close to the subc utaneous ring is formed for a very short
, ,

di stance by the combined ob lique and transverse ap oneuroses For th e .

greater part the wall is c onstituted by the fascia of th e trans verse muscl e
c overed i nternally by the peritoneum .

In the female the inguin al canal c ontain s a funnel shaped cavity c ontinuous
,
-

with that of th e peritoneu m O utside its serous lin ing there is a c onsiderabl e
.

ac cu mulation of fat .

In intimate association with the inguinal canal are th e external pudendal

and caudal epigastric vessels The external pudendal art ery and vein c ross
.

the medial aspect of the spermatic cord at the subcutaneous ring Th e c audal .

epigastric vessels also cross the medial side of the canal but they do s o obli quely ,

and at a variable point in its length Running for a d istanc e parallel to th e

.

inguinal canal and in its dorsal wall is the external spermatic nerve
, , .

D iss ectio n — Open the abdomi nal cavity by making an inc ision along th e
whole length of the linea alba and a transvers e incision on each sid e
,

through the transverse muscle and the peritoneu m This having been .

done a fold of peritoneum will b e discovered pass ing along the lin ea
,

alba to the urinary bladder In this fold there is frequently a c onsiderabl e

.

accumulation of fat .
 D I S S E C TI O N OF T H E D O G 15

(
‘
A V UM —l h
bony b o und a ries of t h e abdom inal c a vi ty are
' ‘

inc omple t e Dorsally t h e lumbar and sa c ral vertebr ae with thei r trans verse
. .

processes a re c overed by the thick muscles o f the b ac k A t the c ra nial end o f .

t h e c avity some of the ri b s and thei r c artilages form a girdle rou nd the ab domen ,

whil e the pelvic bones serve t h e same purpose at t h e caudal e nd O therwis e th e .

later al and ventral walls are formed by soft struc tures only The ventral wall .
,

much l onger than the dorsal slopes downwards from the pubes to the xi ph o id
,

process of th e sternu m t h e steepness of th e slope di ffering in diff erent breeds

,
.

For descri ptive purposes i t i s necessary to divide the general abdominal

c avity int o the p elvic ca vity and the a bdo m en p ro per T h e plane of separation
.

is on a level with the promontory of the sacrum the il io — pec tineal lines and
,

the cranial border of pubes I t is therefore oblique to the long axis of the
.
, ,

abdomen proper inasmuch as it slopes c audalwards from the sacrum to th e pubis

, .

Though O f questionabl e u tility the abdomen proper may b e subdivided

,

into nine regions by four i maginary planes — two trans verse to th e long axis
of the body and two parallel to th e median plane One of the transverse .

planes c uts the abdomen on a level with the most c audal part of the twelfth
rib Th e second transverse plane is parallel to the first and is taken on a level
.

with the lateral angle of the ilium Thus the abdomen is divided into three
.

transvers e zones which m ay b e named subc ostal u mbilical and hypogastric , .

Th e two longitudinal planes of subdivision are parallel to the median plane

of the body and are imagined as occurring on a level with th e mid p oint of the -

distance between the lateral angle of th e ilium and the symphysis pubis The .

l ongitudinal planes subdivide e ac h transverse zone into three regions as follows

Right hyp ochondriac region .

Subc ostal zone . Epigastric region .

Left hypochondriac region .

Righ t lumbar region .

U mbilic al zone . U mbilical region .

0 Left lumbar region .

Righ t iliac regio n .

H yp ogas tric zone . Hyp ogastric region .

Left ili ac region .

C ONTEN TS O F THE A B D O M E N PR O P E R —The organs lodged within the

abdomen are nu merou s and serve widely different physiological purp oses .

Th ey may be tabulated as follows

( 1 ) Ali mentary organs .

16 D ISSE CTION OF T HE D O G

Fl o . 3 .
—T o sh o w l
th e position of t h e ab do m ina v is c era in re at ion t o th e ex te rior l
p x , x iph oid proc es s . . .

of s te rnum ; s e , c os t al a rc h ; v f ,
g all b ladde r p , pylor us ; h , liv er ; r d , rig h t kid ney ; c t , t rans v e rse
-
. . . . . . . . . .

l
c o on ; l s plee n ; u , u m b ilic us ; d , duode num ; O d , ri h t ov ar
. . .
g .
y ; i e , c aec um ; r s , e ft kidney ; o s , le f
. . .
t . . . l . .

ov ary c d de sc e nding c olon ; v u , urinary b ladde r ; u t , ute rus ; p r , prostat e

. . . o p , pub ic b one s
. . . . . . .

( T h is fi
g ure is reproduc ed by p er miss ion f M essrs Ba illz ere T indall
o d Cox )
o
.
.
,
 D ISS E CTION OF T HE DO G I7

FI G . 4 .
—
T o sh o w the e x te nt of th e flesh y pa r t of th e ab do m ina l m u sc les .
p . x .
, ph oid proc e ss
xi of s te rnu m

3 0
-
, c os ta l arc h ; s traig h t l
m usc e of abdom e n ; t ransv e rse m u sc le ; e x te rnal O b liq ue

m usc le u .
, u m b ilic us inte rnal Ob liq ue m us c le o .
p .
, pub ic b on es .

( T h is is reproduc ed by p ermiss ion f M Ba illi ere, T i nda ll ci Cor )

fi
:

o es srs .
g ure
.
18 D ISSE CTION OF TH E D O G
K idneys
l lJ
.

Urinary organs . re t ers .

Bladder .

D eferent duct and prostate in

male .

( 3) Reproductive organs .

O varies uterine tub e of Fallopius

,

uterus in th e female .

Spleen .

( 4 ) D uctless glands
( A dre nal glands
.

The abdominal aorta and its various

( 5) A rt er i es .

branches .

Th e caudal vena c ava and its tri

b u t arie s The portal vein and its
.

( 6 ) V eins .

tributaries Th e c ommencement of .

the vena az y gos .

Lymph glands and lymphatic vessels including the cisterna chyli

-

and the commenc ement of the thoracic duc t .

( 8 ) The abdominal part of the sympathetic nervous syste m .

( 9 ) The peritoneal lining of the c av it v and investment of the organs

c ontained therein .

It is of the utmost importance to the surgeon that h e should b e familiar

with the positions of the ma in abdominal organs in relation to each other and
to the surface of the body In the acc ompanyin g figures ( figs 3 and
. the .

disposition of the m uscles formin g the wall of the abdomen an d th e position ,

of the underlying visc era are indicated B oth diagrams are divided into
,
.

e q ual squares in order that a ready comparison may b e made .

On fir st O pening the abdomen only a fe w of the contained organs are brought

to view On turning aside the walls of the abdomen indeed little can be
.
, ,

disc overed but a double fat laden membrane the greater om en tu m ( omentum
-

maj us ) composed of four layers of peritoneu m and c ontainin g as will b e

, ,

expla ined later a part of the peritoneal cavity called the o m enta l bursa ( bursa
, ,

omentalis ) O n raising the omentum from the underlying c oils of small

.

intestine its connection with the greater c urvature of the stomach and its ,

c ontinu ity with a peritoneal duplicature passing from the stomach to the
spleen ( ligamentum gastro lien ale ) will be revealed -

, .

Proj ecting from under c over of the c ostal arch t h e sharp ventral border ,

of the liver will be visible This border it will be noticed is deeply cu t by

.
, ,

fissures in a ssociation with one of which the broad end of the gall bladder c an
,
-

generally be seen .

The ventr al ex t remit y of the spleen lies i mme di ately caudal to the li ver
 2 4) D ISSE CT ION OF TH E D O G
I NTESTIN U M C ZE CU M — The c aec u m is a short spiral or bent tube the free
. ,

blind e n d of which p oints towards the pelvis There is c on iderabl e variation .

s

Costa 1 2
I
I
m . Iong z ss z mus dors z I

m il io
.
-
costal i s Diap h raq ma

A orta

m la!
. 3 su nus
cam caudal i s

mm m ter costales
.

q
obli uus
abdo mi n is exte r n us

m . rectus abdom i n i s

Fl o . 5 ,
—T ra ns v e rse se c tion o f th e ab dom e n on a lev el with th e elev e n t h th orac ic v erte b ra.

7 , 8 , 9 , 1 0, 1 1 sev e n th , e ig h th , n in t h te n th , and e le v e n th rib s .

in the length of this part of the intestine and also in its form I t lies to the ,
.

right of the medi an plane in the umbil ical region

C O L ON —T ll e c olon is divided into three parts : ( 1 ) The asc endin g c olon
.

( colon asc endens ) l eaves the c aecu m and runs c ranialwards to the right of the
median plane for a short distance and then turns to the left thus forming the ,
 DISS E CTI ON O F T H E D O G 2!

right c o lic fl e x ure eol i dextra ) ( 2 ) th e sec ond pa rt o f th e c ol on t h e

( fle x u ra ,
,

tra ns vers e co lo n ( c olon t ransversum ) like t h e fi rst is generally very shor t

, It ,
.

c rosses the median plane i mmediately cranial to the roo t of th e mesenter y a nd , ,

arriving on t h e left side of the abdomen c urves i n a c audal di rec tion at the left ,

c olic fl e x ure ( fle x ura c oli sinis t ra ) ( 3 ) t h e des cen din g co lo n ( c ol on dc s c e ndc n s )

Lympho g la ndula
m long iss imus J ars “
.

P a ncrea s

m . iIio -costalis ‘

Ao fl a

trans vers us abdom i n i s

P ancreas

Colon descendens '

I
m {6 61 11 3 ab dom m z s
b uodc n um
.

FIG . 6 .
—T ra ns ve rse sec tion t h r oug h t h e a b do m e n on a le v e l wit h t h e fi rs t lumb ar

v e rte b ra . S ec tions of s m all inte s t ine a re not na m e d .

forms by far the greater part of the whole tube I n order to expose it it is n oc e s .
,

sary to turn th e mass of s mal l intes tine over to the right The descendi ng c olon .

will then be revealed to the left of the medi an plane i n the form of a fairly
s traight tube runni ng towards the pelvis from the left c oli c fl e x ure O n approach .

ing the pel v is a gradual slop e towards the righ t c auses the i ntestine to disappear
,

i nto the pel vic c avi ty ab out the mid dl e line In the female the c olon gains the .

pelvis by passing dorsal to the uterus i n the male dorsal to the urinary bladder ,
.

c 3
O
t
C
[
a

D IS SE CTION OF TH E DO G

It will be observed that the whol e length of the c olon is provided wi th a

sh ort mesentery ( mesocolon ) which is not entirely i ndependent of the mesentery
of the small intes tine The caecum unlike the rest of the large intestine does
.
, ,

not possess a mesentery P eritoneum is reflected from i t onto the termi nal .

part of the il eum to the side of which it is closely applied

,
.

P E R I T O N ZE U M —
The interior of the abdominal wall and th e surface of the
.

abdominal viscera are c overed more or less completely by a serous membrane

m Io ng iss unus dorsi

. a

A orta

V en a ea va ca udal is

m obl iq uus
.

ab domi nis externus

'

m obliq uus
.

ab domi n is i ntern us

m transvers us abdomi m s
‘

Colon des cendem

m . re ct us abdom i n z s

FI G . 7 .
-
T rans v e rse se c t ion of th e abdom en on a lev el with th e fi fth lu m b ar
v e rte b r a . S ec tions of th e s m all in te stine are n ot n am e d.

known as the p erito n eum Like the other serous membr anes of the b ody the .
,

peritoneu m is a c ompletely closed sac i n the male In the female a small .

,

openi ng at the abdominal end of the uterine tube establishes an indi rect:
c ommuni cation between the peritoneal cavity and the exterior A s in the .

case of serous membranes in general the peritoneu m c onsists of a part li ni ng ,

the wall of the cavi ty— the p ar i etal p eriton eum ( p eriton aeum parietale ) and a -

part cover in g the viscera contained Wi thi n the c avity the v isceral p eriton eum ,

( periton aeum viscerale ) ; b ut u nlike other serou s membranes the visceral , ,

peritoneu m and its c onnec tions with the parietal peritoneu m is very c omplicated
because of the number and disposition of the abdominal organs .
 D ISS E C TI ON O F THE DO G 23

It is best t o c o mmen c e the ex a min ati o n o f t h e perit o neum wh ere its

di s position is s im plest This will b e fo und t o b e t h e c a se i n t h e m o re c a ud a l
.

p a rt o f th e abdomen l f t hen t h e arran g ement of t h e peritoneu m be follo we d

.
, ,

in a t ra nsverse dire c tion a sho rt ( lis ta n e e fro m t h e entr a n c e to t h e pelvis i t

will be found t h at t h e ventr al l a t er al and dors al walls of t h e a bdomen a re
, ,

c l o thed by parie tal perit oneu m This is refl ected from the dorsal wall al ong
.

a line a li t t le t o t h e left of t h e medi a n pl a ne in order that t h e des c ending colo n ,

may be encircled The membra nous double layer which c onnects t h e descending
.

c ol on to t h e abdomin al parietes i s n a med t h e desc en ding m eso colo n ( mesocolon

descendens ) a nd is c onti nued as a similar duplicature associated with th e
,

t ransverse c olon t h e tra ns vers e m es o colo n ( mesoc olon transversum ) and beyond
, ,

t his again on t o t h e terminal part of t h e ascending c ol on as the a scen din g

m es o c o lo n ( mesoc olon ascendens ) .

The peritoneu m should now be follo wed i n a transverse direc tion at a level
nearer t h e diaphrag m O pposite let us say the c ommencement of the ascendi ng
, ,

c ol on Begi nni ng on the left side of the abdomen the parietal peritoneu m
.
,

lines t h e l ateral and dorsal walls of the c avi ty as far as the m argin of the kidney ,

where i t is c ontinuou s wi th the base of the desc ending mesocolon Here i t .

i s di verted in a ventral direction in order to enclose the spleen The membrane .

from the base of th e mesoc olon to the S pleen is a part of the greater omentu m .

From the right fac e of the desc endi ng m e s oc olo n a double layer of peritoneu m
extends over to the right side of the abdomen and encloses the various parts
of the duodenu m the pancreas and t h e c ommencement of the ascendi ng
, ,

c olon The j ej unu m and ileu m are suspended fro m the dorsal wall of th e
.

a bdomen by th e m es e nter
y ( mesenteri um ) a double fold of peritoneum f an , ,

shaped i n form .

The peritoneu m should now b e foll owed in a longitudinal dir ec tion beginning
with the very obviou s g r eater o men tum ( omentu m maj us ) O n firs t op ening .

t h e abdomen t h e greater omentu m is revealed c overing the whole of th e

,

i ntestinal m ass and extending from the s to mach and spleen on the one hand
, , ,

t o the pel v ic entranc e on the other A c areful ex amination of the omentu m

.

di scloses the fac t that i t i s formed by two membranes ; or rather by one , ,

membrane folded on itself so that the folded margin l ies in the region of the
,

pelvis and the right side of the abdomen Still closer examination shows that .

there are really four l ayers of peritoneu m i n its c onstitution Two ventral .

l ayers are cl osely appl ied t o each other and two dorsal layers are si milarly ,

i nti mately related Between t h e u ni ted l avers there may be a c onsiderable

.

acc umula t i on of fat .

If the two ventral layers of the omentu m are followed to the stomach they
wil l be found to separate at the greater curvature of thi s organ so as to form
serous c overings for i ts two surfaces A t the lesser c urvature they again .

c o m e together and form a thin membrane the les s er o m entum omentu m min us
( , ) ,

which extends from t h e l esser curvature of th e stomach t o th e margins of the

c 1
24 D ISSE CTION OF TH E D O G

porta O f the liver Here onc e again t h e layers separate this time to form the
.
,

serous i nvestment of the liver The c ontinuation O f the most ventral layer .

O f the lesser omentu m follows the c audal surfac e of t h e liver crosses its ventral ,

border and proceeds to the diaphragmatic surface from which it is reflected ,

onto the diaphragm and thence can b e follo wed along the ventral wall of the
,

a bdomen t o the pelvis The more dorsal O f th e two layers O f the lesser
.

omentum in like manner is c ontinued onto the li ver and from this organ to
, ,

the di aphragm and the dorsal wall of the abdomen .

If the two dorsal layers of the greater omentu m are followed towards the
dorsal wall of the abdomen they wi ll be found to enclose the left li mb of th e
,

pancreas before arrivi ng at the wall itself O n the wall the two l ayers sep arate . .

One becomes confluent with the c ontinuation O f the more dorsal layer of the
lesser omentum The other passes into the transverse mesoc olon ; that is to
.

say it leaves the dorsal abdominal wall surrounds th e transverse c olon and
, ,

agai n returns to the wall of the abdomen Here it is c ontinuous with the root .

o th e m esen tery ( ra di x mesenterii )

f .

Beyond this point the peritoneum proceeds along the abdominal wall i nto
the pelvis and finally bec omes that part Of the membrane already foll owed
along the ventral abdominal wall .

From what has j ust b een said it is clear that a c ompartment O f the peritoneal
,

c avity i s enclosed within the greater o mentum Consequent up on its associa .

tions this is known as the om en tal bursa ( bursa omentalis ) The c ommunicatio n
, .

between the main p eritoneal c avi ty entered when the abdomen was firs t ,

Opene d and the omental bursa is by means O f a c omparatively small o rifi c e

, , ,

the ep iplo ic f ora m en of Win s low ( foramen epipl oicu m To find the
foramen pull the duodenu m over towards the left and look for the caudate
,

process of the l iver which will be readily rec ognised as that p art O f the liver
,

which is i n contact with the right ki dney If now the index finger O f the left .

hand b e passed along the c audate process towards the mid dl e li ne it wil l enter
the epiploic foramen The right hand should be introduced into t h e omental
.

bursa through an Opening in the omentum and the epiploic foramen sought ,

fro m the left side .

The greater part of the omental bursa is c ontained in that part O f the
greater omentu m which c overs the intestine The rest O f it is c ontinued .

dorsal t o the stomach and between this organ and those two dorsal layers of
the omentu m which c ontain the left limb O f the pancreas The boundaries
'
.

O f the bursa are formed a s follows : V en t rally by the ventral layers O f the ,

omentum by the stomach by the lesser omentum and by the omental process
, , ,

of the liver ; dorsall y by the dorsal layers O f the greater omentum and the
,

pancreas ; on the left by the spleen and the gastro lienal ligament ( ligamentu m
,
-

g as tro lie nale ) which c onnects the greater curvature of the stomach and the
-

h ilus of t h e spleen and is directly continuous with the ventral layers O f the
,

greater omentu m .
 DISS E CT ION O F T HE DO G 25

The dis position of t h e pe rit o neu m i n c onne t i o n with t h e live r c anno t b e c

a de q uately studied i t t hi s s t a ge of t h e dissection

f it will be better therefore , ,

t o post pone its examination u n t il t h e liver itsel f can be displayed c om pletely . .

R E C E SSUS DU O D ENO J EJ U N A LIS — If the mass O f s mall i ntestine be turned

-
.

o ver t owards t h e right and a n ex a minatio n be made im mediately caudal and to

t h e left O f t h e root of the mesentery where t h e abru p t c u rve of t h e intestine
.

marks t h e j unction of duodenu m a nd j ej unum t h e O pening of t h e small du odeno

j ej unal recess will be di sclosed T h e depth O f the rec ess varies I t may extend
. .

along the right side O f the ascending part O f the duodenu m t o the second
flexure O f this tube .

A M E S ENTE R I CA C R AN I AL IS —
M

. T ll e c rani al mesenteric artery should be

.

looked for at the root O f the mesentery about the point at which the transverse
c olon crosses the middle line I n exposing it it will b e nec essary t o remove
.
,

a large lymph gland the largest in the body whic h lies at the root O f the
-
, ,

mesentery and is associated with the c om menc ement O f the porta l vein This .

c orresponds to the separate lymph glands O f the stomach liver and spleen -
, , ,

and some mesenteric glands of other animals The c om menc ement of the .

mesenteric artery has a m esenter ic sym path etic ga ng lio n ( ganglion m e se n t e ric u m
craniale ) related to it Nerves from the ganglion form the c ranial m esen teric
.

le x us ( plexus m e sen t er ic us c ranialis ) and acc ompany the branches O f the

p
artery .

The cranial mesenteric artery is a branch of the abdom inal aorta I t soon .

divides into ( 1 ) a main c ontinuation from which a rise the i n testinal a rteries ,

and ( 2 ) th e c ommon trunk of the m iddle co lic r ight co lic and i leo ece co co lic , ,
- -

a rter ies

—
.

AA . I N T E S T I N A LE s . A bou t fifteen intestinal arteries arise at intervals

fro m the main c ontinuation O f the mesenteric artery and run down the mesentery
to the s mall intestine but before reaching the alimentary tube each artery
.

divides and the adj acent branches anastomose Thus a series O f arterial .

arches are produc ed A long the side O f the m esenteric artery O pposite to that
.

fro m which the intestinal arteries arise a small group O f mesenteric lymph ,

glands will be found The first O f the intest inal arteries supplies a c onsiderable
.

amount O f the duodenu m and anastomoses with the duodenal branch of the
pancreatic o duodenal artery ; and the last artery s im ilarlv anastomoses with
-

the iliac branch of the ileo c ace o c olic artery - -

.

A C O L I CA M E D I A —Tll e middle c olic artery leaves the c ommon trunk early

. .

and is the largest branch of th e trunk I t supplies the transverse c olon and .

a c onsiderable stretch O f the descending c olon .

A C O L I CA D E X T R A T ll e right c olic artery a c omparatively small vessel

. .
-

, ,

supplies the ascending c olon .

A ILE O C E C O
.
— T ll e ileo c aec o colic artery divides into three
-
.
- -

branches which supply the ileum c aecum and the c ommencement O f the , ,

asc ending c olon The iliac branch anastomoses with the last intestinal artery
. .
2G D ISSE CTION OF TH E D OG

I t is noteworthy that there is a series O f anastomoses along the c ourse of

th e colon between t h e ileo c aec o colic right colic and middle c olic arteries - -

, , .

A M E SE N FE BI C A CA U DAL IS — Th e caudal mesenteric artery can b e most

.
'

readily found by dissecting between the two layers O f the descending mesoc olon
abou t the level at which the duodenu m crosses the middle line V ery much .

s maller than the cranial mesenteric artery i t leaves the aorta O pposite the ,

fifth or sixth lumbar vertebra From i ts point of origin the artery runs .

towards the pelvis in the attached border O f th e mesoc olon and divides into
t wo branches — left colic and c ran ia l h aemorrh oidal a rteri es .

Colo n transvers um
' t
Colon as cen dens

a . m“
00 dextra I
a. cotton media
a . i leo
-
z eco- coli c a
c
'
ao . i n testinales
a .
pan creat i co
duodenali s

Colo n descendens
“

—n est mum ten ue

I t

D uo de num
I

I nt estin um ce cum
I

I nt esti nu m down
a . col i ca s inistra

F IG . 8 .
—D iag ram Of th e c ran ial m e se nte ri c ar te ry.

A olica sin istra — Th e left c olic artery runs towards the thorax along
. c .

the descending colon This it helps to suppl y and fin ally ends by anastomosing
.
,

with the middle c olic artery .

A h ee morrkoida lis cran ia lis — The c r an ial h aem orrh oidal artery follows the
'

. .

direc tion O f the parent vessel and ends in the pelvis where it supp lies the terminal
part O f the c olon and anastomoses with the middle h aemorrhoidal artery .

GA N G LION M E S E N T E R I C U M CA U DAL E — A S was seen to be the case with .

the cranial mesenteric artery so in association with the root of the caudal ,

vessel of the same name a small sympathetic ganglion is developed From .

this filaments arise which follow the mesenteric artery so forming the ca uda l ,

m es en ter ic plex us ( plexus m esen t eric u s c audalis ) .

28 D ISS E CTION OF TH E D O G

the i nner fibres are circular i n dir ection The c ircular fibres form a somewhat .

t hicker l aver i n the il eu m than in the j ej unum .

D issectio n — Turn to the wall of the thorax an d cl ean up the scalenus

and ventral serratus muscles .

M S CAL ENUS — The scalenus muscle cannot be c ompletely exposed a t

. .

present since its orig in li es in the neck The part whi ch is to be exami ned
now is applied to the chest —
.
,
'

wall dorsal to the transverse mus cle of the ribs .

The s calenus is divi sible into th ree parts the insertions of which are as ,

foll ows ( I) The most dorsal is inserted to the crani al b order of the thir d
and fo urth ribs ( 2 ) The middl e part of the muscle is attached to the fifth
.
,

sixth seventh and eighth ribs ( 3 ) The most ventral part of the muscle
, ,
.

is the shortest and reaches the first rib o nl y It should b e noted that a .

satisfactory di fferentiation of the dorsal and middl e p ortions of the muscle

is frequently impossible .

D issection — Cut across the scalenus muscle on a level wi th the sec ond rib
an d remove the part ins erted into the ribs .

M SE R R A TUS V ENTR ALIS —

. The ventral serratus muscle is extensive and
.

p owerful P art of it is in the neck and cannot b e examined at the present

.

m oment The thoracic portion of the muscle now exposed arises by di gita
.
, ,

tions from th e first seven or eight ribs The las t two or three di gitations .

are related to the origin of the external oblique mus cle of the abdomen .

The c onverging bundl es of fibres are inserted i nto the vertebral border
an d a roughened area on the c ostal surf ace of the scapula .

The nerve supply of th e ventral serratus muscle — the lon g thorac ic n er ve

—
( n t.h or ac al is longus ) is derived from the brachial plexus ( from seve nth and
eighth cervic al nerves ) b ut instead of acc ompanying the res t of the branches
,

of th e plexus the nerve runs along the deep face of the scalenus muscle
,
.

Between the last cervic al and the fi rst thoracic digitations of the serratus
muscle the transverse artery of the neck ( a transversa c olli ) and its c ompani on
, .

vein should b e noted The vessels di sappear under c over of the serratus
. .

D issection — Liberate the ventral serratus muscle from all the ribs excep t
the first and turn i t outwards Then clean up the spaces b etween the
.

ribs as far in a dorsal di rec ti on as the attachment of the dorsal serratus

muscle a level generally marked by the appearance of branches from
,

t h e interc ostal vessels The external ob lique abdomi nal muscle

.

should be detached from the ribs Observe the extent of the external .

intercostal muscles Remove the external muscle from one or two

.

interspaces as far as the attachment of the dorsal serratus muscle in ,

order t o show th e underlyi n internal interc osta l muscles g .

 DISS E CT IO N 0 1“ T H E DO G

MM .
' —
i s rE R c o s rA l E s o n e ac h si de o f t h e c h e s t the re a re twel v e
'

. E X I E R NI
' ‘

. .

ex ternal interc ostal muscles l lac h m us c le pa sses fr o m t h e b o rder of o n e rib

.
‘

t o t h e adj a cent borde r of t h e next wi th fi b res running i n a e a udo ve ntr a l

-

d irection I t wil l be observed that t h e firs t seven muscles t erminate a bo u t

.

t h e level of u nion of the bony and cartilaginou s segments of t h e ribs .

Fre q uen tly t h e eigh t h muscle proceeds far ther and may a lmos t reach the
sternu m The remaining muscles are also c ontinu ed between the r ib c artilages
.
-
,

bu t gener ally there is an i nterruptio n i n their c ontinuity at the e nd o f th e

bony segment of the rib .

I n a dorsal direction the external i ntercostal muscles reach t h e vertebral

c olumn bu t this cannot be determined as yet
,
.

MM I NT
. E R C O ST AL E S INTE R N I — The twel ve i nternal i nterc ostal muscles .

di ff er from the external i nterc ostals i n that their fibres pass i n a ventro cranial -

direction and each mu scle is c ontinued al ong the entire length of an i nter
,

c ostal space I n the neighb ourhood of the sternu m therefore the internal
.
, ,

muscles can be seen before the removal of the external i nterc ostals .

D issectio n — Now carefully remove an internal i nterc ostal muscle i n order

.

to demonstrate the intercostal vessel s and nerve These will b e fou nd .

lying along the c audal border of the rib between the internal interc ostal ,

mu scle and the lini ng membrane of the chest .

AA . INTE R C O ST AL E S — Tll el e
are twelve interc ostal arteries on each side of
.
‘

t h e ch est A t the present stage of di ssection the origin of the arteries c anno t
.
,

be determi ned but will be revealed when t h e wal l of the thorax is exam ined
,

from wi thi n Nor c a n the di vision of each artery i nto a dorsal and ventral
.

branch b e exposed A t the present time i t will be su fficient to note that th e

.

vessel now di splayed is the ventral branch ( ramu s ventralis ) of an interc ostal
artery I t travels down the caudal b order of the rib between the c orrespondi ng
.

vein which is cranial in p osition and the interc ostal nerve

, , .

The arteries of the first seven or eigh t i nterc ostal spaces terminate by
anastom osing with branches from the i nternal mammary artery The res t .

anastomose with the m usc ulo phrenic artery or are c ontinued i nto the wal l -

of the abdomen .

Lateral c utan eo us bran ch es ( rami cu tanei laterales ) of th e intercostal arte ries

bec ome superficial by piercing the overlying muscles abou t the middle of the
l ength of eac h interspace .

V v INTE R C OST AL E S — In t e I C O S tal vei ns accompany the interc ostal arteries

. .
‘

and are to b e sough t b etween the artery and the rib .

NN INTE R C O ST AL E S — Intercostal n erves c ourse along the ab oral b order

. .

of the arteries of th e sam e name Each c onstitu tes th e ventral branch .

( ramus ventralis ) of a thoracic spin al nerve A la tera l c uta neo us branch .

( ramu s c utaneus laterali s ) leaves each nerve at the same po in t as does th e

like named branch of the artery
-
.
30 D ISSE CT ION OF TH E D O G

The first eigh t nerves end a short distance from the sternu m by dividing
into ( 1 ) a ven tral cu ta n eo us bran ch ( ramus c utaneus ventralis ) and ( 2 ) a smaller ,

branch for the transverse thoracic and internal intercostal muscles The .

ventral cutaneous ramus becomes superficial ab out the termination of th e

external intercostal muscle .

The last four intercostal nerves are continued beyond the costal arch into
the wall of the abdomen where they have already been found between th e
,

internal oblique and transverse muscles .

— Remove the interc ostal muscles from all th e interspaces on

D issec tion
both sides of the chest from the sternum to ab ou t th e middle of the length
of the interspace T h e internal interc ostal muscles should b e removed
.

with the greatest care so that the endothoracic fascia between the rib s
,

may be preserved .

In the region of th e sternu m a muscle the transverse thorac ic and an , ,

artery and a vein th e internal th orac ic or mammary are exposed on

, ,

each side .

A A
M MM R
.
A I A INTE R N A — The internal mammary artery is a branch of
.

th e subclavian and pursues an obliqu e c ourse in the me diastin u m to gain th e

,

ventral surface of the transverse thoracic muscle Here the artery runs along .

in the region of the j oints between th e c ostal cartilages and th e sternum until ,

it reaches th e eighth cartilage where it divides into the cranial epigastri c and ,

m usc ulo—
p h ren ic arteri es .

The follow ing are the collateral branches of the artery : ( 1 ) Two i n ter
c os ta l bra n ch es ( rami in terc ostales ) are distributed to the ventral end of
each of the first seven intercostal spaces These anastomose with the ter .

mination of an interc ostal artery ( 2 ) S tern a l and p erf orating bran ch es ( ram i .

sternales e t p erforantes ) supply the transverse thoracic and pectoral muscles .

3 T h m i c a rter i es ( a a thymic ae ) ( 4) A nterior bron ch ial arter ies ( aa bronchiale s

( ) y
. . .

anteriores ) 5 A rior m edias ti n a l a rteri es ( me di ast inales anteri ores

( ). n te aa . .

6 P i —
ca rdi aco ph ren i c a r tery ( a p er ic ar d iac o —
phrenica ) With the exc eption
( ) er . .

of the first two these branches are distributed to struc tures within th e
,

thorax and c onsequently are not accessibl e at present

, , ,
.

A M U S C U LO P HR ENI CA — In order to exam ine the termination of the

.
-
.

internal mammary artery properly it may b e necessary to c u t away a part ,

of the eighth costal cartilage Th e m u s c u lo —phrenic artery runs along the

.

border of the diaphragm and is at first under c over of the eighth c ostal
, , ,

c artilage The artery supplies the diaphragm and anastomoses with some of
. ,

the intercostal arteries

A E P IG A ST R I CA C R ANI AL IS —The cranial epigastric artery has alr eady
.

.
.

been examined as it runs along the deep fac e of the straight muscle of the
a bdomen A c onsiderable branch has also been noted as becoming superficial
.
,

clos e t o the xiphoid process of the sternum There only remains to examin e .
 D ISSE CT I O N O F T HE 31

i ts origin as one of the two te rminal branches of t h e inte rnal m a mm a ry a rtery and ,

t o note th at it g ains the abdomin a l wall by pie rc ing th e e dge of th e diaphragm .

M T R A NS V E R SUS
.
—Th c t ran s verse muscle o f th e th orax a rises . .

from t h e third or fourth to t h e seventh segmen ts of t h e sternu m and from t h e

n inth c ostal cartilage Its insertion is to t h e ri bs and their c a rtilages f rom
.

t h e sec ond or third to the seventh or eighth a n d to the endot h ora c i c f a scia ,

of the intervals between t h e ribs .

CAV U M T 1IO R A C IS —I t is necessary that the dissec tor sh ould have at leas t
.
, ,

s ome general idea of the thoracic cavity and the organs c ontained therein ,

before he proceeds with their examination The th orax is a c avity with a .

bony wall formed by the thoracic vertebr ae the ribs and the sternu m It , , .

res embles a laterally flattened c one with a sloping base b ounded b v th e ,

diaphragm which forms th e thin m usc ular partition between the thorax and
, ,

the abdomen The diaphragm being markedly c onc ave when V iewed from the
.

abdominal sid e i t is important to remember that the cavity of th e thorax is

,

no t so spac ious as an examination of the skeleton would lead one to imagine .

Between th e first pair of ribs i e at the apex of the c one nu merous struc tures
,
. .
,

pass to and fro m the neck The chief organs c ontained within the chest are
.

the heart and the two lungs The heart lies between the lungs and is enclosed
.

in a fi bre serou s sac the p erica rdium The lungs are lateral to the heart and
-

,
.

fill the greater part of the thoracic cavity Except where it is connected with .

th e heart by large blood vessels and wh ere it is j oined to the trachea by th e

-

bronchus each lung lies free in its own side of the thorax A serous membrane
,
.
,

th e pleura c overs each lung and lines th e c orrespondin g part of the thoracic
,

wall . Where the two pleur ae c ome into c ontac t with or approach each other ,

i n or near the median plane they form the m edias tina l s eptum ( sep tum
, ,

mediast inale ) a partition in wh ich all the thorac ic c ontents with the exc ep tion
, ,

of the lungs are c ontained P art of the septu m and some features of the
,
.

pleural c avity must now be displayed That part of the pleura wh ich c overs .

the lungs is known as visc eral : the rest of t h e m embrane is th e parietal pleura .

D issectio n — Carefullyfree the pleura from the ribs fro m the second to
the seventh and di vide these ribs abou t the mi ddl e Cu t th r ough the
,
.

sternu m between the first and sec ond and betwee n the seventh and eighth
c ostal cartil ages Remove the sternu m and p ortions of ribs so isolated
.
.

The detached part of the sternu m and the c ostal cartilages articulating
therewith must b e laid aside for the subsequent examination of the j oints .

The dissection leaves the pleural sac s intac t wi th the c ostal pl eura ( that ,

part of the pleur a orig inally attached to the ribs ) l yi ng loose up on

the lungs The interior of the pleural c avities should now b e exp osed
.

by making an incision through the c ostal pleura on each side close to

the c ut ends of the ribs and a second inc ision at right angles to the first
, .

P L E UR A —The disposition of the pl eura must now b e examined

. . Two
32 D ISSE CTION OF TH E D O G

incisions have j ust been made through that portion of the parietal pleura
which is app lied to the ribs and therefore c alled the costal p leura ( pleura

m . rh omboideus th oracal is
I
m . s errat u s ventral is
I
serratus dorsah s
o

subs cap ulan s n

m .
j .

m long issi mus dam

f
i .

m . sup rasp inal 729 1

48 coll i

p h aq us

T racked

Vn
e a cava. cran tai ls

T ran s v e rse se c t ion o f th e th orax on a lev el with th e th ird th orac ic v e r te b ra .

 D ISSE CT ION O F TH E D O G 33

c os t alis ) If t his b e t r ac ed in a ventr al dire c tion i t “ ill be found to re a ch

.
,

the middl e line o f t h e sternum where i t mee t s its fellow membrane of th e ,

opposit e side From the s ternu m t h e two pleu rae are reflec ted dorsalw a rds
.

m lonmss im us do rs i
'

v,

m . wrru l us do rs a h s

m . il ia -
ous l al is

ca uda l i:
Cos ta 8

m . lat iss i m us do rs t

A orta

m m intercosta
.

n .
p h ren ic us

m . obli uus q
abdo m im s en em as

m . re ct us abdo m i ms

m . trans vers us ( h om ers

m .
p ectoral is prof undus

m p ectoraux s up er/i d
.
e m

Fl o . 10
.
—T ransv e is e sec t io n o f t h e t h ora x on a l l with
eve th e e ig h th t h orac ic v e rte b ra .

4 , 5 , 6, 7 : f o u rt h , fi f t h , s ix t h , a n d se v e n t h ribs.

as the medias ti nal pleura ( pleura medi astinali s ) Close to the sternu m the .

two ple ur ae are intimately associated and a thin double membrane is produced .

Soon however the heart intervenes b etween the two medi ast inal pleur ae
, ,

[ here specifically known as the p ericardiac p leura ( pleura with

D
34 D ISS E CTION OF TH E D O G

the result that an extensive mediastinal space is formed Foll owed over th e .

heart— or more c orrectly the pericardi um —

, A t wi ll be disc overed that th e
pleura is reflected over the root of the lung to the l ung itself ; that is th e ,

parietal pleura here becomes continuous wi th the V isceral or pulm o n ary p leura
( pleura pulmonalis ) . Caudal to the root of the lung the reflection of medi
as tin al pleura does not cease but is c ontinued as far as the di aphragm i n the

form of the p ulm on ary ligam en t ( ligamentu m p ulmonale ) The ligament r u ns .

obliquely from the root of the lung to the dorsal b order of this organ along ,

whi ch it is th en c ontinued to its ter mi nation .

Now trace the c ostal pleura in a dorsal direction O n reaching the vertebral .

c olumn the membrane i s reflected v e n tralwards as the medi astinal sep tum ( medi
as t in al pleura )
,
in which the oesophagus and aorta are c onspic uou s obj ects .

A gain the me di astinal pleura is c ontinued onto the surface of the lung by way
of the root of the lung and the pulmonary ligament .

Now investigate the disp osition of the pleura at the apex of the chest .

Here it will b e found that each sac ends bli ndly in the cup ula p leurce
extendi ng for a short di stance beyond the first rib and supported i n part by , , ,

the o rigin of the sterno thyr oid muscle Finally the c ostal pleur a shoul d b e
-
.

followed to the di aphragm —where it forms the diaphragm atic pleura ( pleura
diap h ragmatica ) — and from this once again to the medi astinal sep tu m .

O n the right side of the thorax the arrangement of the pleur a is c omplicated
by the presence of a fold which leaves the diap hr agm and passes dorsalwards
to sur round the caudal vena cava and the right phreni c nerve .

S E P T UM M E D I A STIN AL E —The medi astinal septum between the two pleur al

.

cavities is formed as has been seen by the apposition of the two pleural mem
, ,

branes at or about the me dian plane The spac e b etween the two membran es
.

is kno wn as the m ediastin um or m ediastin al cavity and is b ounded laterally by ,

the me di astinal pleur ae ventrally by th e sternum and dorsally by the vertebral

, ,

c olumn Sinc e the unpaired more or less medi an struc tures of the chest
.
,

occupy a position therein the greater part of the di ssec tion of the thora x
,

takes place within the medi astinal c avity .

For conveni ence of description the c avity is di vided into t h ree parts : ( 1 )
A precardia l m ediastin um crani al to the hear t ; ( 2 ) a cardial m ediastin um
, ,

containing the heart and other str uc tures occupying the same transvers e zon e
of the chest ; and ( 3) a p ostcardial m ediastin um of triangular outlin e and ,

circu mscribed by the heart the di ap hragm and the vertebral c olumn Th e
, ,
.

re c ar di al and car dial medi astina are medi an b ut the os t c ar dial medi astinum
p p
is pushed over to the left by the accessory lob e of the right lung .

The pre c ardi al me diastinu m c ontains the large blood vessels c onnecting -

the heart with the head neck and thoracic limbs the terminal part of th e
, , ,

thoracic duc t the vagi recurrent p h reni c sympathetic and cardi ac nerves
, , , , , ,

the oesophagus and trachea and the thymus and lymph glands
,
-
.

The cardial mediastinu m c ontains the heart and its enveloping pericardium ,
36 D ISSE CT ION OF TH E D O G

notched dorsally Th e dorsal portion of the marg in c a nnot be satisfac torily

.

exam ined at present The ventral b order however is rea dily exa mined and
.
, , ,

will b e seen to be interrupted by deep incisions which di vide the organ in to lob es .

VE SI CA P E LL E A —A detailed examin ation of the gall bl adder and its

.
-

associated ducts is more easily carried out afte r removal of the liver from the
body bu t at the present time c ertain features should b e observed .

The gall bladder is a pear —

-
shap ed sac lyin g in a deep depression on the
caudal surfac e of the liver and generally in c on t ac t with the pyloric p art of
the stomach The broad fundus of the sac ( f undus vesic ae f e lleae) is close to
.

t ame .! g asm

E xtrem itas dorsal is\

E xtremit as ventralis

F ad es diap h rag matica

l’l’5
c a u da
Ma r g o

FI G . ll .
—O utlin e of th e S plee n .

the costal arch a short di stanc e to the right of the medi an plane and can ,

mostly b e seen as soon as the abdomen is O pened From the narrow dorsal .

en d of the blad der sprin gs a short cystic duct ( du ctus cystic us ) whi ch
c ommuni cates with the comm on bile duct ( ductus choledochus ) The c ommon
-
.

b ile duct should b e traced to th e duoden um In order to reach the intestin e it

-
.

h as to r un between the two peritoneal layers of the lesser omentum where it is ,

closely related to the hepatic artery and the portal vein Of the thr ee strue .

tur es the d uc t is to the right the artery to the left and the ve in interme di ate and
, ,

dorsal to the others The thr ee structures are immediately dorsal to the pylorus
Li me—The spleen is one of the ductless glands of the body
. .

It is a solid .

organ deeply plac ed withi n the left side of the abdomen extending from
, ,

the verte bral region to the c ostal arch Generally its ventral ex tremi ty .
 D ISS E CT ION OF TH E D O G 37

re ac hes somewhat beyond the e dge o f the ribs and is therefore visible as , , ,

soon as t h e abdomen is opened .

The spleen may be described as possessing three su rfaces three borders and , ,

two extremities Th e lateral su rfac e is applied to the abdom inal wall and is
.

c onsequently c onvex in a dorso ventral direc tion Since the dorsal part o f
-
.

this surface fits into the groove formed by the vertebral bodies and t h e ribs ,

the convexity is m os t mark ed i n this region The other t wo surfaces look towards .

(E sop h ag us

P ylorus

D uct us ch oled och us

C o r p u s

v e n t r i c u t t

L c u. Li,
’
Ductus p ancreati cus accessor ius

t
D uoden um
F ro . lZ —O utli ne o f t h e s to m ac h .

the me dian plane and are c oncave Th e more cranial is app lied to the stomach
.

whereas the m ore caudal is in c ontac t with the left kidney and th e in test ines .

Th e cranial and c audal borders bounding th e lateral surfac e are thin , ,

.

Th e medial border i s much less prominent bu t is imp ortant sinc e i t is th e ,

seat of the h ilus of th e s pleen ( hilus lien is ) by wh ich the blood vessels and ,
-

nerves enter th e organ Th is b order moreover has the gastro liena l ligam ent
.
, ,
-

( lig gastro li en ale) attached to it

.
-
.

V E N TR I C U LU s — Th e stomach is a saccular dilation of the alimentary ca n al

.

D 3
38 D ISSE CTION OF TH E D O G

i nterveni ng between the oesophagus on the one hand and the small intes tine
on the other That part of the stomach c onnected with the oesophagus is
.

distinguished as the cardia to the left of which is the rounded f undus When
, .

m oderately distended the stomach is readily di stingu ished as c omposed of two

par ts : a rounded wide body ( corpus ventriculi ) on th e left into which the
, ,

( e sophagus opens and a narrow tubular pyki ric p ortion ( pars pyloric a) com
m un ic ating with the duodenum to the right The position of the pylorus is
.

in di cated on the exterior by a fain t c ircular c onstriction at the j unc tion of the
stomach and duodenum It is in contact with the righ t central lob e of the
.

liver and very generally with the gall bladder also Referred to the surface
, , ,
-
.

of the abdomen the pylorus is immediately to the right of the me di an plane

, ,

between the xiphoid process of the sternu m and the c ostal arch Th e .

pyloric orific e looks towards the vertebral c olumn .

The two surfaces of the stomach are smooth and c onvex and covered by
p eritoneu m The b orders are kno wn as the curvatures Of these the dorsal
. .
,

or lesser curvature ( c urvatura ventric uli m inor ) is concave and from it th e

lesser omentu m passes to the viscera l surfac e of the liver Th e ventral or .

grea ter c urvature ( c urvatura ventriculi maj or ) is convex and connected with
th e greater omentum and gastro li enal ligament -
.

D U O D ENUM — The duodenu m is the most di stinc tive part of the smal l
.

intestin e M ost of the tub e lies on the righ t side of the abdomen in c ontac t
.
,

with the right lateral lob e of the li ver and the abdominal wall and dorsal to ,

the bulk of the small intestine Commencin g at the pylorus the duodenu m
.
,

forms a curve dorsalwards and to the right in contact with the liver From .

this the first fl e x ur e begins the des cending part ( pars descendens ) which passes
, ,

along the right side of the abdomen to the level of the sixth lu mbar vertebra .

Here a sec ond wider cur ve to the left c arries the intestin e across th e middle
,

line Next succeeds the ascending p art ( pars asc endens ) which travelli ng back
.
,

again towards the stomach immedi ately to the left of the me dian plane ends ,

i n contact with the left kidney and close to the root of the mesentery at an abrup t ,

c au do ventral
-
b end the duoden o j ej unal flexure ( fl ex ur a duodeno —
,
-

j ejun alis) .

The position of the duodenum is subj ec t to only slight variation from the fac t
that its ascending part is in timately c onnected with the descendi ng mesocolon
The caudal limb of the pancreas is closely associated with the concave side of
the descending part of the duodenum .

P A N CR E A S — The pancreas of the dog is an elongated lobulated gland

.
,

presenting an appearanc e very simil ar to that of the salivary glands I t .

consists of two li mbs diverging from the region of th e pylorus The left li mb .

( cauda pancreatis ) extends across the ventral aspec t of the vertebral c olum n
i n the dorsal wall of the omental bursa and dorsal to the stomach Its lef t .

extremity is c ommonly in c ontact with the left ki dney The right limb ( caput .

pancreatis ) is c ontained within the mesentery of the duodenum and reaches

from the pylorus al most to the point at which the duodenu m b ends to t h e left .
 D ISS E CTION O F TH E DO G 39

T he panc reas h as two ducts One th e pa n c rea tic duc t of Wirsung ( duc tus
.
,

pancreaticus d rains t h e left limb of t h e gland and o pens i nto the ,

duodenu m i n c ompany with t h e c ommon bile du e t Th e second duc t th e -

.
,

a cc es s or
y duc t o f Santori ni ( duc tus panc reaticu s acc essorius
carries away t h e sec retio n fro m the duodenal or righ t limb and opens indep e n ,

de n t ly into t h e duodenu m a short distance ( 3 0 to 5 0 mm ) c aud a l to the orific e .

’
of Wirsung s duct The two duc ts in t e rc o nn n u n ie ate i n the interior of the gland
.
.

I n order t o expose the ducts of the pancreas and the termination of the
bile duct th e stomach should be pulled over to the left as far as possible a nd
-
,

the duodenu m to the right A dissec tion must the n be carefully c onduc te d
.

between t h e pancreas and duodenu m i n the angle formed by the stom ach ,

R amus aesop h ag e us

gas tro Iiena]is

-

a .
g ast rica s i ni stro

g as tr ica dextra
“

a .

a g astro duo denal tc

-
.

p ancreat iw
duodenalis

a g astro ep iploica den-( f a

-
.

a g astro ep iplo ica s in istra

-
.

FIG . l3 .
—Coeliac ar te ry : s e m i- diag ram m a t ic .

and the adj ac ent part of descending duodenu m Thi s wil l also expose the .

pancreatic o duodenal artery and vein

-
.

I t will b e noticed that the ductus pancreaticu s is generally quite small ,

whereas the duc tus pancreaticu s ac cessoriu s is large Occasiona lly the ductu s .

pancreaticu s opens i nto the duodenu m independently imm edi ately dis tal to ,

the orifi c e of the c ommon bile duct -

.

A C ( E L I ACA — The c oeli ac artery is dorsal to the left li mb of the pancreas

. .
,

and is diffic ul t of di ssec tion from its association wi th the coeli ac gangli a and
plexu s of the sympathetic nervou s system P ossibly the e as iest way to fin d .

the vessel is by foll owing the a lre ady isolated hepatic artery .

The c oeli ac artery is a very short vessel which leaves the aorta between the
two lumbar parts of the diaphragm Its branches are the h epatic lef t gas tric and
.
, ,

splen ic a rteri es ; the two last named generall y arising at the same p o int or
-

even from a short c ommon trunk .

40 D ISSE CTI ON OF TH E D O G

A HE PA TI CA
. .
—The hepatic artery is far from being exclusively devoted
to the supply of the liver Indeed the greater part of the blood whi ch i t
.
,

c arries is destined for the stomach the duodenu m and the pancreas P assing , ,
.

in a crani al and ventral di rection the artery reaches the porta of the liver where
, ,

it furni shes a variable number ( 2— 5 ) of prep er h epatic arteries ( aa hepatic ae .

propri ae ) to the liver S oon after the origin of the last branch to the liver
.
,

i t c ontributes a right gastric a rtery ( a g astripa dextra ) which anastomoses with .

,

the left artery of the same name on the lesser cur vatur e of the stomach A bou t .

the same point th em 1 s c ommonly a pan creatic branch .

The hepatic artery continues from the porta in the lesser omentum and
arrives in the neighbour hood of the pylorus where it ter mi nates as the gastro ,

duodena l artery ( a gastro duodenalis ) whi ch in its t urn ends by dividing

.
-

, , ,

into right g as tro ep ip loic ( a gastro epiploic a dextra ) and pa n cr eatico duodena l
-
.
- -

( a pancreatic o duodenalis ) arteries

.
-
The former suppli es numerous branches .

i n the region of the pylorus and then foll ows the greater cur vature of the
sto mach in the ventral layer of the greater omentum to anastomose with the left ,

gastro epiploic branch of the spleni c artery

-
.

The pancreatico duodenal artery somewhat larger than the g astro epipl oic
-

,
-
,

foll ows the lesser cur vature of th e duodenu m It supplies the duodenu m and .

the adj acent li mb of the pancreas and ends by anastomosing with the first ,

intes tin al artery .

A G A STR I CA SINISTR A —The left gastric artery is mainly c onc erned in the
. .

supply of the left part of the stomach One of its branches follows the l esser .

curvature and anastomoses wi th the right gastric branch of the hepatic artery .

An other branch passes along the oesophagus ( ramus oes oph ag eu s) into the
thorax .

A L IEN ALIS — The splen ic artery runs towards the left dorsal to the pan
. .
,

creas and in the dorsal layer of the greater omentum Its terminal branches
, .

supply the ventral extremity of the spleen and its collateral branches of ,

moment are two in nu mber the gas tro—liena l and the lef t gastro ep ip loic arteries
,
-
.

The former ( a gastro li enalis ) terminates in the dorsal end of the spleen and
.
-

contributes twigs to the stomach The left gastro epiploic artery ( a g astro
.
-
.

epiploica sinistra ) ram ifi es over the greater c urvatur e of the stomach and
fin ally anas tomoses with the right artery of the same name .

The spleni c artery supplies several branches ( rami pancreatici ) to the l eft
l imb of the pancreas
VEN A P OR T A L—Since it drains the intestines stomach spleen and pancreas
.

.
, , ,

the p ortal vei n is a ves sel of great importance Found ventral to and to the .

right of the origin of the coeliac artery the vein is formed by the union of two ,

venous tru nks of considerable size One of these res ults from the j unction .

of the splenic and gastric veins which in the main are satelli tes of the arteries
, , ,

of the same name The other trunk is produc ed by the uni on of the crani al
.

and caudal mesenteric veins also satellites of the homonymo u , s arteries .

 DI SS E JT IO N O F TH E D O G 4]

Thus c onstitu ted t h e port a l vein makes dire c tly for t h e port a of t h e liver
, ,

and has been previously seen i n relation to t h e hepatic artery a nd the bile
duct .Close to t h e porta i t is j oined by t h e g as tro duodenal vein and generally -
,

a lso by a fair sized vessel f rom t h e pancreas

-
.

Within th e liver th e portal vein c omports i tself after the manner of an

ar te ry that is to say i t repeatedly divides and finally ends in c apillary spac es
, ,

or sinusoids between the m ic rosc 0 p ic cells of the l iver

,

D issectio n .Strip the mediastinal pleura fro m th e surfac e of the pericardiu m

-

and expose the phrenic nerves A t the sam e time the fat lying in th e .

p rec ardial mediastinu m should be rem oved in order that the entire length ,

g aslr v gastro duodenal ts

-
0 .
.

o.
pa ncreatico duo de nal is-

v gastro ep iploica
-
.

dextra

v. mesent er ica cranial ts

v. mesenteri ca ca udal i s

v . Iienal is

in mstra
’

gastra ep tp lo ica s z

FIG . l4 .
—P ortn l v e in : s e m i- diag ra m m a t ic .

of the phrenic nerves may be demonstrated If the subj ec t be a young .

o n e the thymus should be found in this p osition

, Other struc tures to b e .

sought are the pe ric ardiac o—

phrenic thymic and mediastinal branches of , ,

the inte rnal mammary artery .

A . AR I A
MAM M INT E R N A — Tll e greater part of the internal mammary artery
.

h as a lready been examin ed Its origin the first par t of its c ourse and some
.
, ,

of i ts earlier branches remain for c onsideration The internal mammary is a .

branch of the subclavian artery and arises at the first rib From this poin t .

i t runs obliquely in a c audal and ventral direc tion in the pre c ardial medi as t inum ,

and thus reaches th e sternu m where its relationship to the tra n s verse thorac ic
,

muscle begin s Th e c ollate ral branches now to be di ssec ted are as follows
.

( l ) The p erica rdiaco ph ren ic artery ( a p eric ardiac o phr eni ca ) i s often very
-
.
-
42 D ISSE CTION OF TH E D O G

small I t follows the phr enic nerve as far as the pericardium ( 2 ) Branches
. .

to the thymus ( aa thymic ae ) are naturally most easily demonstrated in

.

the young ( 3 ) Several small arteries are distributed in the p rec ardi al
.

mediastinu m ( aa mediast inales anteriores )

V M AMM AR I A INTE R N A —
. .

. The internal mammary ve in is a satell ite of the

.

artery of the same name and receives tributaries equ ivalent to the branches
of the artery The mode of t erm in atiqn of the vein is subj ect to som e variation
. .

I t may open into the innominate vein of its own side or into the cranial vena ,

cava .

A p a : p ul mo n is

FIG . l5 .
—L ate ral surf ac e of th e rig h t lung .

T H Y M US —Ii the animal be more than two or three years old ther e is
.
,

little chanc e of seeing more than the merest trac e of the thymus When .

present and of good size the organ is a greyish lobulated body lying in the
,

p r ec ar di al mediastinu m and flattened laterally

,
in conformity with the plac e

of its location A t its maximu m de velopment the thymus extends a little

.

beyond th e first rib on the one hand and overlaps the heart slightly on th e ,

other .

P u LM O N E s —Each lung is a soft sp ongy organ occupyin g a c onsiderabl e

.
,

part of one side of the thoracic c avity and as has been seen in intimate ass o , ,

e lation with the pleura of that side With the exc eption of attachments by .

its root ( radix pulmonis ) and the pulmonary ligament each lung lies free Th e ,
.

l ungs of the dog are frequently of a g reyis h c olour due to pigmentation .

44 D ISSE CTION OF TH E D O G

to th e wall of the chest the surface follo ws the c urve of th e rib s and is therefore
, , ,

c onvex dorso ventrally Wh en the lungs have been satisfactorily harden ed

-
.

by preservative before the chest is O pened the surfac e is generally marked ,

b y grooves which in dicate the position of the ribs .

Th e m edial or m ediastinal s urface ( facies mediast inalis ) is of much smaller

ex tent o wing to th e fac t that the diaphr agm encroaches more upon th e th orax
medially than laterally Th e presenc e of th e heart produces a deep depression
.

on this face Immedi ately dorsal to th e depression for the heart is the h ilus
.

A p ex p ul moni s
’

FI G . 17 .
—L ate ral s urf ac e of th e le ft lung .

o — that is the poin t of attachment of the root Cr ani al to th e car diac

p ulm nis , .

depression each lung if well hardened sho ws a cur ved groove for the in ternal
, , ,

mammary arte ry Though these are th e general feat ures of the medi astinal
.

surfac e there are certain p o ints of dissimi larity in the fi ve lungs In addi tion
, .

to the cardi ac depression the left lung p ossesses a deep g roove dorsal to the
, ,

hilus and the pulmonary ligament in which lies the aorta The rest of the ,
.

surface is flattened .

The mediast inal surfac e of the righ t lung has an extensive cardiac depression ,

i n the formation of wh ich the intermedi ate lobe plays a part Runn ing from .

the neighbourhood of the lung apex is a broad groove for the cranial vena cava ;
and dorsal to the hil us there is a deep slightly c ur ved chann el c onnected with ,

the groove for the vena cava The second of these g roov es is produced.

by the vena azygos Caudal to the lung root and partly formed by th e
.
 D ISS E CT ION OF T HE D O G 45

in te rmediate lobe there is a bro ad g roove for the ( e sophagu s The intermediate
, .

lobe its elf forms a prom inen t pointed proj ec tion on t h e su rfac e S ometimes
, .

the cardiac depression is c rossed by a na rrow shallo w groove c aused by t h e ,

right phrenic nerve .

The do rsa l or obtus e border ( m arg e obtusus ) of t h e lung is adapted to the

channel formed by the ribs and t h e vertebr ae and c onsequ ently is thi n at the ,

apex bu t bec omes thick and rounded towards the base of the organ
, .

The r e nlral or « r ule bo rder ( m arg e acutus ) is much shorter and thin

I
wt u 3
F ad es diaph rag mat ica Ma , a a c

FIG . 18 .
—M die a l s urfa c e of t h e le ft l u ng . a, G roo
b, g roo v e for phre ni c
ve for aorta ;
n erv e c , de press ion f or h e art , . I B
ronc hia ram i f or a ic a and c ardi ac
p l ob es ; 2, l l
l l l
b ronc h ia ram us f or di aph rag m at ic ob e ; 3 , p u m onary ar te ry ; 4 , p ulm onary v e in of
ll
a pic a ob e l l
5 , pulm onary v ein o f c ard iac ob e 6 , pu m onary v e in of di aphr ag m at ic ob e l .

thr oughout It occupies the narrow sp ac e ( s i nus c osto medi astina lis ) b etween
.
-

the ribs and the m edi as t inal septum and is notched for the acco mmodation of ,

the heart ( inc is ura c ardi ac a ) The cardi ac notch is much deep er in th e right
.

l ung than i t is in the left ; consequently more of the heart is unc overed by
lung on the right side of the chest than on the left .

The ap ex ( apex p ulm onis ) of the l ung is free blunt and laterally flatten ed , ,
.

Th e bas e ( bas is p ul moni s ) b ei ng appli ed to the di ap h ragm possesses a c onc ave

, ,

sur fac e ( fac ies di aphragmatica ) whi ch slop es i n a caudal and lateral dir ec tion .
46 D ISSE CTION OF TH E D O G

Except medi all y the b order circu mscribing the base is sharp and fits into t h e
,

narrow space between the di aphragm and the ribs ( sinus p h renic o c ostalis ) -
.

It will b e notic ed that the two lungs di ffer in two conspicuous resp ects .

1
( ) The incisura car di aca is deeper i n the right l ung because the more b ulky
part of the heart the base incli nes towards the right side of the b ody
, , .

( 2 ) Th e right lung is the larger and p ossesses an extra ( intermediate ) lob e .

E so
ph ag us A orla

Wen“ ca! caudal !

rag m a bi c u s

FIG . 19 .
—
Di aphr ag m ati c surfac e of t h e lu ng s .

D issec tion— The c onstituents of the root of the lung should now be isolated
.
.

In removing the pleura and the fatty connective tissue great care should ,

b e exercised not to inj ure the pul monary plexus of nerves which is
crani al to the root The plexus is more accessible on the left side th e
.
,

vena cava interfering with its di ssection on the right The various .

structures should b e foll owed into the interior of the lung i n order that ,

their manner of branchi ng may be observed .

RAD I X P u LM O N I s —The root of each lung c ontains the foll o wing s truc tures
.

( )
1 S everal pulmonary veins c onveying blood from the lung to the heart .

Al though it is di ffi cul t to indi cate the relative p osition of the root c onstituents
precisely without maki ng the account of undue length it may b e said that , ,
 DIS S E CT ION O F T H E D O G 47

speaking generally t h e pul monary vein s a re mos t ventr al ( 2 ) P uh n o na rv

,
.
.

a rtery disti nguished f ro m the veins by t h e g reater thic kness o f its wall and ,

by a somewhat more dorsal position ( 3 ) Bron c hus a l arge a ir tu be produced .

,
-

by the divisio n of the t rachea The bronchus occ upies t h e dors a l par t o f
.

t h e l ung root ( 4 ) Bronchial vessels of small size

.
( 5 ) Nerves i n the form o f .

t h e pul monary plexus which is produc ed b v th e in t e re o m m u n ic a t ing branches

,

f rom the vagus and sympathetic nerves and is c onnected with the c ardiac ,

plexus ( 6 ) Lymphatic vessels

. .

Eac h root has c ertain struc tures closely rel a ted to it The vena a zygos .

c urves rou nd the root of the right lung ; and the aorta is similarly disposed
on the left side Both roots are crossed by the vagus nerve and t h e p hrenic
.

nerve though not i n c ontac t with is ventral to the root Both ro ots moreover
, .
, ,

have a pulmonary ligament continued towards the diaphra m g .

N P HR ENI CU S —Tll e origin of the phrenic nerve by three roots fro m t h e

. .

fifth sixt h and seve nth cervic al nerves has already b een noted B ot h ri g ht
, ,
.

and left nerves enter the thorax ventral to a subclavian artery and p ass
through the prec ardial mediastinum They then cross the pericardium ventral .

to the roots of the lungs The left nerve c ontinues through the post c ardial
.
-

medi asti nu m to the diaphragm but the right nerve c ourses along the lateral
,

aspec t of the c audal vena cava and is therefore not c ontained withi n the medi
as t in al septum b ut in the special fold of pleura provided for the c aval vein
,
.

There is a further di ff erenc e in the relations of the two nerves The lef t .

crosses the c ommenc ement of the aortic arch and the p ulmonary artery th e ,

peric ardi u m interveni ng whereas the right lies along the lateral face of the
crani al vena cava
P E R I CAR D I U M —
.

I he peric ardi u m is a fi bre serous sac somewhat loosely

.
' ‘
-

envelop ing the heart I t is c onical in form with the base of the c one looking
.

tow ards the vertebr ae and the entranc e to the chest The ap ex poi nts towar ds .

the sternu m and the diap hr agm Between the pericardiu m and the sternu m .

there is n o attachment ; bu t the apex of the sac is connected with the fleshy
part of th e di ap hr agm by a strong flattened ligament The outer face of the ,
.

pericardium is c overed by pleura ( pleura p eric ardiac a) and as has j ust b een , ,

noticed is crossed by the p h re n ic nerves

,
.

The out er l ayer of the p ericardiu m is c omposed of fibrous tissue and is

-
,

continued as tubular i nvest ments onto the large vessel s associated with the
, ,

b as e of the heart .

D issectio n — M ake a crucial incision through the p ericardi um and examine

.

its interior .

Within the fibrou s pericardi u m is a serous membrane di sposed after the

customary ma n ner o f its ki nd : that i s t o say the p arietal part of the ,

membrane l ines the fibro us peric ar diu m and is reflected along the great ,

vessels onto the heart itself as the visceral p ortion or ep icardi um I t will b e
'

.
4S D ISSE CTI ON OF TH E D O G

observed that the aorta and p ulmonary artery are enclosed wi thin a common
tubular sheath of the serous p ericardiu m D orsal to these vessels is a passage .
,

the tra ns verse s in us of th e p ericardium ( sinus transversus pericardii ) .

The serous membrane endows the fibrous pericardi u m and the s urfac e
of the heart with a smooth glisteni ng appearanc e and like all other serous , ,

membranes is always moist ,

.

VEN A CAVA C R A NI ALI S — T ll e crani al vena c ava is a large vessel formed

.
,

on about the level of the middl e of the first sternal segment by the u nion of ,

the right and left innominate veins Each innominate vein ( v a nonym a ) . .

in its turn results from the j unction of the j ugular and subclavian vein s of its
own side A s c ollateral tributaries each innominate vein has the internal
.
,

mam m ary vei n and a c ommon trunk formed b v the vertebral and c osto — c ervical
veins flowing into it An y of these however may j oin the vena cava i tsel f
.
, , .

The crani al vena c ava lies in the pr ec ardial mediastinu m ventral to t h e

trachea and pierces the p ericardi um to the right of the aortic arch The
, .

vein terminates by opening into the right atrium of the heart .

D uring the process of cleani ng the vena cava several m ediastinal lymp h ,

glan ds ( ly mph e glandul ae me di astinales ) will b e revealed Some of these are

-
.

ventral to the vein others are between the vein and the trachea .

VEN A A Z Y GO S — The azygos vein b eg ins i n the abdomen and drains a con
.

sider a b le prop ortion of the w all of the chest A t the present moment only .

its ter minal part c an b e examined The vein j oins the crani al vena c ava j ust .

as this is entering the heart or it may open into the right atriu m itself , .

VEN A CAVA C aU DA LI s The c audal vena c ava begi n s on a level wi th the last
.
-

lumbar vertebra and enters the thorax by the foramen ven ae c av es of t h e

,

diaphragm The thoracic part of the vein which is all that should b e examined
.
,

now lies in a notch i n the interm ediate lobe of the right lung enclosed i n a fold
, ,

of pleura The vein passes through the pericardium and opens into th e right
.

atrium of the heart .

The right phrenic nerve as has already b een said lies lateral and ventral , ,

to the vei n .

D issec tio n order to give more room for the dissec tion of the heart
.
-
In ,

etc .
,
the lungs may now be removed .

Co s—The heart i s a hollo w muscular organ i n the form of an irregular

c one placed so obli quely in th e chest that its base ( basis cordis ) looks slightly
towards the vertebral c ol umn b ut mainly towards the entranc e to the thorax ,
.

The blunt ap ex ( apex c ordis ) on the other hand is directed mainly towards , ,

the diaphr agm bu t also to wards the ventral aspec t of the body and slightly
,

towards the left .

The heart of the dog is fl attened i n an oblique dorso ventral directio n so -

,

that i t presents c onvex sterno c ostal and di aphr agmatic surfaces and t hi ck -

right and left b orders .

 D IS S E C I l O N O F DO G
' '

THE 49

T he exteri o r o f t h e he a rt is divided i nt o a re as c o rre s ponding t o t h e four

c avitie s i n t h e i nterior Forming t h e base a re the two a tri a se para ted from
.
.
,

t h e much la rger vent ricles by the c o ro na ry s ulc u s ( sulcu s c oronarius ) whic h is ,

c ontinuous round the whole heart except where interru pted by the pu lm o n a r v
a rtery. Owing to t h e presenc e of fat and blood vessels t h e dept h of the -
,

s ulc us c annot be properly estimated in t h e u ndi ssected heart .

Externally t h e distinc t ion betwee n the righ t and left atria is very im

a . subcla via 3 m i sl ra

l’ena ca va cra n ml i c

l
’

e na zyg
a os

a . braciaio -
cep h al ica .
o

f
a.
p ul mo na l i s

A ur im la dcr l ra
tr ,
p ulm o nal es

Luj a m enl um a rterio sum

S ulc u s corone r m c
-

S ul cus Iong il udinah s ,

a [ ap z ci s] cordis
A p ex cord is

FIG . 20 —
. O utline of t h e h e art as see n from t h e le ft .

perfectly marked exc ept on the left side Caudally there is only a faint li ne
. .

o f demarcation between the two chambers in the form o f a shallow

g roov e
between the pulmonary veins and the c audal vena c ava Consequently the .

c ommon atrial mass is c resc entic in form the horns of the crescent being ,

two free proj ec tions the auric ulce cordis separated from each other b v the
, ,

pul monary artery and the aorta .

The ventric ular part of the heart is responsible for the conical shap e of the
organ as a whole Its base is co n n ected with the atria while its apex
.
,

forms the apex of the ent ire organ Th e c ommon mass of the two ventricles .

presents two surfac es and two borders The sterno costal face ( facies ste rno .
-

E
50 D ISSE CTION OF TH E DOG

costali s ) is convex and is crossed obliquely by a furrow the ventra l ,

long itudinal s ulc us ( sulcus longitud inalis ventralis ) which c ommences at the ,

root of the pulmonary artery and extends as far as the right border The .

diaphragmatic surface ( facies diaphragmatica ) di ff ers in being not so convex

V
ena cava cra n ial is
vr na G zyg os x
a . subcl ar ia s inistra

A orta a . brach ia
-
cep h al i ca

Aur ic ul a dextra
a p ulmon al z s

Vn
e a ca va caudal i s \

A p ex co rd i s

FIG . 2l .
—O utli ne of th e h eart a s s e en from t h e ri
ght .

a nd of much smaller extent It is traversed by a dorsal longitudin al sulcus

.

( sulcus longitudi nalis dorsalis ) which begin s at the coronary sulcus opposite
,

the term inal part of th e caudal vena c ava and ends by j oining the ventral ,

longitudi nal sulcus at the right border of the heart Th e two grooves indicate .

the p osition of the septum between the two ventricles .

The borders of the heart di ff er considerably The right is the longer th e .

,
 52 D ISSE CTION OF TH E D O G

a promin ent semilunar cres t the c rista ter min a lis which correspon ds i n
, , ,

position to a shallow and sometimes very imperfectly defined groove the ,

s ulcus term ina lis on the exterior of the atrium

,
.

The openings by wh ich blood enters the atrium are as follows : ( 1 ) The
o pen ing of the caudal vena cava ; ( 2 ) the O pening of the cranial vena c ava
( 3 ) the op ening of the coronary sinus ( 4 ) the foramina of th e small veins of th e
heart ( foramina venaru m minimarum
The caval openings occupy the caudal and cranial ends of the atriu m .

Between them is a semilunar ridge proj ecting from the wall of the c a v ity and ,

known as the i n terven ous tuberc le of Lower ( tuberculu m intervenosum

Th e coronary sinus Opens immedi ately ventral to the caudal caval open ing ,

and between this and the orific e which leads from the atri um into the right
ventricle A variable fold of endocardiu m and subendocardial tissue the
. .

va lve o th e vena ca va ( valvula ven ae cav ae exists between the mouth

f
“

of the coronary sinus and the caval openin g The foramina of the small cardiac
.

vein s are scattered over the wall of the atrium .

The blood passes from the atrium into the right ventricle by a large rounde d ,

or ifice which occupies the whole of the floor of the main p art of the atriu m
,
.

The septu m between the right and left atria ( septu m atrioru m ) is not
equally thick throughout Th e thinnest part is at the bottom of a poorly
.

defined depression the f ossa ova lis which marks the position of an embryonic
, ,

c onnection between the two cavities .

D issection —The right ventricle must now b e opened M ake an incision .

thr ough th e wall of the ventricle parallel to and a sh ort dis tance from th e
, ,

c oronary sulcus Care must be taken not to insert the knife too deeply
.
,

or the tricuspid valve may be inj ured The incision should be carried
.

well towards the c ommenc ement of the pulmonary artery A second .

in cision must beg in where the first finished i e near the pulmonary ,
. .

artery and should be carried parallel to and a short distance from the
, , ,

longitudinal sulcus as far as the right border of the heart .

D E X TE R — The cavity of the right ventricle has a triangu lar

V E N T R I C U LU S .

outline The base of the triangle is formed by the right b order of th e heart
.
,

and its apex by that part of the ventricle which is known as the con us a rterios us
from its c onical shape and from its c ommunication with the pulmonary artery .

The cavity of the ventricle does not reach the apex of the heart but stops ,

short on a level with the point at which the longitudinal sulcus of the exterior
crosses the right border .

It will b e n oticed that the septum between the two ventricles ( septum
ventriculorum ) is c onvex towards the right thus causing the cavity of the right
,

ventricle to present a crescentic outline were a transverse section to be made .

The whole of the interior of the wall of the ventricle is ir regular o wing to
the presence of fleshy ridges ( trabec ul ae car ne ae) of variable size and form .
 DISS EC TI ON O F T H E D O G 53

These a re le as t well marked in th e c onu s a rteri o sus Some of t h e trabecul ae .

are ridges s imply o thers a re i n t h e form of cords a tta c hed at thei r t wo ends
whereas three o r more proj ec tions are of c onsiderable size and a re attached
t o the wall of t h e cavity by o ne extremity only These conical mu scul a r .
,

processes are kno wn as the m us c uli pa p ill ares and h ave fi lamentous ten dino u s ,

co rds ( e h o rda t o ndi ne ac ) attached to their apices O ne o r more slender and

e
.
,

of ten branched muscular c ords p ass across the c avity of the ventricl e fro m
,

t h e septu m to the ou ter wall .

T h e opening ( ostiu m v enosu m ) fro m the atriu m i nto the ventri c le is gu a rded
by the tr ic us p id va lve ( valvula tricusp idalis ) c omposed of three triangular , ,

membranous cu sps The bases of the c usps are attached to th e margin of the
.

atrio ventricular orific e and each cusp has c h o rdee tendin ece affixed to i ts
-
,

margins and ventricular surface M ost u sually smaller cu sps of similar form.
, .

intervene between the three maj or c usps .

Th e exit from the ventricle i e the O pening ( ostiu m arteriosum ) into the
, . .

pul monary artery is provided with t h ree pocket shaped semilunar valves so
,
-

arranged as to prevent the backward flow of blood fro m the artery i nto the
ventricle bu t o ff eri ng no obstacl e to the passage of blood fro m the ventricl e
,

into the arter y O f the three valves one is crani al one is to the right and on e
.
, , ,

i s to the left By slitting open a p art of the pul monary artery the character
.

of the valves may be more easil y observed Each segment has an attached .

c onvex b order and a c oncave free margin looki ng towards the pu lmonary
artery Behi nd each valve there is a slight b ulging of the wal l of the arter y
.
,

whi ch i s here thi nner than in other parts of the vessel .

D issection — Now proceed to exami ne the left side of the heart c ommencing ,

with the left atriu m T o O pen this chamber i t is o n ly necessary to

.

make one incision beginning far back and c utting forwards to the
,

extremity of the auricular appendage The i ncision should be made at .

no great di stanc e from the c oronary sulcus i n order to avoid inj ury to the ,

terminations of the pulmonary veins .

A T R I U M SINIST R U M —In its ou tward charac ters the left atriu m di ff ers
.

somewhat from the c orrespondi ng chamber on the right side of the heart .

The auricle is more ventral in position bl un ter at its tip and more or less , ,

dentated al ong i ts b order In the interior of the c avi ty the wall is smooth
.
,

excep t in the auricle in which part al one are there musculi p e c tinat i T h e
,
.

number of openi ngs from the pulmonary veins i nto the atriu m i s variable ( three
to five ) . The atrio ventric ular orifice ( ostiu m venosum ) is oval i n outli ne and
-

s omewhat smaller than the c orrespondi ng openi ng i n the right chamber .

D iss ec tio n — In order to O pen the left ventricle an incision should c om

menc e near the c oronary sul cus and b e c arried parallel to on e
longitu di nal sulcus round the apex and up the other side parall el to
,

t h e other l ongitudi nal sulcu s .

1
“
D ISSE CTION OF THE DO G

V E N TR I C U LU S SINISTE R —The left ventricle diff ers from the right in its
.

general shape It is c onical i n c onformity with the general form of th e

.

ventricular part of the heart and its apex is continued to the apex of the ,

heart as a whole Owing to the thickness of its wall c oupled with the fact that
.
,

the inter ventricular sep tum is c oncave towards the left a transverse section
-
,

of the left ventricle would present an oval or rounded outline .

Generally the trabecul ae carne ae are less c onspicuous than in the right
ventricle and the papillary muscles are larger and only two in nu mber .

The atrio ventricu lar openi ng ( ostiu m venosu m ) is provided with a valv e
-

of two cusps ( valvula bicuspidalis ) each being larger and stronger than th e ,

segments of the tricuspid valve A s on the right side there are generally .
,

s maller cu sps interveni ng between the maj or segments .

The exit from the ventricle is by way of the aortic openi ng ( ostium arteri
osum ) around which are arranged three semilunar valves similar to those
,

guardi ng the entranc e to the pulmonary vein but stronger i n structure ,

.

The thr ee semilunar segments are arranged so that one is caudal one to the ,

right and one to the left

The aort a —the main artery of the body as a whole— le aves the
.
,

AO R T A — .

l eft ventricle The first part of the vessel forms an arch whi ch may b e di vided
‘

.
,

for descriptive purposes into ( 1 ) the ascendi ng aorta and ( 2 ) the aortic arch
, ,

proper The ascendi ng portion is short and runs in a crani o dorsal di rection
.
-

and towards the left ( to th e middl e line ) From it aris e the two c oronary .

arteries for the supply of the substance of the heart .

Th e aortic arch has its c onvexity looking dor so cranial and towards the -

left From the convex side of the arch Spring two vessels the brachio c ep halic
.
,
-

and lef t s ubc lavian arteries The c oncave side of the arch is closely rel ated .

to the pulmonary artery with which it is c onnected by a fibrous c ord t h e , ,

ligam en tu m arteri os um representing an embryonic c ommu nication bet ween

,

the two vessels .

D orsally the aortic arch is related to the trachea and oesophagus The .

left vagus car di ac and recurrent nerves cross the ventral surface of the arch
, ,

near its termination .

D is s ection —The vessels leaving the aortic arch should be followed t o

.

the entrance to the chest This is facilitated by c utting thr ough th e .

cartilages of the first pair of ribs j ust where they j oin the b ony segment
of the rib The first segment of the sternum with the c artilages attached
.
, ,

m ay now b e turned over towards the h ead The cranial vena cava .

should also be c ut across In cleaning the arteries great c are m ust b e .

taken to preserve intact the numerous nerves —some of them small

which are related t o the vessels .

A B R AC HIO C E P H AL I CA
.
— The brachio cephalic artery is the larger of the
-
.
-

t wo vessels arising from the a ortic arch and is the first to take origin therefrom ,
.
 D ISSE CTI ON O F TH E DO G 35
‘

It leaves th e a rc h
bout t h e middle l ine and p asses t o wa rds t h e thorac i c inlet
a

im m e dia te lv ventral t o t h e t ra c hea Th e b rachio cephalic artery gives origin .

-

t o the lef t co m m o n ca rotid a rtery a nd shortly afterwards terminates by dividing

,

i nto the r ight s ubcla via n and r ig ht c o mmo n ca ro tid arteries

A c an on s C O M M UNIS S i N rs r nA —
.

. T li e left c ommon carotid artery begins .

ventral t o the t rachea and t ravels t o th e thorac ic inl et by running obliquely

across the ventral fac e of the oesophagus .

A S U B C LAV I A D E X T R A —T h c right subclavian artery curves late ral wards

.
'

t o the cranial b order of th e first r ib V entral to it are the right innominate .

vei n the righ t phrenic and vagus and sympathetic nerves The righ t re
.
,
.

c urrent nerve ( a branch of the vagus ) b ends round the caudal border o f th e
artery The branches of t h e right subclavian artery are ( l ) Vertebra l a rtery
.

( 2 ) caste c ervica l tr un k ( 3 ) i nter na l m amm ary artery ( 4 ) om o cervical tru n k

- -

( 5 ) ax illa ry a rtery .

A CA R OTIS C O M M UNIS D E X T R A — Tll e right c ommon c arotid artery passes

. .

t o t h e thoracic i nlet by crossing the ventral surface of the trachea with a slight
degree of obliqu ity .

A S U B CLAVI A SINISTR A
. T ll e left subclavian artery leaves the aortic arch
.
-

s ome little distance to the left of the p oint of origin of the brachio c ephalic -

a rtery and at a more dorsal level

,
I t gains the thoracic inl et by running along
.

a groove formed by the oesophagus and the longus c olli mu scle The left .

phrenic and vagus nerves lie ventral to the artery Its branches are the same .

as those of the righ t subclavian artery .

A V E R TEB R ALI S — The verte bral artery is of large size and on the righ t
. .
,

side crosses the lateral surface of the trachea to di sappear between the scalenus
and longus c oll i muscles and so reach the foramen in the trans verse proc ess
,

of the sixth c ervical vertebra Its subsequent c ourse through the foramina
.

of the rest of the c ervical vertebr ae will be exposed at a late r stage i n the
dissec tion The left vertebral artery crosses the oesophagus i nstead of the
.

trachea .

T R U N CU S C osT o C E R V I CAL IS —The costo —-

c ervical trunk is a l arge branch
.
~

of the subclavian artery running towards the vertebral c olumn within the
first rib Its branches are three i n number namely the deep c ervical s uprem e
.
, , ,

i nterc os tal and trans vers e c erv ica l arteries

,
.

A C E R V I CAL IS P R OF U N DA — P art of the c ourse of the deep cervical artery

. .

h as been noted in c onnection with the serratus ventralis muscle There only .

remains to observe its orig in and the initial part of its c ourse round the border
of th e fir st rib dorsal to the attach ment of the sc alenus muscle .

A INTE R C OST AL IS S UPR E M A —

. T ll e supreme in terc ostal and transverse
.

c ervical arteries generally leave the c osto c ervical trunk as a short common -

vessel The supreme intercostal runs along under the ne cks of th e sec ond and
.

third ribs and contributes the sec ond third and possibly also the fourth
, , ,

interc ostal arteries .

56 D ISSE CTION OF TH E D O G

A TR AN S V ER S A C O LLI — The transverse c ervical artery pierces the vertebral

. .

extremity of the firs t intercostal space .

T R UN CU S O M O C E R VI CAL IS — The om o cervical trunk arisin g from th e

-
.
-

subclavian within the first rib at onc e leaves the thorax and has been followed
,

in the triangular space at the root of the neck where it di vides into ascending ,

c ervi ca l and tra nsverse sca p u la r arteries .

A M A MM AR I A IN TE R N A —The internal mam mary artery leaves the sub

. .

c lav ian at the same level as the omo c ervical trunk b ut from the opp osite -

side of th e artery The whole of its c ourse has now been exposed
. .

D iss ec tion — In order to examine the cardi ac and pulmonary nerve —

plexuses
in their entir ety the arc h sh ould b e cut at its two ends
,
Then if .
,

the ligamentum arteriosum b e also c ut the aortic arch can b e tur ned ,

forward thus exposing the trachea oesophagus and left recur rent nerve
, , , .

P L E XU S CAR D I ACU S E T a x us PUL M ON ALIS These two plexuses are .

-

intimately c onn ected with one another They are formed by in t erc om m un i .

catin g branches from the sympathetic ( gangli on th orac ale primum ) the vagus , ,

and the recurr ent nerves Mor e or less in dependent branches ( rami bronc hi ales )
'

leave the vagus about the level of the tracheal b ifurcation and pass into the
hil us of the lung as c onstituents of its root Nerves from the car di ac plexus .

pierce the pericardium in th e neighb our hood of the p ulmonary artery and
the aorta .

D iss ectio n — Remove the h eart from the thorax Th e vena azygos and the .

caudal vena cava will b e the only vessels requir ing di vi sio n The aortic .

valves should b e dis played by sli ttin g open th e commencement of th e

aorta In doin g so the cu t should b e made between two cusps so as to
.

avoid undue inj ury .

V AL VUL E S E M IL UN AR ES — Th e . aorti c sem i lunar va lv es ( valvul ae sem ilunares

aort ae) are c onstructed on the same principle as those at the entranc e to th e
pulmonary artery bu t ow ing to the cir cumstanc e that they have to withstand
, ,

a greater pressure of blood they are stronger The valve segments are th ree
,
.

in number— right left and caudal— and are pocket shaped or semi lunar wi th the
, ,
-

mouth of the pocket directed towards the aorta A s inu s occurs b ehind each .

segment as is the case in th e pulmonary artery and in two of the s inuses the ,

openin gs into the coronary arteries will be seen ab ou t on a level with the free
edge of the valve segments Th e left c oronary artery leaves the left sinus and
.
,

the right coronary artery leaves the right sin us .

A b out the mi ddle of the free edge of each segment a small fibrous nodule
can be demonstrated The valve c onsis ts of a double layer of endocardi um
.

with interp osed fibrous tissue This tissue however is not uniformly dis .
, ,

tributed A fir m c ord lies in the free edge of each c usp and fibrous s trands
.

are nu merous throughout the valve .

 D ISS E C TION O F T HE ! O H 57

Th e segments of the p ulmo na ry s em il una r va lve s ( valvul ae semilunares

a pulmon alis ) are right le f t and c rani al i n p osition They a re the sam e in
.
, ,
.

general character as t hose of t h e aortic val ve but are sometimes destitu te of ,

fibrous nodules in their free edge Th e sinuses behind them p resent no ori fi ces .

lea ding into a rte ries .

S TR U C T U R E o r T H E WALL O F T H E n a t i ve — By f a r t h e greater part of the

th ickness o f th e wall of the heart is c omposed of musc ular tissue constitu ting
the m yoca rdi um : much m ore abundant in th e ventricles than i n the atria .

On c areful dissec tion it i s possible to show that the muscular fibres are disp osed
in indefinite layers and ru n c ircularly and obliquely in di rection
,
.

A t the j unction of the ventricles and the atria are two fibrous rings ,

su rro unding the atrio ventricular or ifices and a ff ording attachment to t h e

-
,

bicuspid and tricuspid valves Smaller rin gs of fibrous tissue surround the
.

pulmonary and aortic orifices and give attachment to the valves of these ,

open ings .

Covering the heart externally is the visceral portion of t h e serous p eri

c ardiu m the ep ica rdi um between which and the myocardiu m is a greater or
, ,

less amoun t of fat partic ularly ob vious in the grooves

, .

Th e interior of the heart is li ned by a smooth shi ning membrane th e , ,

endo ca rdiu m c ontinuous with the lin ing of the blood vessels
,
-
.

AR R A N G E M ENT O F T HE CAR D I AC O R IFI C ES — If the atria b e remo ved the .

relationship of the openin gs into and ou t of th e ventricles will b e evident .

M ost cranial and towards the left is th e pulmonary O pening Imm edi ately .

caudal to thi s and slightly to its righ t is th e orific e leadi ng into the aorta Th e .

right and left atrio ventricular open ings are not on the sam e trans verse level
-

the left opening being th e more caudal .

D iss ectio n — Carefully clean the trachea the bronchi the oesophagus and
.
, , ,

th e vagus nerves In do ing so bronch ial lymph glan ds ( lym ph o

.
-

glandul ae bronchiales ) will b e observed in the neighbourhood of the

termination of the trachea m ore especially between the diverging bronchi
,
.

T R AC HE A E T B R ON C HI — The trachea or tube by whi ch a ir passes to and

.

fr om the l ungs begins in the neck p asses through the thoracic inlet and ,

termin ates in the t wo bronchi imme di ately dorsal to the commencement of the
aorta The thorac ic portion of the trachea is not exactly in the middle l ine
.

excep t at its term ination The presenc e of the oesophagus c auses it to incline
.

t o the right .

The main ventral relations of the trachea i n the chest are the two innomi nate
ve ins the cranial vena c ava the right subclavian artery the right and left c om
, , ,

mon c arotid arteri es the brachio cephalic artery and the aortic arch Along -
,
.

t h e left ventral b order run s the left recurrent nerve To the left the .

trach ea is related to the oesophagus and to the right to th e right phreni c and ,

vagus n erves D orsally i t i s in c ontac t with the longus c olli muscle exc ept clos e
.
,
58 D ISSE CTION OF TH E D O G

to its bifurcation where the oesophagus inclining towards the right

, , ,

intervenes .

Of the bronchi the right is the larger and is in c ontac t with the vena
,

az y gos ; the left bronchus is crossed dorsally by the oesophagus .

N v as e s — The right and left vagus nerves descend the neck in intimate
.

association with the right and left sympathetic nerve c ords and enter the ,

thorax between the in nominate vein and subclavian artery of their own side .

The cl ose relationship of the vagus and sympathetic nerves ceases wit h i n the
first rib or th e first interc ostal space .
.

T racked

Bronckus s inister B ronch us dexter

Lobus ap t cah s

Lobus cardia cus

obus ap ical is

Lobus diap h rag matic us

Lot us cardi ac us

bus d iap h rag mat i cus

Lob us i nter medl us

F IG . 22 .
—
D 1 aorra m of t h e b ran c h e s of t h e b r onc h i, indic ating t o wh ic h lo be s of the
lung s t h ey are dist rib ute d
.

In the prec ardi al and cardi al me di astina the two vagus nerves have diff erent
relations The right nerve is at first lateral to the trachea It then passes
.
.

within the vena azygos and across the dorsal aspect of the root of the right
lung and thus reaches the oesophagu s The left nerve arrives at the oesophagus
,

by crossing the lateral face of the aorta obliquely and the dorsal aspect of the
root of the left lung .

On the gullet each vagus nerve divides into a dorsal and a ven tral bra nch .

( ramus dorsalis e t ramus ventralis ) The ventral branches of the right and .

left nerves unite j ust beyond the base of the heart and form the ven tral ces Oph a ,

g eal trun k ( truncus oesoph ag e us ventralis ) The dorsal branches similarly j oin .

t o form the dorsal oesOpli ag ea l trun k ( truncus oesoph ag eus dorsalis ) but do not ,

do so until they arrive close to the di aphragm The two oesophageal nerve .

tru nks leave the thorax by acc ompanying the oesophagus through the diaphragm .
60 D ISSE CTION OF TH E D O G

D orsa lly in c ontac t for the greater p art of its course wi th the bodies of the
thorac ic vertebr ae the aorta is ventrally in successive relatio n to the root of the
,

left l ung the pericardi um and finally the di aphragm

, , .

y .
iug ulan s extern a
S i n istra
r . s ubcl avi a st ms tra.

-
Tru n cus j ug ular i s

v . anonyma

— 1) ucl us th orac cc us

A orta

a zyg os

FIG 2 3
. .
—
Di g a ram of t h e th orac ic duc t .
 DISSE CTIO N O F TH E DO G

The branc hes o f t h a t part o f t h e a o r t a n o w u nder c onsi der a ti o n a re as

.

foll o ws : ( 1 ) Nine o r te n i nterc os ta l a rter ies a rising f ro m its do rs al as pe c t ;

2 w or hree mall b o c hia l a r ter ies ari s in g eithe r f rom t h e a orta i tsel f or
( ) t o t s r n .

from t h e fi rs t interc ost a l a rtery a nd s up plying t h e br o nchi al lym ph glan ds ,

-

and the ( e s o ph ag us ; ( 3 ) two or three sm all ( e s o phagea l a rt ri e s leavin g t h e e

ventral as pec t of the vessel .

D U C T U S T ll O R A C IC U i — By me a ns of t h e t horacic duc t th e lymph from the

' ‘

whole b o dv wi t h the exception of that fro m t h e right side of t h e th o rax t h e

, ,

Tr unc us a sep hag c u s dorsal i s

l
l
( Esop h ag us n. ap lanch m cus m a) o r
l
A ort a
n . sp lanch m c us

ig u s cl t r u nca s sy m at h im s
p
Ga ng l io n th ora cal e
i
pr i m um

Ventr icut t

ce r vical e ca u
date
Gang l io n
n .
p h rem c us

Tr uncus oesop h ag eus

Fl o . 24 .
—D 1a
g ram of pa rt of th e s
y m path e t ic ne rv ous sys te m .

right thoracic limb an d the right side of the head and neck gains the venous
, ,

system Th e th oracic duc t begins in th e abdomen between th e lumbar

.

parts of the diaphragm as a di lation known as the c isterna c hyli It enters the
,
.

thorax on the right side of the aorta between thi s vessel and the vena azygos , .

V ariabl e as is its thoracic c ourse it may be said generally that i ncli nin g ,

slightly towards the left the duc t passes for some distanc e thr ough the chest
,

dorsal to the (E S O ph ag us Af terwards it crosses the oesophagus on the left and

.
,

finally Opens into the left innomi nate vein .

The duc t i s nearly always double for a greate r or shorter part of its c our se ,

fr equent interc ommunic ati ons existing between the two vessels .

P AR S T HO R A C A LI S S Y S T E M ZE S Y M P A T HTCL — A large elongated gangli on , ,

the first thorac ic g ang lio n ( ganglion t h orac ale primum ) lies between the longu s ,
,
62 D ISSE CTION OF TH E D O G

colli muscle on th e one hand and the fir st interc ostal muscle and the second
,

rib on the other Communicating branches c onnec t i t with the last two
.

cervical and the fir st three or fou r thoracic spinal nerves A filament passing .

between the seventh cervical nerv e and the ganglion arises in c ommon with
the nerve which supplies the thoracic part of the long us colli muscle By .

means of the ansa subclavia [ Vi euss en ii ] a c onnection is established between

the first thoracic and the caudal cervical ganglia One or two cardiac ram i .

( accelerator to the heart ) leave the ganglion .

A nerve c ord leaves the first thoracic ganglion and can be followed along
the dorsal wall of the chest into the abdomen A t first the c ord oc cupies a .

deep groove to the side of the longus c olli muscle but later it runs across the ,

heads of the ribs and the intercostal vessels .

Ganglia on the cord at fir st small bu t afterwards larger begin at the fourth

, ,

intercostal space and continue on e at each intercostal sp ace throughou t

, , ,

the rest of the thorax Each ganglion is connected with the ventral primary
.

branch of the corresponding Spinal nerve by means of a c ommunicating branch ,

the ram us comm un ican s .

Dissection — The wall of the thorax should now b e examined from within .

Strip the pleura and follow the interc ostal vessels The arrangement of .

the intercostal muscles may be aga in examin ed .

AA INTE R C OST AL E S — The interc ostal arteries ar e twelve in nu mber on

. .
~

each side of the body Of these the fi rst three or four arise from the supreme
.
,

intercostal artery : the rest are branches of the thoracic aorta Each inter .

costal artery di vides in to a dorsal and a ventral branch Th e ram us dorsalis .

is di stributed to the m uscles and skin of the back and to the spinal c ord The .

r a m us v en tra lis runs along the caudal b order of a rib ( in the sulcus c ostalis
.
) ,

at first between the two in tercostal muscles and then b etween the internal ,

intercostal muscle and the pleura in association with th e c orresponding vein

and nerve and ends by anastomosin g with the in terc ostal or muscul e phrenic
,
-

branches of the internal mammary artery In its c ourse along an interspace .

,

several small branches leave the interc ostal artery and cross the inner surface
of the rib
Vv INTE R C O ST AL E S —
.

. The intercostal veins are disposed after the manner

.

of the arteries bu t all except the first two or three terminate in th e vena
,

azygos .

V A Z Y G OS — The vena azygos beg ins in the abdomen by the union of the
. .

first or first and second lu mbar veins Entering th e thorax to the right of
, .

the aorta it passes along the vertebral bodie s to the right of the median plane
,

as far as the fifth or sixth thoracic vertebra Finally cur ving t owards the .
,

heart the vein opens into the cranial vena cava or possibly into the right
, ,

atriu m i tself The vena azygos dr ains much the greater part of the wall of
.

the thorax .
 DI S S E C TI O N O F TH E DO “ ( 53

NN . I NTE R C O ST A L ES —Running along

interc o stal spaces c aud a l to
. th e
t h e vessels the intercostal nerves are d erived from the ventr a l prim a ry
,

d ivisions of t h e thorac ic S pinal nerves Each nerve supplies a latera l cu taneou s .

branch which was enc ountered abou t midway between the vertebral c olu m n
,

and t h e s ternum when t h e thorac ic wall was examined from the ou ts ide .

The te rmin ation of eac h nerve as a ventral c u taneous ramus has als o bee n
di s pla y ed .

'
Vesz a: f eara

FI G . 25 .
—O utlin e of t h e di aph rag m a t ic surf ac e o f th e li v er
.

D issw ion .
—The liver may now
removed bu t before doing this i ts . be ,

lobes and the arrangement of the perito neu m i n as sociation with i t

sh ould be examined In removing the liver preserve the vena cava as
.

far as p ossible .

LOBI HE PA TI S .
—
T WO deep fissures divide the substanc e of the liver into
t h ree m ain lobes a central and two lateral The centra l lobe readily dis
'

: .
,

t ing u i h eds by its position and the presence of the gall bladder in associa tion -
64 D ISSE CT ION OF THE DO G

with it is subdivided into right and left parts by a fissure of considerable

,

depth kno wn as the u m bilica l fissure from the c ircumstance that the u mbilical
vein lies in it during embryonic li fe The right part of the central lobe carries
.

the gall bladder lodged in a deep depression the f ossa ves icce f elleoe
-
,
.

The two lateral lobes are unequal in size the lef t lat eral lo be bein g generally ,

the larger In addition it is distinguished by being the simpler for to the

. ,

D a ri us cysti cus

r em po rtoe

ca va ca udal is

FIG . Q6 .
—O ut li ne of th e v is c e ra l surf ac e of l
t h e i ve r
.

r ig h t lateral lo be
are appended two processes caudate and papillary or omental .

The ca uda te pr ocess is the larger and assists the right lateral lobe in form ing
,

a fossa for the reception of the right ki dney In the dorso medi al part of the .
-

process is a d eep g roove or canal in which the vena cava lies ; and in the
ventro medi al border of the process is a notch for the portal vein The omental
-
.

proces s lies to the left of the caudate process and is in intimate relation to ,

the lesser omentu m hence its name

, .

V E S I C A P E LL E A E T C — A more c omplete vie w of the gall bladder and its

‘
,
.
-

associated ducts m av now be obtained .

 D ISS ECTION U lf T HE D O “
‘
( 35

Leaving t h e n a rrow n e c k o f t h e g all blad de r ( c ollu m vesi c a fe llc a ) is tlu

- : ~

c s tic duc t ( ductus c y s ticu s ) to whi c h are j o ined h e pa tic d uc ts ( duc tu s hepati c i )
y ,

from t h e c entr al and left later a l lobes Th e resul t o f this union is t h e .

r o duction o f t h e c o m m o n b ile ( tac t ( du c tus c hol e do c hus ) wh ic h

-
opens int o
p
the duodenum M o stly the hepatic duc t f rom the right late ral lob e j oins th e
. .
,

c o m mon bile duc t independently

-

l rra ng e m e nt of th e p er ito n eu m i n c onnec t ion with th e liver —

.

.
~
Like other .

abdominal organs th e liver is c overed by v isceral peritoneum which gives

, ,

its surface a smooth shining appearance The visceral peritoneu m becomes

,
.

c o ntinuous with the parietal peritoneu m of the diaphragm by reflec tion al ong
the vena cava wh ich lies in a deep ,

groove ( fossa ven ae c av ee ) on the dia

p h rag m at ic surfac e of the liver Lateral .

to t h e vena c ava on each side is a double m [ 1m m 0 0

d n e !
fold of peri toneu m c onnecting th e righ t L b l lu o as a t era
“m m !
and left lateral lobes to the diaphragm
— the r igh t and lef t tr iang ular ligam ents —Du t a rm c us a l
L b t l o us cen ra z s

and c onnec ted W i th the r i ght l i gamen t L w t n o s cen ro s

is an off shoot binding the caudate

proc ess to t h e right kidney .

On the visceral surfac e of the liver V f tt es z ca e ea

is a transverse depression the p orta ,

h epatié fl O ll l th e nl arg in s O f Which the FI G 2 7 — D i g m f th g ll b l dd

' ‘

, d it
. . a ra o e a - a er a n s

peritoneu m is reflec ted o n t o t e lesser a h i t d du t T h n m f th l b

ss oc a e f th c s e es e o es o
o . a e

l a n lud d n d t nd t th d
i ver re i
g c e I or er o i ica e e rai na e
c urvature of th e stomach i n the form a a f h h p ti du t re o e ac e a c c ,

of a thin membrane the les ser o m entum ,

.

P O R T A H E PA TIS —The porta of the liver is in the deepest part of a depression

.

c irc umscribed by the central lobe and the c audate and omental processes and is ,

the place of entrance of the portal vein and the hepatic artery and for ex it ,

of the hepatic ducts and lymphatic vessels .

D iss ectio n —Follow th e oesophageal nerve trunks through the diaphragm

.

into the abdomen The ventral nerve will b e found to termin ate over the
.

stomach especially in th e region of the lesser curvature and the cardia

,

whereas the dorsal nerve will lead to the c oeliac plexus and ganglia .

T R U N CU S ( E S O P HA GE U S V ENTR ALIS —The formation of the ventral oes o.

ph ag e al tru nk has been seen to resul t from the uni on of the ventral branches
of the t wk ag us nerves Foll o wing the oesophagus into the abdomen the
.
,

nerve di vides into many small branches which form a plexu s c hi efly disposed
over the cranial surfac e and c ar dia of the stomach The larger filaments of .

F
66 D ISSE CTI ON OF TH E D O G

the plexus follo w the lesser curvature of the stomach almost as far as the
pylorus S ome hepatic fil aments reach the liver
. .

T R UN C US ( E S O P HA GE U S p os s u m — The fusion of the dorsal branches of

the vagus nerves has been seen to produce the dorsal oesophageal nerve trunk .

Like the ventral trunk this enters the abdomen and forms a plexus
,
The .

fine filaments of the pl exus lie mainl y along the lesser curvature and caudal
surface of the stomach and many of them are connected with the c oeliac plexus .

The t wo great plexuses formed by the oesophageal tru nk s are c onnec ted
wi th each other in the region of the cardia of the stomach .

GA N GLI A C CELI A C A —The c oeli ac ganglia right and left are placed ventra l
.
, ,

to the aorta between the origins of the c oeliac and cranial mesenteric arteries
,
.

The right ganglion is the larger Radi ating frOm the gangli a are anastomosing
.

fil aments c onstituting the c oeliac p lex us ( plexus coeliacus ) with whi ch gastric ,

hepatic and splenic plexuses are assoc iated

,
.

GA N GL ION M E S E N T E R I C U M —A gangli on of fair size c onnected by fil aments

.
,

with the much larger c oeliac gangli on should b e found about the root of the
,

crani al mesenteric artery Numerous filaments from the mesenteric ganglion

.

follow the branches of the artery and form the m es en teric p lex us ( plexus
m esen t eric u s) .

Connected with b oth the coeli ac and mesenteric gangli a is another small
ganglion or p ossibly more than one related to the a drenal gland
, , .

D iss ectio n — Remove the stomach and duodenu m from the abdomen and
exami ne their structure and the interior of their c avi ties In the fir st .

plac e they should b e moderately di stended with water .

S TR U C T UR E OF T HE STO M AC H — Like the other parts of the ali mentary

.

tr ac t wit hi n the abdomen the wall of the stomach is c omposed of fo ur layers

,

( 1 ) A n external serous tu ni c derived from the p eritoneu m ; ( 2 ) a muscular

tunic ( 3 ) sub mucous tissue ; and ( 4) a mucous membrane .

The serous c overing is c omplete except along thos e narrow areas foll owing
the c urvatures by which vessels and nerves gain access to or egress from the
wall of the organ The muscular tissue is di sposed in three strata When
. .

the serous membrane has been removed l ongitudi nal fibres most numerous , ,

along the c urvatures are exposed Over the surfac e of the right half of
,
.

the sac the fibres are oblique rather th an longitudi nal .

The superficial fibres should now b e carefull y removed and a stratum of

circular fibres displayed The c ircular stratu m is more or less complete over
.

the whole stomach bu t near the pylorus it is thicker than it is towards the
,

right . A t the pylorus a double sphi ncter is produced by a marked t hi cke ni ng

of the circular fibres The two sphinc ters are separated on each side by a
.

t h in area in the middl e of whi ch is a large vein procee di ng from the underlyi ng
68 D ISS E CTI ON OF T HE D O G

uteri ) From the fundus S pring the two corn ua in the form of two slightly
.
,

c urved di verging tubes whi ch reach almost to the ki dneys

,
.

Suspendi ng the uterus are two broad duplicatures O f peritoneum — the

broad ligam ents ( ligamentu m latum uteri ) —re fl ec t e d from the sublumbar
region onto the dorsal borders O f the c ornua and the lateral borders O f the
b ody The broad ligaments are divergent and b ound a peritoneal c avity the
.
,

r ecto uter in e ex cavation ( excavatio recto uterina [ Cavu m i n whi ch

- -

the terminal part of the c olon is lodged The ligaments continued .

,

beyond the extremities of the uterine c ornua are associated with the uterine ,

tubes and the ovaries The terms m esom etrium m esosalp inx and m es ovarium
.
, ,

ar e applied to the parts of the ligament c onnected wi th the uterus tube and , ,

ovary respectively The lateral surfac e of each broad ligament bears a sec ondary
.

peritoneal dupli cature in the free edge of which is a feeble fibrous c ord
, ,

traceable into the ing uinal canal and known as the roun d ligam en t of th e uteru s
,

( ligamentu m teres uteri ) If the round ligament b e followed down the canal
. .

it will be found to end in the region of the vulva by blendi ng wi th the skin .

OVAR IUM — Seeing that this organ is c ompletely enclosed within the ovarian
.

bursa ( b ursa ovarii ) the examination of the ovary necessitates a c ertain amount
,

of di ssec tion The mesovarium appears to c ontinue the mesometrium to

.

the end O f the ki dney If the medial and ventral part of the membrane is
.

exami ned a narrow and short sli t li ke Openi ng leading into the ovarian bursa
,
-

, ,

will b e fo und Bounding the O pening there are two folds the medi al O f
.
,

whi ch i s trac eable to the kidn ey The lateral fold is attached to the c onvex.

border of the ki dn ey and the last rib .

The ovarian bursa sho ul d b e Opened up and the ovary exposed Eac h .

ovary is a flattened oval b ody placed on a level with the thir d or fourth lumbar
, ,

vertebra O wing to the di ff erence in the level of the two kidneys the left
.
,

ovary is O ften close to the kidney of its own side b ut a spac e nearly always ,

intervenes between the right ovary and the c orrespon di ng ki dney Connec ting .

the ovary to the end of the uterine cornu is a ligamentous band the prop er ,

ligam en t of th e ovary ( li gamentum ovarii proprium ) .

T UB A U TE R IN A — The u terine or Fallopian tube is nearly straight Its

.
.

wide ovarian end is fu nnel shaped ( infundi bulum tub ae uterin ae) and Opens
-

into the peritoneal cavity by the ostium abdomina le tubae The margin O f the .

abdominal ostium is frin ged by irregular processes the fimbri az tubaa Th e , .

narrow uterine extremity penetrate s the wall at the end of the c ornu of the
uterus and c ommunicates with the uterine c a v ity by th e ostium u terin um
tubes .

The exam ination O f the interior of the uterus had better be postponed until
the interior of the vagina can be exposed .

If the subj ect is a male the ,

di stribution of the c onstituents of the sp ermatic
 D I S S E CTI O N OF T H E D O G ( if )

c o rd at the abdominal ring of the inguinal canal should now b e noted Th e .

d uctus deferens enclosed i n a fold O f peritoneu m at once turns into the pelvis
, ,
.

The internal S permatic vessels proceed towards th e vertebral c olu mn and

th e median plane with in a peritoneal fold whic h c an be followed to the kidney .

R EN ES —T l1 0 kidneys are placed against the dorsal wall o f the abdomen

.

and are embedded in loose areolar tissue generally containing a c onsiderable

q uantity of fat In clear .

ing away the fat c are ,

“w “ “ WM
M uf
f ! !
m us t be taken not to a . "

destroy the u reter and A o rt a

the adrenal gland .

Rm l t ( a er

Each kidney is bean R m i i t s n s er

shaped and presents two

s urfac es two borders and
, ,

two extremities Th e .

dorsal surfac e is flattened l v . r e na z s

and applied to the sub '

t t - re er
lu mbar muscles whereas
the ventral surfac e is
m arkedly c onvex and V m i _ . cs i ca u r ar a

c overed by p eritoneum .

t ile the lateral border

is c onvex the medi al
,

border is straighter and D t d f m uc us c a

l
notched by the h i us in ,
w i mp ll d t u d f nt u a uc s e ere !

association with which P t “

ro sta e

are the renal vessels and

the ureter The e x trem i
.

ties are rounded .

Th e two kidneys di ffer

in position and relations .

In regard to position the ,

right organ is more cranial

than the left This m ay .
FIG 2 8 —D i g am f t h u i y g n f t h m al . . a r O e r n ar or a s o e e.

b e in dicated by say ing

that the cranial end of the left ki dney is on a level wi th the hilus of the right
organ The ventral surfac e O f the right kidney is in contact with the liver
.
,

the pancreas and the c aecu m ; while th e c orrespondin g surfac e O f the left
,

kidn ey is related to the desc ending c olon The dorsal surfac e of b ot h organs .
-

is applied to the lumbar part of the diap h ragm and the psoas muscles The .

adr enal gland the ureter and the renal vessels are related to the medial border
, ,

of both kidneys The right ki dney is within a short distance O f the vena cava ;
.

and the left O f the aorta Somet imes the right organ tou ches the vena cava
,
. .

r 3
70 D ISSE CTION OF TH E D O G

Th e duodenum runs along the lateral border of the right kidney and the ,

spleen c omes into c ontact with part of the c orrespon di ng border of the left
organ Cranially the right kidn ey fits into a deep fossa formed by the right
.

lateral lobe and the caudate process of the liver the left kidney is embraced
by the dorsal end O f the spleen .

In the male the caudal end of each kidney is related to the small intes
tin e In the female this end is c onnected with th e ovary by means O i the
.

mesovarium .

H I LU S R EN ALIS — The hilus of the kidney a ff ords a means O f entrance and

.

exit for the various blood— vessels nerves and lymphatics and the ureter Of
, , ,
.

the three main struc tures connec ted therewith the renal artery is th e most ,

dorsal the renal vein the most ventral and the ureter between th e two The
, ,
.

lymphatics and nerves are mainly dorsal to the vein .

I NTE R IO R O F T H E KI D NE Y — The sur face of the kidney is covered by a strong

.

fibrous c apsule which c an b e readily stripped O ff except where it is continuous

,

with the sheaths of the several structures entering the organ at the h il us .

A section of the organ should be made by entering the knife at the lateral
borde rand carr yin g it to the hilus When this has been done the two portions
.
,

of kidney substance cortex and m edulla are revealed Th e cortical substanc e

, , .

presents a granular appearance whereas the medullary substance is striated .

In the boundary zone bet ween the two the cut ends of n umerous large vessels
,

will be noted .

The in nermost part of th e medullary substance is paler in c olour than the rest
and forms a curved ridge running longitudinally to the long axis of the kidney
and proj ecting into a c avity known as the p elvis ( pel v is renalis ) The cavi ty O f .

the pelvis is elongated in conformity with the general form of the ki dney itself ,

and has a crescentic outline each horn of the crescent b eing abruptly recurved
to produc e a term ina l recess ( recessus terminalis ) In the c oncavity Of the .

crescent is a funnel —shaped portion O f the pelvis leadin g into the ureter .

UR ETE R — I m mediately u pon its exi t from the hilus of the kidney the
.
.
,

ureter curves towards the pelvis and runs along th e psoas muscles under the .

peritoneum Cr ossing the ductus deferens in the male close to the pelvic inlet
.
,

or piercing the broad ligament of th e uterus in the female the ureter ends b y ,

obliqu ely pierc ing the wall O f the neck of the bladder .

GLA N D U LJ—E S U P R AR E N A LE s The adrenal or suprarenal glands are two

.
-

irregularly triangular O bj ects found in the neighbourhood O f the hilus O f the

kidney The ventral surface of each is crossed by a deep groove in which
.

the ph re n ic o abdo m inal vein is l odged

-

On section the organs reveal a.

,

pale cortical substance and a darker more vascular and somewhat softer
, , , ,

medullary substance .

D issection —With great c are remove the fat which lies dorsal to the kidn eys
and ab out the aorta as it p asses through th e diaphragm .
The greater
 D IS S E J lfl O N O l HE D UO
' ‘ "
i
71

a nd les s er spl a nchnic nerves a re to be s ough t ben ding round th e dors a l .

b o rder o f t h e di a ph ragm between this a n d t h e pso a s min o r muscl e

,
.

N S I LA N C HN IC U S N \J O R — l he greate r s plan c hnic n e rve a rises from t h e

' ‘
‘
. . .

twelfth thor ac ic sympathetic ganglion ent ers t h e abdomen bet ween t h e ,

lu mbar part of the diaph ragm and t h e psoas m ino r mus c le and j o ins a s m a ll ,

g anglion d o rsal to the coeliac ganglion .

N S P LA N C IIN IC U S M I N O R — The lesser splanchnic nerve m ay be double or

.
‘

even treble I t leaves t h e last thoracic and fi rs t lu mbar ganglia a nd en ds in a

.
,

plexus about the adrenal gland .

D I AP H R A G M A The diaphragm forms a dome shaped m uscular and

.
-

, ,

tendinou s partition b et ween the c avities of the thorax and abdomen V iewed .

from the abdominal side i t is c onc ave in all directions and a little m ore s o on
, ,

the righ t than on the left The p artition as a whol e has a m arked slop e
.
, ,

i n a ventral and cranial direction .

The diaphragm is described as c onsisting O f a tendinous centre arou nd

which are grouped lumbar c ostal and sternal musc ular portions
, , .

C entr u m tendin eum —The tendinous c entre of the diaphragm of the dog
.

is relatively small in extent and ventral i n position In ou tline i t is some .

what h eart shaped with the base dorsal and h as a c urved c ontinuation from
-

each side of the base running in a dorsal direc tion towards a tendinous area
separating the lumbar and c ostal muscular parts O f the diaphragm .

P a rs l um ba lis — The lumbar part of th e diaphragm c onsists o f muscul ar

.

fibres arisin g from two tendons The right tendon the thicker and .
,

stronger i s attached to the bo di es of the third and fourth lumbar vertebr ae

,
.

The thinner l eft tendon generally arises fro m the body O f the third lu mbar
vertebra only though i t may have attachment to the fourth vertebra also .

Each tendon di vides i nto a me di al and a lateral portion The medi a ] divisions .

of the two tendons unite ventral to the aorta and thus form an arch over ,

which this vessel passes The two lateral divisions — sl enderer than the medial
.

— are att ached to the transverse processes of th e fir st lu mbar vertebra In .

this way three tendi nou s arches are produced and from them righ t and ,

left muscu lar fibres sprin g These when followed into the main part of th e
.
,

diaphr agm are found to decu ssate b oth dorsal and ventral to the O pening by
,

which t h e oesophagu s gains the abdomen .

P ars costa lis — The c ostal par t of th e di aphragm arises from the ribs from
.
,

the eighth to the thir teenth close to the point of uni on of their b ony and
,

c artil aginou s segments It is therefore evident that the di aphragm i s not

.
, ,

attac hed to the c ostal margin itself bu t slightly wi thin i t ,

.

P ars ster nalis — The sternal origi n of the di aphragm i s from the x iphoid
.

process and the adj acent part of the sternu m .

Op en ing s in th e diap lz rag m —There are numerou s openings i n the diaphragm

.
,

bu t m ost of them are of small size and of l ittle importance Three openings .
,

1
?
4
72 D ISSE CTION OF TH E DOG

however are of moment ( 1 ) The aortic h iatus ( hiatus aortic us ) between the
,
.

vertebral c olumn and the middl e of the three arches formed by the tendons
of the pars l u mbalis Through this pass the aorta the vena azygos and the
.
, ,

thoracic duc t [ ( 2 ) The caval f oram en ( foramen ven ae c av es) in the right part
of the tendinous centre for the passage of the caudal vena cava ( 3 ) The
,
.

cesap h ag ea l hia tus ( hiatus oes oph ag e u s ) between the right and left muscular

fibres of the pars lumbalis Thi s transmits the oesophagus and the oesophageal
.

nerve trunks
-
.

AO R T A — The last part of the aorta namely that which is found in the
.
,

abdomen has now to b e examined The abdominal aorta c ontinues the

,
.

thoracic aorta from the aortic hiatu s of the diaphragm to the seventh l umbar
vertebra where it ends by divi di ng into four l arge vessels the two hyp ogast ric
, ,

and the two external iliac arteri es .

The abdominal aorta is not precisely in the medi an plane but inclines a ,

little towards the left excep t at its termination Lying to the right is the vena .

cava and b etween the aorta on the one side and the right lumbar origin of ,

the di aphragm and the sublumb ar muscles on the other is the delicate wall ed ,
-

cisterna chyli i n whi ch the thoracic duc t has its origin The cisterna and the .

duc t must b e carefully preserved during the removal of the fibrous tiss ue and
fat from around the aorta at its entranc e into the ab domen .

To the left of the aorta are the left adrenal gland the left kidney and the , ,

left ureter b ut the kidney and ureter are generall y not in actual contac t with
the artery .

V entrally the aorta is c overed by a plexus of sympathetic nerves whil e

dorsall y it i s in c ontact with the tendinou s origin of the di aphragm and the
psoas muscles .

The branches of the abdo m inal aorta may b e di vided i n to two groups
.
,

according as they are paired or single as follows ,

P aired . S in g le .

P hrenic arteries . C oeliac artery .

P h r e ni c o abdominal arteries
-
. Cranial mesenteric artery .

Renal arteries . Caudal mesenteric artery .

Internal sp ermatic arteries . Mi ddl e sacral artery .

Lumbar arteries .

D eep c ircumflex iliac arteries .

A P HR ENI CA
. . Th c
phreni c artery desti ned for the diaphrag m genera lly
-

, ,

arises wi th the phr en ic o—abdominal artery and runs v c n tralwards a little to , ,

the side of the hiatus oesoph ag eus to the tendi nous centre . .

A P HR E N I C O A B D O M IN AL IS — The ph r eni c o abdominal artery leaves the

.
-
.
-

aorta beyond the origin of the cranial mesenteric artery and runs in a lateral ,

direction across the psoas muscl es at the lateral margin of which it meets the ,
 D I SS EC TI O N 0 1" TH E

ilio hypog as t ric nerve T h e a rtery pierces t h e t rans verse a bdomin a l mus c le
- .
,

and i s mainly expended between this and the i nternal obli q ue m us c le Co l .

lateral branches a re c ont ributed t o t h e fa t a bou t the kidney t h e adren a l ,

gl a nd and the sublumbar muscles

,
.

I t will be observed that th e p h re nic o abdominal arte ry crosses t h e dorsal -

fac e o f t h e adrenal gland while t h e c orresponding vei n occ upies a groove

,

o n th e ventral fac e of t h e gland .

A R E N ALIS —
.
The renal artery is relatively large The right and left arteries
.
.

do not always leave t h e aorta at the same l evel The right artery generally .

arises before the left and c rosses the dorsal fac e of the c audal vena c ava The
,
.

ren al artery soon disappears into the hilus of the kidney .

A S P E R M A TI CA INT E R N A — The internal spermatic artery is small and takes

.
.

origin from th e aorta at a variable point c ranial to the c audal mes enteric
artery A fter an oblique c ourse within a fold of peritoneu m which also c ontains
.

the c orresponding vein the spermatic artery enters the inguinal canal and there
,

forms one of the c onstituents of the spermatic c ord .

The c orresp onding artery of the female ( a ovarica ) suppli es the ovary the . ,

u terine tub e and the extremity of the uterine c ornu

,
.

A A Lu mB A L E s —
.
The lumbar arteries arise in pairs from the dorsal side of the
.

aorta I n all there are s even pairs b u t the last springs from the hyp ogastric
.
,

artery and not fro m the aorta direc t Each artery disappears al most at onc e .

u nder th e psoas muscles and therefore cannot b e followed at present

,
.

A C IR C UM F L E XA I L I UM P R OF UN DA — The deep c irc umflex i liac artery

. .

leaves the aorta at a right angle Having crossed the psoas muscles and c ome .

into c ompany with the lateral c utaneous femoral nerve the artery b ecomes ,

subcu taneous i n the region of the angle of the ili um Its terminal branches are .

distribu ted superficially over the cranial aspec t of the thigh and the adj ac ent
p art of the abdominal wall .

In cleani ng the origin of the circu mflex iliac artery a group of lymph ,

glands will b e observed lying along the side of the aorta .

VEN A CAVA C A U D A LI s This large vein b egins at the seventh l umb ar

.
-

vertebra s lightly to the right of the me di an plane where i t is formed by the ,

uni on of the two c ommon iliac veins w h ich dr ain the limb s and the pel v is .

Th e vessel ru n s along the right side of the aorta for some d istance b u t th e
right lumbar part of the di aphrag m ultimately sep arates the vein from the
artery The last part of the abdominal c ourse of the vena cava is b etween the
.

diaphr ag m and the l iver Thus the vei n reaches the foramen ven ae c av ae of the
.

di aphrag m and by i t enters the thorax

, , , .

The tribu taries of the caudal vena c ava are as f ollows 1

( ) C om mo n i liac

veins ( v v iliac ae c ommunes )

.
( 2 ) lum bar vein s six or seven ( v v lumbales ) ,
.

( 3 ) circ umflex i liac veins ( v v c irc um flex ae ili um prof und ae) ( 4) sp ermatic v ein s
.

m i —
( v .v sp er a t c ae) the left may j oin the renal vein of that side instead of opening
i nto the vena c ava di rec tly ; ( 5 ) r ena l veins ( v v renales ) ( 6 ) phren ico abdom inal .
-
74 D ISSE CTION OF TH E D O G
ve i ns ( vv p h r e n ic o abdominales ) ( 7 ) h epatic veins ( v v hepatic ae ) ( 8) ph ren ic
-
. .

v ei ns ( v v phrenic ae )
. .

With the exception of the two last named all these veins are satelli tes of ,

the corresponding arteries The h epatic vein s are numerous two to four are .

large and the rest are small They j oin the vena cava as it runs along th e
, .

diaphragmatic surface of th e liver .

V v P HR E N I CPE — The dorsal part of the diaphragm is dr ained by phreni c

. .

tributaries of the ph ren ic o abdominal veins ; bu t a right and a left vein in -

addition open into the vena c ava as i t pierces the diaphragm

, .

V E N A A z Y G os — A lmost the whole of the vena azygos has been examined

.

during the dissection of the thorax I t remains for the c ommencement of th e .

vein in c onnection with the first and second l umbar veins to be looked for dorsal
to the aorta close to the hiatus aorticus .

D U C T U S T H O R A CI C U s —
The c ommencement of the thoracic duc t in the .

c isterna ch yli must also be examin ed at this stage of the dissection The .

cistern is a mere dilatation of the duc t and lies to the right of the aorta on a
level with the origin of the renal arteries It occupies a cleft bo u nded by the .

aorta to the left and by th e lumbar origin of the diaphragm and the lesser
,

psoas muscle to the right Th e cran ial vena cava is ventral to the cistern . .

From the cistern the thoracic duct passes into the thorax to the right of th e
aorta .

S u blum ba r m us cles — In the s ublumbar region there are three muscles !

namely psoas mi nor i lio psoas and quadratus lu mborum arranged in this
, ,
-

, ,

order from the middle line outwards .

M P S O A S M IN OR — The lesser psoas muscle arises from the bo di es of the

.

last two or three thoracic vertebr ae and from the bodies of the first three or four
lumbar vertebr ae Its insertion is into the psoas eminenc e of th e hip bone
. .

M IL IO P soA s — The ilio psoas muscle c onsists of two parts

.
-
. namely ~

m psoas ma jo r and m i liacus

. Of these the greater psoas muscle alone can
. .

be properly examined at present .

The origin of the psoas maj or muscle is from the bo di es of the last three or
four l umbar vertebr ae Its insertion into the lesser trochanter of the femur.

will be dissected in c onnection with the thigh .

M Q U AD R A TUS L UM BOR U M — This muscle has an origin in c ommon with th e

. .

psoas minor from the last two or three thoracic vertebr ae It also arises by .

separate bundles from the last rib and the lumbar transverse proc esses I ts .

insertion is into the lumbar transverse processes and into th e iliu m in the ,

neighbourh ood of the sacro iliac articulation -

.

D issectio n — Some of the lumbar spinal nerves ( seven in nu mber ) may now
be examined Certain derivatives of these are visible withou t further
.

di ssection Between the psoas minor and quadr atus lumborum muscles
.

appear the ilio hypogastric and ilio inguinal nerves ; and between the
- -
76 D ISSE CTION OF TH E DOG

A short di stance from its termination the external iliac gives off the common
,

trunk of origin of three arteries vi z the caudal epigastric external pudendal

,
.
, ,

m p ectineus
.

v,
f e mor al is

m . adduct or
m . sarton us

m g rac il i s
.

m . semimembranosu s

n. sap h enus

a
. sap h ena

v. sap hena mag na

m . semitend inosus

m g astrocnem ius
.

FIG 2 9
. .
—S p
u c rfi c ial di s se c ti on of t h e inside of t h e t hig h .

and deep femoral The first two belong to the abdominal wall Th e deep
. .

f emoral artery disappears almost at o nc e under the pectineus muscle .

V IL I ACA E X TE R N A —The c ompanion vein of the external iliac artery li es on

. .
 DIS S EC TION 0 1" TH E D O G 77

its medial side a n d receives tributaries c orre s ponding to the br a nches of t h e

,

artery I t as sists the hyp o gast ric vein in t h e formation of the c om mon il iac
.

ve in
A S AP HEN A v S A P H E N A M A C N A E T N s a r n e s us —
.

.
,
.
, A bout t h e p oint at
. .

which the borders of the grac ilis and sartorius muscles meet three struc tures ,

make their appearance These a re the saphenous artery vein and nerve o f
.
, ,

which the nerve is m ost oral and th e vein most aboral Running immediately .

u nderneath the fascia they are c ontinu ed from the t h ig h into the leg A branch
,
.

from each of the three passes across th e medial aspec t of the j oint between the
femur and the tibia to supply the skin in this region .

M GR A C LLI S —The oral part of the gracilis muscle is very thin but its
. .
,

aboral b order is of c onsiderable thickness The origin of the muscle is ma inly .

from the tendon of the adductor of the thigh and from the gracilis muscle of th e
opposite side I n addi tion a part of the muscle arises fro m the symphysis
.

ischii and the border of the ischium The insertion is to th e anterior tibial
.

crest by means of a broad thin tendon blended with the tendons of th e

,

sartorius and semitendinosus muscles .

The main nerve of the grac ilis ( a branch of the obturator nerve ) appears
b etween the pec tineus and adduc tor muscles crosses the surfac e of the latter , ,

and then enters the deep face of the gracilis .

M S A R TO R I U S — The sartorius muscle lies oral to the gracili s and is clearly

. .
,

divided in to two p arts ( l ) The oral portion arises fro m the lateral angle of the
iliu m and is inserted into th e patella by a flattened tendon partly blend ed with
,

the c ommon insertion of the muscles of the front of the thigh ( 2 ) the aboral
portion has origin from the ventral border of the ilium Its tendon partly .

j oin s that of the gracilis bu t is also partly attached to the medial surfac e
,

of the tibia .

A FE M O R AL IS —T ll e first part of the femoral artery li es in a triangular

. .

space the f emo ra l triang le ( trigonu m femorale ) bounded by the sartorius and
, ,

pec tineus muscles and the inguinal ligament of P oupart The branches which .

arise from this part of the artery are : ( l ) The la tera l c irc umflex a rtery ( 2 ) the
a n terio r f em o ra l a rtery ; and ( 3 ) s mall m uscula r bra n ch es The first and sec ond .

branches may leave the femoral artery either separately or in c om mon In any .

c ase their origin only c an be seen at present Le aving the femoral artery j ust .

as i t crosses the b order of the ili o psoas muscle they immediately disappear
-

under the aboral part of the sartorius muscle .

Of the smal l muscu lar branches th e largest arises close to the apex of the
femoral triangle and is mainly c oncerned in the supply of the gracilis .

D issectio n .
—
R efl ee t the gracil is and sartorius muscles by cutting across them
abou t the middle of the ir length In turn ing up wards the proximal part
.

of the sartorius b e careful to preserve the nerve to the muscle ( ramus

anterior of the femoral nerve ) and the lateral circu mflex artery .
78 D ISSE CTION OF TH E D O G

The second part of the femoral arte ry b egins at the apex of the femoral
triangle and extends down the medi al side of the thigh under c over of th e ,

aboral portion of the sartorius to disappear in the in terval between the adduc to r
,

,v .
f emoral i s
I

a . c i rcum /tam f emoris lateral is .

/ a .
prof unda f er/io n s
I

m . sartor i usv - s
, m pecti neus
.

5
§

m
. add uctor
m . tensor f as cia latte

a
.
f emo r is anterior
"

m . rect us f emoris

a. f emoralis

772 . semtme mbranosus

m . vastus medial i s
a . saph en a

a. germ sup remo:

m . semitendin os us

m g astrocnemius
.

m . t ibi al is ant er i
or

30 .
—
Di s sec t ion of ins ide of t h e t hi gh af te r re m ov al of t h e g rac ilis m usc le .

and semimembranosus muscles The artery lies in a passage or canal which is .

triang ular in section The medial wall of the canal is formed by th e sar tori us
.

muscle ; the cranio — lateral boundary i s the medial vastus muscle an d th e ,

,

c audo la teral wall is formed by the pec tin eus and adduc tor muscles
-
.
 DISS E C T IO N O F TH E DOG

Sm all n u is c ul ar bra nc h es a rise fro m th is p a rt o f t h e fem o ra l a rte r y as d ,

o

a lso the s a ph e n o us and a rtic ul ar a rter ies .

V F rz mo n ma s —T h e fem o ral vein lies a l o ng the me di a l and a b o ra l side o f

‘
.

t h e femoral artery a n d receives tribut a ries whic h a re t h e s a t ellites o f the

,
.

b ranches of the artery

N s ar n nzs us —Th e whole c ou rse of th e saphenous nerve in th e thig h is now
.

exposed A branch of t h e femoral nerve it runs along t h e oral side of the

.
,

femoral artery in the fir s t part of its c ourse crossing the artery medially on a ,

l evel with the border of the semimembranosus muscle abou t which p oint it ,

c ontributes a twig to acc ompany the articular branch of the femoral artery .

A G EN U S UPR E M A —Tll c articular branch of the femoral artery leaves

. .

the paren t vessel as this disappears u nder the semimembranosus I t travels .

i n a groove formed by t h e semimembranosus and medial vastus muscles ,

ac c ompanied by a vein and a s mall branch of the saphenous nerve .

Certain muscles are now exposed These enu merating them in order
.
,

and b eg im i ing with th e most oral are : M edial vastus pectineus adductor
, , , ,

semimembranosus and semitendinosus

,
.

M VA ST U S M E D I A L IS —Tll e medial vastus is one of a group of three

. .

p owerful muscles clothing the oral surfac e of the femur Its orig in whic h .
,

cann ot b e prop erly examined unt il the adductor muscle has been reflected is ,

from the femur close to the head and from the proximal third of the medial lip
of the linea aspera The insertion is in to the patella in c ommon with the other
.

r
m uscles of the same g oup
M P E C TI N E U s —
.

. .The pectineus muscle is rather narrow and rou nded and ,

lies im mediately aboral t o the medial vastus Its orig in is blended with the .

attachment of the abdominal muscles and extends from the ilio pect ineal ,
-

em inence to the symphysis of the pubis Th e insertion of the muscle is b v .

means of a th in tendon to the distal part of the medi al lip of the l inea aspera ,

and along with the semimembranosus to the medial epicondyle of the femur .

M ADDUC TO R FE M O R IS — The adduc tor of the femur is a p owerful muscle

. .

plac ed aboral to th e pec tin eus Its m ore distal part is c overed by the semi
.

membranosus The orig in of the muscle is from the ventral surfac e of the p ub is
.

and ischium . I t has a fleshy attach ment to the whole of th e l inea aspera
and a little of the pop liteal space of th e femur and a ten dinous attachment ,

partly fused with the tendon of the pectin eus to the medial lip of the linea ,

as pera .

M S E M I M E M BR A N O S U S —The semim embranosus muscle is long and thick

. r
,

and partly hi dden by the adductor Two parallel parts can be readily .

separated towards the in sertion of the muscle .

The ir c omm on orig in is from th e medi al part of the sciatic tuber The .

oral portion is in serted i nto the m e dial epic ondyle of the femur and the
sesamoid b one in that neighb ourhood Th e aboral part is ins erted into the.

artic ular margin of the tibia .

80 D ISSE CT ION OF TH E D O G

M . S E M I T E N D I N O SU s .
—
This is a long and fleshy muscle lyin g aboral and
lateral to the semimembranosus with an origin from the lateral part of th e ,

sciatic tuber ; its insertion is by a str ong tendon to the medial surfac e of the
tibia and the anterior tibial crest in line with the insertion of the gracilis .

D issectio n — Cut across the s emimembranosus muscle abou t its middle ,

and reflec t towards its origin and i nsertion In turn ing upwards th e .

proximal part look for the nerve to the muscle as well as for that ,

for the semitendinosus .

The di stal part of the femoral artery will b e exposed as it lies in a

triangular channel formed by the vastus medialis adductor and semi , ,

membranosus muscles .

In the dep ths of the groove formed by the semitendin osus adduc tor and , ,

bicep s muscles the sciatic nerve will b e found This di vides unequally .

into the tibial and c ommon p eroneal nerves .

Now reflec t the adduc tor and p ectineus muscles by cutting them across
not far from their origins Thus will b e revealed the branches of th e.

obturator nerves supplying the adductor and pectin eus th e deep ,

femoral artery the in sertion of th e ilio psoas muscle and the external
,
-

obturator and quadratus fem oris muscles .

A PR OFUN DA
. F E M OR I s .
—A s has previously b een noted the deep femoral ,

artery arises from the external iliac artery in c ommon with the caudal epigastric
and external pudendal arteries Immediate ly after its origin the artery .

pierces the tendi nous aponeuroses of the abdominal wall and arrives between
the ilio psoas and pectineus muscles From this po int the artery c ontinues
-
.

between the adductor and external obturator muscles A branch passes .

through the obturator foramen and others supply the various adj ac ent muscles
,
.

N OBTUR A TO R IUS — The obturator nerve c omes ou t of the pelvis by the

. .

obturator foramen and appears in th e thigh by crossing the oral border of the
,

external obturator muscle It immediately di vides into branches for gr acili s

.
,

adductor and pectineus muscles

,
.

M I L IO P SO A S — The insertion of the ilio psoas muscle into the lesser tro
.
-
.
-

chanter of the femur is now exp osed and the origin of its iliac portion from ,

the medial surface of the ili um and the tendon of psoas m inor can b e examin ed .

A C I R C U M F L E XA FE M O R IS LA TE R AL I S E T A FE M OR IS A N T E R I O R — The latera l
. . .

circumflex and anterior femoral arteries may arise either together or separately
from the femoral artery about the p oint at which this vessel crosses the ventral
border of the ilio psoas muscle The lateral circumflex artery runs in a cranial
-
.

and lateral direction between the sartorius medially and the rec tus femoris
and tensor fasci ae lat ae muscles laterally It supplies these and the gluteal .

muscles The anterior femoral artery is much larger than the precedin g and
.
,

disappears al most at once between the rec tus femoris and the medial vastus
muscles .
 D ISS E C TION OF TH E D O G 81

N FE M O R ALIS P iercing t h e ilio psoas and the tendons of the abdominal

. .
- -

muscles the femoral nerve enters the thigh between the femoral ar tery and
,

the ilio psoas mu scle A t onc e the saphenou s nerve and the nerve to the
-
.

sartorius leav e the main trunk The former h as been followed down the thigh .

i n c ompany with the saphenous artery The nerve to the sartorius foll ows the .

lateral c ircumflex arter y .

Ci rcu m/Iexa i l i um
l
/ a .
p roj unda

m q twus
’

s up erfi c aati s
‘

\
.

n . cul a n eus f emori s Iateral u

m . s a rtor i us

m . tensor f asct az latte

n . c uta ne u
s f emor i s poslen or

m . sem i me mbra nosus

m . m nd endinosus

b icep s f emoris

FIG . 31 .
—S p
u erfi c ial dis se c t ion of l
t h e g ute al re
g io n and t hig h .

The femoral nerve acc ompanies the anterior femoral artery into the gap
bet ween the orig ins of the me dial vastus and rectus femoris muscles to whi ch ,

and to the lateral vas tus it is distributed

A FE M O R IS P O STE R IO R —The posterior femoral artery the las t collateral
.

. .
,

branch of the femoral artery takes orig in on a level with the medial head of ,

the gas trocnemi us muscle Branches from it supply the semitendi nosus biceps
.
, ,

gastrocnemius and the neighbourin g fl ex or muscles of the di gi ts

,
.
82 D ISSE CT ION OF TH E D O G

M . OBT UR A TO R E X TE R N U S — The external ob t urator muscle c overs the

.

ventral aspec t of the obt urator foramen Its origin is from the ventral sur fac e .

of the pubis and ischiu m about the margin of the foramen The fibres of the .

muscle converge laterally to be in serted into the trochanteric fossa .

M QUAD R A TUS F E M O R I s — The quadrate femoral muscle is short and thick

. . .

Aris ing from the ventral sur face of the sciatic tuber it is in serted in to the di stal ,

par t of the trochanteric fossa on a level with the lesser trochanter .

D issectio n — Remove the skin and fascia from the gluteal and thigh region s .

Observe the thickness of the fascia and the accumulation of fat c on

n e c t e d therewith When all the fat has b een removed an extensive
.
,

sheet of fascia c over ing the gluteal muscles and the anterior sur face of
,

the thigh is revealed Removal of the gluteal fascia is rendered tedious

,
.

from the fact that its deep fac e a ff ords origin to the gluteal muscles The .

fascia of the thigh is known as the fascia lata and is intimately c onnected
with the biceps and tensor fasci ae la t ee muscles .

M TENSO R
. F A S C I ZE L A Tz E .
— The tensor muscle of the broad fascia of the thigh
is the most oral of the group now exposed and can b e readi ly separated into ,

two parts Arisin g from th e ventral border of the i liu m and the mi ddle
.

gluteal muscle its fibres ra di ate and gi ve place to an aponeur osis which j oins
,

the superficial gluteal biceps and qu adr iceps muscles thus obta ining an
, ,

attachmen t to the patella In addi tion some fibres ar e inserted into the
. .

intermuscular septum between the biceps and lateral vastus muscles .

M edi al to the tensor fasc iee lat ae is the lateral cir cumflex artery .

M GLU T ZEU S SUP E R FI C I AL IS —

. The superficial gluteal muscle is not suffi
.

c ien t ly exte nsive to completely hi de the middle gluteal up on which it rests .

The origin of the muscle is from th e transverse proc esses of the sacrum the ,

s acro tuberous ligament th e first c occygeal vertebra and the gluteal fascia
-
, ,
.

Its in sertion is in to the trochanter tertius of the fem ur Some of its apo .

neurotic tendon blends with the tensor fasci ae lat ae and the fascia over th e
lateral vastus and rectus femoris muscles .

M BI C E P S F E M OR I s — The bic eps muscle is thick and powerful c overing the

. .
,

greater part of the lateral aspect of the thigh It arises by two heads A large . .

fleshy head spr ings fr om the sacro tub erous ligament and the sciatic tuber -
.

A much smaller and tendinous orig in is from the tuber medi al to the first
mentioned origin The muscle is inserted into the patella patellar ligam ent
.
, ,

anterior tibial crest fascia lata and fascia of the leg

, ,
.

Dissection — R e fle c t the superficial gluteal muscle so as to expose the middle

gluteal c ompletely .

N CU T A N E U S FE M OR IS P OSTE R IO R
. .
—Leaving the pelvis in company with the
84 D ISSE CTION OF TH E D O G

the other members of the quadriceps group the lateral vastus is inserted into ,

the patell a .

D iss ection — R efle c t the piriformis in order to expose the full length of th e
sciatic nerve .

m glutceus p rof undu s

.

a
f a.
glutaz a crani
a lis
m p iri f or mis
.

m . obturator i nternus g lutwus cran ialis

- m . sartori us

—
m . r ectus f emor is
a .
gl ut oeo . cauda lis
Q

n . cutane us f emori s p osteri or

nn. to m bicep s f emor is, c

. ( o ,

m . semi membranos us

m . semitendinosus

m g racil is
.

a .
f emor i s p osteri or

n , c utaneus 81m g 1011 37 01 13 n comm unes

.
p eronce ns

n. tib ial is

m . tibialis anterior

m p eronoeus long us
.

m flexor h altucis long us

.

m plantaris
.

m . exte nsor dig itor um long us

FIG . 32 .
—Di s se c t ion of
g lut e al reg ion an d late ral aspe c t of t h e t hi g h after re m ov al of th e s upe rfi c ial

l l
and m iddl e g lute a m us c es an d th e b ic e ps .

N I S C HI A D I CU S Th e sciatic nerve is formed by roots from the last thre e

. .
~

l umbar and the first sacral nerves Leavi ng the p elvis by the greater sciati c .

foramen in c ompany with the gluteal nerves and the c audal gluteal vessels it ,

reaches the region of the hi p j oint where i t tur ns i nto the thigh and ends ab ou t -

the di stal third of this segment of the limb by di vidi ng into two branches of
unequal size— the tibial and c ommon p eroneal nerves The exac t point of .

di v ision of the sciatic nerve is very variable being occasionally as early as th e ,

point at which the hip j oint is passed -

.
 DISS E CT ION O F T HE DO G 85

I n its ourse t h e scia tic nerve lies i n suc c ession on t h e dee p gluteal muscle
c ,

t h e t endon of t h e internal obtu rator the gemelli t h e q u a d ra tus femoris t h e

, , ,

adductor and ( possibly ) the semimembranosus m uscles I t i s c overed by t h e .

piri formis middle gluteal and biceps ; and the abductor posterior crosses it
,

obl i q uely i n t h e proximal third of t h e thigh A s i t cu rves round t h e region .

o f t h e hip j oint the nerve lies o n the oral side of the caudal gl uteal vessels
-
.

T h e br a nches of the sciatic nerve are as follows : ( 1 ) A branch arising before

the sciatic leaves the pelvis and dividing i nto twigs for the piri formis internal
, ,

obtura t or and gemelli muscles ; ( 2 ) nerves t o t h e bic eps se mite ndinosus

, , ,

semimemb ra nosus and q uadratus femoris muscles These leave the sciatic
,
.

i n th e form of a large comm on t ru nk springing fro m the parent nerve on a ,

level with t h e highes t p art of the trochanter maj or ; ( 3 ) a s mall nerve t o th e

p osterior abduct or muscle of the leg ; ( 4 ) la tera l c uta n eo us n erve of th e leg
( n c ut aneu s sur ae lateralis )
. The two last named branches leave the sciatic
.
-

about t h e same point thi s varying from j us t beyond the trochanter maj or
,

to abou t th e middle of th e thigh I f the sciatic nerve divides unusually early

.
,

the nerves t o the abductor and the c utaneous nerve are branches of the c ommo n
peroneal nerve The c utaneou s nerve gains the leg by running between the
.

semi membranosus semitendinosus and abductor muscles medi ally and th e

.
,

biceps muscl e later ally .

N G LU T E US C R A NI ALIS —
. T ll e cranial glu teal nerve is formed by branches
.

from the sixth and seventh lumbar nerves ( possibly also from the first sacral ) .

I t leaves the pelvi s by the greater sciatic foramen passes out between th e ,

p iriformis and deep gluteal muscles ru ns b etween the deep and middl e g lu teals
,

supplying both and ends in the tensor fasci ae lat ae ma in ly i n the longer oral
, , ,

part of thi s muscle .

N G LU T E US CAUDALI S — Tll is rises from the seventh l umbar and the fir s t

. .

sacral nerves I t acc ompani es the sciatic nerve on the medial fac e of the
.

piriformis where i t di vides in to two branches t o end i n the superficial and

,

m iddl e gluteal muscles .

A A G LU T E A CR A NI AL IS E T c a n n u l a — Both the crani al and the caudal

.
'

gluteal arteries are branches of the parietal ramu s of the hyp ogastric artery .

Lea v ing the pare n t vessel O pposite the oral border of the piriformis muscle the ,

cr anial gluteal artery acc ompani es the nerve of the same name into the gluteal
m ass of muscles V ery much larger and virtually the terminal branch of
.
,

the parietal ramu s of the hyp ogastric the c audal gluteal artery acc ompanies ,

the sciatic nerve to the region of the hip j oint a n d ends i n the biceps and -

semitendinosus mu scles .

M OBT U R A TO R INTE R NUS —The origin of the internal ob turator muscl e

. .

is within the pel vi s and c onsequently c annot be examined as yet Its ins er
, , ,
.
o

t ion into the trochanteric fossa of the femur however should now be determined , ,
.

D issectio n — R e fl e c t th e deep gluteal muscle and so expose the origin of the ,

rectu s femoris and capsularis muscles .

86 D ISSE CTION OF TH E DO G

M .
Q U A D R IC E P S FE M O R IS — Although named the quadr iceps muscle of the
.

thigh o nly three heads can b e satisfactorily demonstrated in the dog These
,
.

are the two vasti muscles ( m vastus medi alis and m vastus lateralis ) alre ady
. .

dissected and the straight m usc le of the thigh ( m rectus femoris ) now to b e
,
.

examined I t seems possible that the fourth head ( m vastus intermedi us ) is

. .

blended wi th the lateral vastus muscle .

M R E C T U S FE M OR IS — The rectus femoris muscle is the mi ddl e member

. .

of the quadr iceps group and clothes the anterior aspec t of the fem ur I t s
,
.

origin is from an emin enc e on the cra ni al edge of the acetabulum and its
insertion is into the patell a .

M CAP SU LAR IS — The capsular muscle is small and flat and lies on the
. .

lateral face of th e capsule of the hip j oint -

.

Dissection — Cu t across the sciatic nerve on a level with the sacro tuberous -

ligament and the femoral vessels at the hip j oint Remove the remains
,
-
.

of th e se muscles which are attached in the close vicini ty of the hi p j oint -

and clean the outer surfac e of the j oint capsule -

.

AR TI C U LA TIO O
G K JE .
—
The j oin t cap sule ( capsula articularis ) of the hip -

j oint i s in the form of a roomy double — mouthed sac one end of whi ch is , ,

attached to the margin of the acetabulum and th e fibrous appendage

thereto and the other is fixed to the neck of the femur a li ttle di stanc e fro m
,

the articular margin The strongest part of the capsule is lateral and oral
. .

D issection — Cut through the j oint —

capsule and examine its c ontents .

The j oint is formed by the acetabul um and the head of the femur The .

whole of the acetabulum is not articular inasmuch as its me di al half c ontains ,

a depressed non articular f ossa ac etabu li Opposite the fossa the c ontinui ty
-
.

of the c avi ty is broken by the i n cisura acetabuli Surroundi ng the acetabul ar .

margi n is a ring of fi br e cartilage the la brum g len o ida le c ontinued across the
-

, ,

incisura acetabuli by a ligamentous bridge the tran sverse ligam ent ( ligamentu m ,

transversum ) .

P assing from the fossa acetabuli to the non articular and slightly depres sed -

area on the head of the femur is the strong ro und ligam en t ( ligamentum teres ) .

Wh en this is di vided b v the dissector the limb wi ll be separated from the body .

D is s ectio n — The examination of the limb should be c ontinued by the

di ssec tion of the regions in front of the tibia and about the fibula Wit h .
-

this it is necessary to combine the dissection of the dorsum of the p es .

Before proceedi ng t o an examination of the deep fascia and muscles o f

the leg i t is well to follow the superficial struc tures of the metatarsus
,

and digits The removal of t h e ski n must b e c onducted with great care
. .
 D IS S ECT ION OF TH E D O G 87

Vs ms o r T HE n o ns U M o r T H E r ns .
—O u the dorsal aspec t of each digit
two veins are to be distinguishe d the dorsa l dig ita l vein s ( v v digit a les , .

do rsales ) These j o i n to for m three or four co m mo n dorsa l dig ita l veins

.

( v v d igitales c om munes ) which in their tu rn form the radicles of one large

.
, ,

dors a l m eta ta rs a l v ei n ( v metatarse ae dorsalis ) This single vein c ross es t h e

. . .

a .
g l anc e . ca udal i s

Lu sac ro-tub erosum

g I! g na w“ Cra l wd u
.
- 4

a . aoudo us la teral is
flcuu w
’

s up er
m g l uta us p ruj
. undus

n . u rh i 1 d i cus
I
n . Certa i n-as f em or is
pos teri or
m . adductor

m b iceps f emor is
m
.

. vas t us lat eral is

m sem ite ndi nos us

p eronwus commun is
.

n.

n . cuta neus auras lat eral is

tib ial is
'
n .
o

a .
f emo ris p osterior
m . sem imemb ra no s us

medi al w
I

n . c uta neus s arce

v . sap h ena parva

m g astrocnemt us
.
w ,
p e mnre us l ong as

I . ! In 4/ LA a n t e r i o r

m p lantar ls
.
u . fle n r d i j uu r um p rof und us
'

FIG . 33 .
—D ee p dissec tion of t he lut l
g ea re
g ion and th e lat l
e ra as
pec t of th e th ig h .

fl e x oraspec t of the tarsus where it c ommuni cates with the large saphena ve in , ,

then p asses ob liquely over the lateral face of the leg and disappears medial
to the biceps muscle to become the s mall saph eno us vein ( vena saphena parva ) ,

which fi nally ends in either the fe moral or the popliteal vein .

The medi al side of the metatarsus and tarsus is dra ined into the large
saphenous ve in ( vena saphena magna ) .

A R TE R IES O F T HE D O R S UM o r T H E P E s —Th e arteries dorsal to the .

 88 D ISSE CT ION OF THE D O G
metatarsus and digits are
derived from t wo sour ces the ,

saphenous and anterior tibial

a sap h ena
.

Re mus dorsali s arteries .

The saphenous artery ( a .

a . tib ial is anterior saph ena ) divides into plantar

Re mus sup er cial t s
fi
and dorsal branches The .

dorsal branch arrives at th e

tibial ia anterior
fl e x or aspec t of the tarsus and
there divi des in its turn into , ,

medi al and lateral branches .

The medial branch forms th e

s econd dorsal comm on digital
a rtery (adigitalis communi s
.

dorsalis II ) ; and the lateral

branch furnishes the c orre
sp e n din g th ird and fourth
arteries The c ommon di gital
.

dig ital es dorsal es

communes
vessels travel distalwards in
the g rooves formed by the
metatarsal b ones and end at ,
a. dorsalis p edi s
th e di stal part of th e meta
cd . metatarsus tarsus by dividing each in to
,
dors ales
two pr op er digital arteries
( aa digitales propri ae dorsales )
.

distributed along the dorsal

b orders of adj acent digits .

The skin on the fi b ular side

of th e pes is supp lied by the
superficial branch of the an
t erior tibial artery A full .

c onsideration of this vessel

should be deferred u ntil later .

F63 1 N ER V E S O F TH E D O R S UM O F

T H E P ES —Th e nerves of th e
.

region are derived from the

superficial and deep peroneal
nerves The sup erfi cial p eron ea l
.

n erve ( n p er on aeus sup er fi c ialis )

.

appears by piercing th e deep

fascia in the peroneal region a
little ab ove th e tarsus It .

FIG . 34 .
—
Diag ra m of t he ar te ries on th e dors um of th e pes .
supp lies the m edial dorsal
 D ISSE CT ION OF TH E DOG 89

o us n c u r
taneus dorsalis medialis to the first d igit a n d then t h e
c ut a ne ( ne ve .
) ,

s eco nd th ird and fo urth dorsa l dig ita l n er ves ( n n

, ,
digit ales dors ales I I II I e t .
, ,

I V ) which acc ompany t h e c orrespon ding arteries

N I E R O N E U S P R O F U N D U s —l h e deep pero n ea l n erve cannot be satisfac torily
.

' ‘
’
. . .

followed a t the present stage of dissec tion bu t may be found lying medial ,

t o the tendons of th e long extensor muscle at the dista l end of the ti bia A .

la rge artery the a do rsa lis p edis runs medial to the nerve
,
.
,
.

FA S C I A Th e deep fascia on the lateral aspec t of the leg is thick especially

.
,

i n th e proximal part of th e region where i t is connec ted with the aponeurotic

tendon of the biceps muscle Close to its attach ment to the anterior border
.

of the tibia longitudinal fibres give strength to the fascia Intermuscular

,
.

septa are proj ected between th e several mu scles of the region .

In the distal third of the leg th e tendons of the anterior tibial muscle and
t h e long extensor of the digits are bound to the tibia by a band like s pec ialisa -

t ion of the fascia known as an a nn ula r liga m ent

,
One end is attached to the .

tibia the other to the line of u nion of the two bones of the leg
,
.

Two other annular ligaments occur in the front of the tarsus One b inds .

down the tendon of the extensor digitoru m longus The other at the same .
,

level is provided with two c ompartm ents one c ontain ing th e tendons of th e
,

extensor di giti qu inti and p eron aeus brevis the other th e tendon of the peron aeus ,

longus Ye t another annular ligament fixes the tendon of the p eron aeus longus
.

muscle i n the groove on the lateral malleolus .

Th e muscles in the region now being examined are seven in number namely ,

m m tibia lis anterior ex tensor digitoru m longus p eron aeus longus extensor
.
, , ,

digiti quinti p eron aeus brevis extensor h allucis longus and extensor digitorum
, , ,

brevis .

M TIBI ALI S A NTE R IO R —

. The anterior tibial muscle as its name indicates
.
, ,

lies in front of the tibia and is the largest and most medial of the group of
,

muscles in this region I ts origin is from th e lateral c ondyle ( a s mall orig in )

.

and the lateral surface of the anterior c res t of th e tibia A bou t the j unction .

of the middle and distal thirds of the leg a rounded tendon begins and pass ing , ,

u nder the annular ligamen t crosses the tarsus ob liquely to be inserted into
,

th e rudimentary first metatarsal b one ( or the proximal end of the sec ond
metatarsal bone ) .

M E X TEN SO R D I G ITO R U M L e n s e s — The long extensor of the digits lies

.

partly under c over of the anterior tibial muscle and partly to its lateral side .

I t takes origin by m eans of a rounded tendon from a rough depres sion b etween
the lateral c ondyle and the patellar surfac e of th e femur Run ning down .

a g roove between the lateral c ondyle and the tuberosity of the tibia the muscle ,

li es on the surfac e of this b one In the distal thi rd of the leg the fleshy belly
.

gives plac e to a strong round tendon which passin g under the a n nular ligament , , ,

di vides into four p arts at th e tarsus These are fi nally ins erted in to the terminal .

phalanges of the digits Each tendon b ec omes expanded over the metatars o
.
 D ISSE CTION OF TH E D O G

phalangeal articulation Here

.

the most lateral tendon is j o ined

n .
WW W n W OW ,! prof undw
by the tendon of the extensor of
wip er/10mm
.

the fif th digit the others by the

tendons of the extensor digitorum
brevis The tendons are con
.

n ec t e d with the capsules of the

metatarso phalangeal and inter

-

phalangeal j o ints and on a level

,

wi th th e fi rst phalanx are j o ined

n . cut ane us
dorsali s medi al is by slips from the tendons of
interosseous mu scles .

M P E R O N ZE U S L O N G U S
. .

-
Ra mus lateratz s
'

P laced to th e lateral side of the

R amus mediali s
foregoin g th e long peroneal
,

muscle has orig in fr om the lateral

c ollateral ligament the lateral part
,

of the proximal end of th e tibia

and the h ead of the fibula Its .

tendon runs over the lateral mal

le olus across the back of the tarsus
,

in a groove on the cub oid b one ,

and is inserted into the base of the

fir st or second m etatarsal bone .

M E X TENS O R D I GITI QUIN TI

. .

This is a slender m usc le partly

b uried b etween the long peroneal
muscle and the deep fl ex or of the
dig its
. Its origin is from the
proximal half of the border of the
fibula . A thin tendon passes
down the leg in company with
that of the long peroneal muscle ,

crosses under this tendon j ust

beyond the lateral mall eolus and ,

fin ally j oins that slip from t h e

common extensor of the digits
which goes to the fifth di git .

M P ER O N ZE U S B R E VI S —The
. .

sh ort peroneal m usc le arises fr om

the distal half or two th ir ds of the
-

fibula and is in serted into the bas e

—D i g
,

35 . a ra m of nerv e s on th e dorsu m of th e pes . of the fifth metatarsal bone .

92 D ISSE CTI ON OF TH E D O G

c over of the biceps muscle D isappearing between the long peroneal and deep
.

fl e x or muscles it di vides in the proximal half of the leg into deep and superficial
,

branches ( n p eron aeus p rofundus e t 11 p eron aeus sup erfi c ialis)

. . .

B efore its division the common peroneal nerve supplies a branch to th e

long peroneal muscle .

N P E R O N ZE U S S UP E R FI C I ALIS — The superficial branch of the common

. .
~

peroneal nerve is included for a time in the septu m between the p eron aeus
longus and the extensor digiti quinti muscles P ierc ing the deep fascia over .

the lateral aspect of the leg some little distanc e proximal to the tarsus it becomes ,

subcutaneous and has been followed over the dorsum of the pes where it supplies
,

a dorsal cutaneous nerve of the firs t digit and the second th ird and fourth c om , , ,

mon dorsal digital nerves distributed to the second third fourth and fifth di gits , , ,
.

While still deep to the fascia of the leg th e superficial p eroneal nerve ,

furnishes branches to the extensor digitorum longus p eron aeus brevis and , ,

extensor di giti quinti muscles .

N P E R O N ZE U S PR OF U N DU S — From the point at which it leaves the c om m on

. .

peroneal nerve the deep p eroneal branch runs ob liquely b etween th e p eron aeus
,

l ongus on the one hand and the extensor digiti quinti and deep fl ex or of the
,

digit on the other Thus the nerve c omes into contact with the anterior tibial
.

artery alongside which and its c ontinuation ( the a dorsalis p edi s ) it runs very
, .

obliquely across the front of the tibia to the fl e x or aspec t of the tarsus where ,

i t terminates in a medi al and a lateral branch The medial branch follows .

the a dorsali s pedi s until that vessel disappears from the region and then
.
,

follows the groove between the sec ond and third metatarsal bones to form
the n m etatarsei dorsalis I I The lateral branch crosses the tarsus u nder
. .

c over of m extensor digitorum brevis which it supplies and then fur ni sh es

.
, ,

the n u m etatarsei dorsales III et I V

. .

While in the leg the deep peroneal nerve c ontributes branches to the
,

p eron aeu s longus extensor di gitorum longus tibialis anterior and extensor
, , ,

hallucis longus muscles .

A TIBI AL IS A NTE R IOR —

. The anterior tibial artery is prac tically the con
.

t in u at ion of the popliteal artery By piercing the i nterosseous membrane .

between the tibia and the fibula the artery gains the lateral surface of th e ,

former bone al ong which it runs with some degree of obliquity towards th e
, , ,

tarsus The p er on aeus longus extensor digitorum longus extensor hallucis

.
, ,

longus and tibialis anterior muscles c over th e artery in succ ession

, .

Opposite the j oint between the tibia and the talus the anterior tibial artery ,

changes its name to that of do rsal artery of th e p es ( a dorsalis pedis ) which .

,

crosses the fl e x or aspec t of the tarsus b etween the tendons of the anterior ,

tibial and long extensor muscles to disappear i nto the spac e between the ,

bases of the sec ond and third metatarsal bones Before di s appearing the .
,

a dorsalis p edis supplies the s econ d third and f ourth dorsal m etatarsal arteri es
.

( aa metatarse ae dorsales II III e t I V )

.
, , .
 DISS E CT ION OF T HE D O G 93

D issectio n .
—A ttention should now
direc ted t o t h e structu res behind be
the ti bia The disposition a n d strength of t h e f a scia o ver this part o f
.

the le g calls for remark I n t h e proximal t hi rd of t h e le g where t h e

.
,

m . vast us la teral is

n. isch iadic us
m . adducto r

m . semimembra nos us

a .
f emoratis
n . ( 17> fa tis

m. sem it endinos us

a .
f emoris posterior ,

n .
p e ro n a’
us
com m unis

m popl iteus.

n c uta ne us s urae
.
media lis
a . tibial is arz terwr

m g as troc nem i us
.

cap ut medi ate

us p rof undus
’
n .
p erona

m flexo r di g i torum
.
m . t ibial is anter ior

prof undus

m . exte ns o r d ig itor um
lo ng us

- m . extensor dig iti q uint i

n .
p eronosus sup erfi c ia l is

FI G . 37 .
—D i s se c t ion of ori
g in of tib ial and c om m on pe roneal ne rv es .

ca lf muscles are c overed by the hamstring muscles the fascia is not notably ,

strong but in the distal half of the region it is t hi ck strong and tendi nou s , ,

especiall y over the ten do ca lca n eus [ A ch illis ] ( the c ombined tendons of
-

gastrocne mi u s and plantaris mu scles ) In front of the tendon there i s .

a t hi ck tendi nou s c ord inserted into the c alc aneus .

The small saphenou s vein may b e again exami ned and its termi nation
noted Exami ne the cutaneou s nerves of the reg ion
. .
94 D ISSE CTION OF TH E D O G

CU T A N EOUS N E R V ES O F T H E B AC K o r T H E LE G are derived from

T HE
the saphenous peroneal and tibial nerves The saphenous nerve suppli es
, ,
.

the medial aspec t of the leg and pes The lateral cutaneous of the c alf .

( n c utaneus sur ae lateralis ) has been previously noted as arising either from
.

the sciatic or from the peroneal nerve I t bec omes superficial at the border .

of the bic eps and suppli es the skin of the p osterior and lateral parts of the leg .

N CU T A N E U S S UR ZE M E D I AL IS — The medi al c utaneous nerve of the c alf

. .

is a branch of the tibial nerve and arises a littl e di stance before this nerve
,

sink s between the two heads of the gastrocnemi us muscle Crossing the .

s urface of the gastrocnemi us sli ghtly obli quely along wi th a branch ,

from the posterior femoral artery and the small saphenous vein the nerve ,

di vides into two branches about the middl e of the leg These imme di ately .

pierce the deep fascia and bec ome sup erficial The posterior ( plantar ) branch .

r uns along the lateral side of the tendo —c alcaneus [ A chillis ] and supp lies the
s kin about the tarsus The anterior ( dorsal ) branch runs obliquely b etween
.

the tendo — calc aneus and the deep fl e x or of the digits is c onnected wi th the ,

tibial nerve and ends in the ski n of the distal part of the leg the tarsus and
, ,

the metatarsus .

A S AP HEN A — The origin of the saphenous artery from the femoral was
. .

noted in the di ssection of the thigh Crossing the surfac e of the gracili s and
.

semitendi nosus muscles subcutaneously it arrives in the leg and i mmedi ately ,

di vides into a nterior ( dorsal ) and p osterior ( plantar ) branches The anterior .

branch passes down the leg in ass ociation with the large saphenous vein and
has been examined in c onnection with the dorsu m of the pes .

The p osterior branch much the larger desc ends up on the deep fl e x ors of
, ,

the digit in a special c ompartment of the deep fascia which also c ontains the
c orrespondi ng vein and the tibial nerve A little proximal to the tarsus it .

supplies the latera l tarsal artery ( a tarsea lateralis ) and is c ontinued into th e
.

pes where it wi ll b e followed subsequently

,
.

M G A ST R O C N E M IUS — This powerful muscl e arises by two heads

. . The .

lateral head takes origin from the lateral sesamoid and from the lateral border
of the planum p e plit aeu m of the femur The me di al head arises from the .

medial sesamoid and the medi al b order of the planum p e pli taeum .

The two heads soon j oin and the c ommon muscle thus formed gives place
,

to a strong tendon about the middle of the leg The insertion is into the .

tuber of the calcaneus .

D iss ectio n — Cut across the gastrocnemius muscle j ust where its two heads
are about to j oin The process of reflecting the lateral head i s made a
.

little di flic ult by its close c onn ec tion with the u nderlyi ng plantaris muscle .

M . P L A N T AE I s .
—
The plantaris muscle arises in c ommon with the lateral
head of the gastrocnemius from the lateral sesamoid b one and the lateral lip
of the planum p oplitaeum In the di stal third of the leg the fleshy belly of the
.
96 D ISSE CTION OF TH E DO G

gradually passing on the medial side of the gastroc nemius tendon it ultimately ,

c omes to be the more superficial .

Two slips attach the plantaris tendon to the side of the tuber c alcanei ,

from which po int there is an apparent di rect c ontinuation of the tendon int o
the pes This appearance however depends upon a modi fic ation of the short
.
, ,

fl e x or of the di gits ( m fl e x or digitorum brevis ) which will receive c onsideration

.
,

later .

N TIB I AL IS — The larger of the two terminal branches of the sciatic th e

. .
,

tibial nerve accompanies the p eroneal nerve for a little di stanc e and then ,

enters the gap b etween the two heads of the gastrocnemius muscle Foll owing .

the b order of the plantaris muscle underneath the me di al head of the gastro
c n e m iu s the nerve c omes into relation with the p osterior branch of t h e
,

saphenous artery ; and in the di stal part of the leg it b ec omes associate d
with the deep fl ex or of the digits which it acc ompani es to the tarsus .

The branches of the tibial nerve are as follows ( l ) M edial cutan eous n erve
of th e ca lf ( n cutaneus sur ae medi alis ) which has already b een examined ;
.
( 2) ,

branches ( rami musculares ) large and numerous for the supply of all th e
, ,

muscles b ehi nd the tibia ; ( 3) m edial p lan tar n erve ( n plantaris medi alis ) ; .

( 4 ) lateral p lantar n erve ( n plantaris lateralis ) Th e medi al and lateral plantar

. .

nerves form the terminal branches of the tibial and are distrib uted in t h e ,

sole of the pes where they will be examined at the proper time
,
.

D issection — R efl e c t the plantaris muscle and expose th e deep muscles of

the leg These ar e three in number
. The most lateral really c ons ists .

of two muscles — m fl e x or hallucis longus and m fl ex or digitoru m l ongus

. .

but will b e more c onveniently referred to as the deep fl ex or of the digits .

D IGITO R UM PR OF U N D US — The deep fl e x or of the digits arise s

l

M . F LE X O R .

from the head of the fibula and the proximal half of the border of thi s b one ,

fro m the lateral c ondyle of the tibia from the proximal part of the posterior ,

surfac e of the tibia and from the interosseou s membrane The tendon of t h e
,
.

m flex or h allucis lon gus b egins ab out the j unc tion of th e middl e and di stal
.

thir ds of the leg and passes down th e groove formed by the calcaneus The much .

small er tendon of the m fl exor digitorum longus is more medi al and passes do wn
.

the groove on the medi al malleolus in which it is bound by an annular ligament, .

M TIBI AL I S P O STE R IO R — The p osterior tibial muscle is very ru di mentary

. . .

Ar is ing from the head of the fibula under c over of the long fl ex or of the digits ,

its feeble tendon following that of the long fl ex or finally blends wi th th e

, ,

medi al c oll ateral ligament of the tarsus .

M P O PL ITE US —The p opliteal muscle c overs part of the fl e x or aspec t of

. .

the articulation between the femur and tibia Its origin is within the capsul e .

of the j oin t from the lateral condyle of the femur ( sesamoid ) The fibres of .

the muscle spread ou t to fin d attachment to a triangular surface on the

proximal posterior part of the tibi a .
 DISS E C TI O N O F T HE DO “ 97

A . r o r LI T E A .
—l h e p opliteal artery c ontinues
'
femor a l between t h e
‘

the
two heads of the gastrocnemius muscle a nd insinu ates itself bet ween th e ,

poplite a l muscle and t h e j oint capsule of t h e articulation between the f e mu r -

and tibia I n order to follow t h e a rtery to its termination i t is necess a ry to

.

reflec t the popliteal and long fl c x o r muscles Th is h a ving been done .

,

it will be found that t h e popliteal e nds by d ividing into the anterior

a nd posterior tibial arteries The latte r is so small th a t to all intents .
,

and purposes the anterior tibial is the direc t continuation of the paren t
,

vessel .

A TI BI AL IS A N TE R IO R —
. T h c anterior tibial arte ry soon pierces the liga
.

m e n tous membrane between the tibia and fibula and thus gains the anterior
tibial region where its further c ourse has been previously noted
,
.

T HE S O LEPE S — Before any diss ec tion is performed five areas of

O F T HE .
,

modified skin should be noted These are in the form of distinc t c allou s .
, ,

h airles s proj ections one of them the larges t lies i n the h ollo w of the digits , , .

Its form is that of a heart with the apex distal Th e four smaller callosities .

lie over the j oints between the second and third phalanges O f the second th ird , ,

fourth and fif th digits

,
.

The skin over the sole should now be removed and th e struc ture and con
i
n ec t o n s of the c allosities determined Each c allosity c onsists of a fi b r o —
fatty .

basis with which thick horny papillated skin is intimately c onnected The , ,
.

callosities are j o ined to the sheaths of the fl e x or tendons by strong ligamentous

h an ds This is more partic ularly notic eable in c onnection with the large
.

c allosity which also receives a bifurcating band from the tendon of the deep
,

fl e x or muscle .

M U S CL ES A N D TEN D ONS O F T H E S O L E — The muscles and tendons of this

part of the pes are arranged in the following layers
l st Layer — M fl e x or di gitoru m brevis m abductor digiti qu inti
. .
,
. .

2 nd Layer — Tendon O f the m fl e x or digitoru m profundus m m lu mbricales

. .
, .
,

m qua dratus plant ae

3 rd Layer —M adductor digiti qu inti m adductor digiti s ec un di mm
. .

. . .
, ,
.

i nterossei
4 th Layer —Tendon of m p e ron aeus longus
.

. . .

In the d issection of the most superficial layer an examination must be made

of the sheaths O f the fl e x or tendons The sheaths assist the bones of th e .

di gits in the formation O f osseo m e m b ran ous tub es in which the fl e x or tendons s

are contained The dorsal wall O f the tub e is formed by the metatarsal sesa
.

moida and the phalanges while the plantar portion of the tub e is formed by
the fl ex or sheaths which are attached to the margins of the above bones Th e .

sheaths are not of uniform strength thr oughout On a level with the sesamoid .

b on es and O pposite the di stal end of the firs t phalanx a c onsiderable accession
, ,

H
98 D ISSE CT ION OF TH E D O G
of transverse fibres contributes great stre ngth to the sheaths In cleaning .

the fascia from the surface O f the short fl e x or O f the digit the medial plan tar ,

nerve which runs along

the medial border of
tib l i n. ia s
the muscle must not
b e inj ured .

M F L E X O R D IGI .

m t ib i l i p t i
TO R U M B R E VI S — Th is
. a s os er or
.

was mentioned in the

dissec tion O f the leg as
form ing the di rect con
t in uat ion of the plan
tar is muscle into the
n pl t i l t
. li
a n ar s a era s

sole Al most th e wh ole .

n p l t i m di li
. an ar s e a s
of the muscular tissue
m bdu t dig it i q ui t i of the short fl e x or has
. a c or n

been replaced by ten

m fl dig it um b i
! v

ez or or r er s
"

don Cont inuous with

.

the plantaris tendon

at the tub er c alc anei ,

the flattened tendi nous

mm it
band runs
.
down the
acce ssor

mm i nt i
. erosse - z
plantar aspect of the
tarsus to the proximal
part of the metatarsus ,
S li p f m t d f ro en on o

m fl dig it mp j d where it divides into

. exor or u ro un us
t l l ity o ca os
tw o branches each ,

branch again dividi ng

about the middle O f
the metatarsus The .

initial part of the

muscle is intimately
c onnec ted with th e
fascia i n the region
Of the tars us The .

four terminal ten

dons enter the fl ex or
sheaths divide into ,

two slips which form

a ring through
which the deep
fl e x or tendon passes ,

39 —S up fi i l di s ti n f th sol
. er c a s ec o oand end by beco m in g
e e.
 1 00 D ISSE CT ION OF TH E DO G

n ,
’

z ibz ah 3 digit. I t cannot be followed

satisfactorily until the dee p
muscles have been exam ined .

D issectio n — R efl ec t the deep

p la nt ari s lat er
- t
a es

medi al is
fl e x or t e n dori

M ADDUC TO R D IGITI QU INTI

. .

The adductor O f the fif th digi t

arises by a flattened tendon from
the plantar surface O f the tarsus .

Crossing the sole somewhat

obliquely it dips in b etween th e
,

in terosseous muscles of the fourth

and fifth digits and is inserted ,

into the fifth metatarsal b one and

n. dig italis the fir st phalanx of the fif th di git .

plantaris communis 1
M AD D U C TO R D IGITI S E C U N D I
. .

— A smaller muscle than the pre

ceding its orig in is between that
,

of the adduc tor of the fif th digit

an d the interosseous muscl e of t h e

second digit Runn ing di stal

.

wards between the in terosseous

muscles of th e sec ond and th e
thir d digits it is inserted in to th e
,

fir st phalanx of the sec ond di git .

MM INTE R OSSEI — The inter

. .

osseous mu scles are four in

nu mber Each takes origin from
.

the tarsus and the proximal end O f

th e metatarsal bones and divides
into medial and lateral parts to be
att ached to the sesamoid bones .

D issection the ad
.
-
R eflec t
ductor muscles O f the fifth
and sec ond digits and th e
interosseous muscle O f the
second di git Follow the .

plantar ramus of the saph e

nous artery in the lig am en
tous tissue on the fl ex or
FI G . 40 .
—D i ag ra m of t h e planta r ne rve s of t h e pes aspect of the tarsus and ,
 DI S S E C ION
T 0 1"
T HE D O G It) !

t hen b e tween the ih

t e ro ss e o us muscle of
t h e sec o nd digit a nd
the a ddu c tor
. digi t i
s ap h ena . 130 mm pla nta r"
q uinti until i t j oins ,

t h e a d orsalis pedis in
.

t h e f o rm a t ion of t h e .

plan t ar arc h .

A . T AR S E A M E D I AL IS .

Th e plantar ra nm s of t h e
saphenous artery is c on
tinne d a s t h e m edia l ta rsa l
,

a rtery along the medial side

,

of the fl e x o r aspec t of the

tarsus and forms the a rea s
,

p la n ta r is along with the

dorsalis pedis artery Th e .

medial tarsal artery then

c ont inues to the distal part A rc us p la nta n s

of th e m etatarsus and di
vides into the second third , ,

and fourth plantar m eta aa . dig itales pla ntares

co mm unes
tarsal arteries ( aa meta .

tarsei plantares I I I II e t , ,

I V ) which j oin the c om

,

m on plantar digital arteries .

A . D O R S ALI S P E D IS .

The c ontinuation of t h e
anterior tibial artery appears aa . metata rseae p lanta res

deep i n the sol e between the

second and third i nter
osseous muscles and u nder
c over of the origi n of the
m adductor digiti quinti
. .

A n astomosing wi th th e
plantar branch of the
saphenous artery i t forms
the p la n ta r a r ch ( arcus
plantaris ) from which arise,

the s eco nd third and f o urth , ,

c ommo n
pla n ta r digita l a r
teries ( aa di gitales pl antares
. F IG 4 1
. .
—Diag xam o l
f the p a ntar arteries of t h e pes .

H 3
1 02 D ISSE CTION OF TH E DO G

c ommunes I I III e t I V ) which run between the second and third third
, , , ,

and fourth and fourth and fifth metatarsal b ones

,
.

N P LA N T A R I S LA T E R A LI s —
. This the larger of the two terminal branches .
,

of the tibial nerve has been followed to its di sappearanc e under the m adductor
,
.

di giti quinti It will now b e seen to end in several branches about the proximal
.

third of the metatarsus Some of these branches are di stributed to the small
.

muscles of the sole three of them the secon d third and f ourth comm on p lan tar , , ,

dig ital n erves ( n n di gitales plantares c ommunes II III e t I V ) follow the

c orrespondi ng arteries of the same nam
.
, , ,

e .

M P E R O N ZE U S L ONGUS — Th e tendon of the long peroneal muscle has b een

. .

followed as far as the lateral aspec t of the tarsus It can now b e exa mi ned .

as it li es in the groove in the c uboid bone and crosses the plantar aspec t of
the tarsus to its insertion into the rudi mentary fir st metatarsal bon e ( or i n ,

its absence into the second bone ) Th e tendon is enclosed in a strong fibrou s
, .

sheath which must b e opened .

AR TI CULA TIO GENU — This j oint is formed by the c ondyles and patellar sur
.

fac e of the femur the patella and the articular surfac e at the proximal end
, ,

of the tibi a Al though the adaption of the bony surfaces is indi ff erent the
. -
,

j oint i n virtue of the character and number of the ligaments in association

,

therewith is strongly c onstituted

, .

D iss ection — Clear away the remains of the muscles ab out the j oint but ,

leave the tendons of origin of the p opliteus muscle and the long extensor
of the di gits Clean the surface of the j oint —capsule and define the
.

c ollateral ligaments .

C ap s u la describing the j oint —

artic u lar is — In
c apsule it is c onvenient to
.
,

consider it as divided into two parts : ( 1 ) The anterior part is roomy and
attached to the condyles and abou t the margin of the patellar surfac e of the
femur and along the articular edge of the tibia The patella may be regard ed .

as a bony island in this part of the capsule On each side of the patella th e .

capsule is thickened ; the thickenings being c onnected with cartilaginou s

extensions of the bone ( 2 ) The p osterior portion of the capsule is much les s
.

roomy and is attached ab out the articular margins of the femur and tibia
,
‘

Both parts of the j oint capsule are adherent to the edges of the meni sci between
-

the femur and tibia and are c ontinuous wi th the c ollateral ligaments of the
,
‘

j oint .

It will b e observed that the origins of the p opliteus muscle and long extensor
of the di gits are within the capsule .

Lig am entum pa tellce — The patellar li gament is a strong flattened ban d

.

extendi ng from the patella to the tuberosity of the tibia A pad of fat is .

interposed between the ligament and the j oint — c apsule and a small synovi al ,
104 D ISSE CTION OF TH E D O G

tibia and fibula . A ll remains of the mu scle s will require to be cleaned

a w ay .

There are t wo j oints between the tibia and the fibula a proximal tibia
r a rticu latio n ( articulatio tibio — fib l r is ) and a di stal i bi o fibu lar syndes
fi bu la u a t -

m os is ( syndesmosis tibio fi b ularis) Between thes e j oints the in terosseous

-
.

m em bran e of th e leg ( membrana interossea cruris ) u ni tes the two b ones V ery .

c ommo nly the di stal third or more of the tibia and fibula are j oined together
b y b one .

A rticula tio tibio fibula ris — The tibi o fi b ular articulation is surrounded by ’

- -
.

a jo in t capsule ( capsula articularis )

-
.

S yndes m os is tibio— fib n la r i s — The tibio fi b ular syndesmosis is very strong

.
-

and provided with an anterior and a posterior li gament ( lig mall eoli lateralis .

a nterius e t li g mall eoli lateralis posterius ) which bind the mall eolus of the
.

fibula to the di stal end of the tibia .

D issection — Remove all tendons annular ligaments , ,

and muscles from
the tarsus metatarsus and di gits
, ,
.

A rticu latio ta lo The talo — -

cr ura lis .
—
crural or ankle j oint formed by the -

t wo b ones of the leg and the talus is a strong articul ation provided with ,

c onspicuous ligaments The jo int caps ule ( c apsula articul aris ) is attached t o
.
-

the articular margins of the tibia fibula and talus On the me di al side of the , ,
.

j oint th e deltoid ligam en t ( ligamentu m delt oideu m ) arises from the medial
malleolus and by di verging bun dl es passes to the scaphoid talu s and
, , , , ,

sustentaculum tali of the calcaneus Laterally there are three l gaments i

.

running from the end of the fibula t o the talus and c alcaneus The posterior .

talo fibn lar liga m en t ( ligamentum talo fi b ular e p osterius ) the most proximal
- -

of the three j oins the lateral aspect of th e trochl ea of the talus The calcan eo
, .

fi bn la r lig a m en t ( ligamentum calcaneo —fi b ulare ) is the strongest and best

defined member of the group and finds attachment to the lateral surface of ,

the calcaneus The a nterior ta lo flba lar ligam en t ( ligamentu m talo fi b ular e
.
- -

anterius ) is very ru di mentary and attached to the n e c k of the talus .

Liga m en ts conn ected with th e talus — A nu mber of ligaments some of them ,

feeble hold the talus in position The p os ter ior ta loca lca n ea n liga m ent ( liga
, .

mentu m talo calcaneum posterius ) is rudimentary and is placed at the mos t

-

proximal p oint of contac t of the talus and calcaneus A very p oorly re pre .

sented la teral talo ca lcan ean ligam en t ( ligamentum talo calcaneu m laterale )
- -

unites the lateral surfaces of the two bones The m edial talo —calcan ea n liga men t .

( lig a mentum talo calcaneum mediale ) is much stronger than the precedi ng
-
,

a n d is p artly covered by the deltoid ligament It runs from the tubercle on the .

medial surface of the talus to the sustentaculu m tali A dorsal tarsal ligam en t .
 OF T H E 107)

lig mentu m t a rs i d orsale ) j o ins t h e n e c k o f t h e t a lu s t o the c uboid and

( a

third m e t a ta rs al b o nes A s m all a nterio r ta tr ea lm n ea n ligam e n t ( li g amentu m

. l- .

t a lo c a lc a neu m a nterius ) will b e found in t h e depths of th e g ro o ve bet ween t h e

-

t wo bones with which it is a ssociated .

D issect io n .
—Remove th e
talus This is rendered difficult from th e presen c e
. . .

of a s trong in terosseous ligament .

Liga m e ntum ta lo -
ca lca n em n in teross c a m —The
talo calcanean i nterosseous
.
-

lig a ment p asses between th e two bone s , and is attached to the grooves between
their articular face ts .

Liga m ents c o nnected with th e ca lca neus — Removal of the talus exposes both .

surfaces of t h e strong p la nta r ca lca n eo na vic u la r ligam en t ( ligamentu m calcaneo

-

naviculare pl a ntare ) which passes from th e sustentaculu m tali to the navicular

,

bone P art of the cavity in which the h ead of the talus rests is formed by this
.

l igament The lo ng pla n tar liga m e nt ( ligamentu m plantare longum ) is p owerful

.

and runs fro m the plantar surface of the calcaneus to the tubercle on the cuboid
a n d on to the tubercle at the proximal end of the fifth meta tarsal b one P artly .

u nder c over of and much sh orter than the preceding is th e p la n ta r ca lca n eo

, ,

c ubo id liga men t ( ligamentu m calcaneo c uboideu m plantare )

.
which j oins the
-

c alc aneus to the cuboid onl y On the dorsal and lateral part of the j oint
.

between the calcaneus and cub oid is a sh ort dorsa l ca lca n eo c ubo id liga m ent -

( ligamentu m calcaneo c ub oideu m dorsale ) which may b e regarded as a

-
,

thickening of the capsule of the j oin t .

L igam en ts co n n ected with th e na v ic ula r — A short do rsa l ca boideo na v ic ztla r

.
-

liga m ent ( ligamentu m c ub oide o navic ulare dorsale ) j oins the c ub oid and
-

navicular on the dorsal aspec t of the j oint between the two bones The .

navicular and lateral c uneiform bones are u nited by a small do rsal na vic ula r
c un eif o rm liga m en t ( ligamentum n a v ic ulari c ui i c iform e dorsale ) and a much -

stronger pla nta r ligam ent ( ligamentu m n av ic u lari c uneiforme pl antare ) j oins the -

navicular and the medial c uneiform bones The latter is c ontin ued to the first .

a n d second metatarsal b ones .

D issectio n — R emove the calcaneus and the pl a ntar calcaneo navicular and -

plantar navicular cuneiform ligaments

-
.

The di ssection exposes a sh ort p l antar c ubo ideo na vicula r liga men t -

( ligamentu m c ub oide o naviculare plantare ) u niting the pl antar aspect s of

-

the navicular and cub oid b ones .

A rti cula tio n es ta rso m eta tarsece —

-
The metatarsal b ones articulate with the
.

c ub oid and the three c uneif orm bones with which they are connected by dorsal . ,

plantar and interosseous ligaments The dorsal ligaments are flattened bands
,
.

of no great strength The interosseou s ligaments sh ould b e examin ed along

.

with the interosseous tarsal ligaments .

1 06 D ISSE CTIO N OF TH E D O G

D issectio n —Separate the remaining b ones of the tarsus in order to

demonstrate the interosseous ligaments .

Liga m enta tars i in terossea — One of the interosseous ligaments — th e talo

calcanean —has already been studi ed Others will now be found j oin ing the .

navicular to the cuboid the cuboid to the lateral cuneiform and the three
, ,

cuneiform bones .

A rticu la tion es i nter metata rsece — Weak dorsal and p la ntar ligaments unite
.

the bases of th e metatarsal bones The rigidity of the intermetatarsal j oin ts

.

depends upon strong i n terosseo us ligam en ts .

A rtic ula tion es m etata rso ph alang ece —The metatarso phalangeal j o int is
-
.
-

form ed by four bones namely the metatarsal bone the fi rst phalanx and two
, , ,

sesamoid bones The j oint is enclosed by a capsule connected with the extensor
.

tendons in front On each side of th e j oint is a colla teral ligam en t which j oins
.

the he ad of the metatarsal bone to the first phalanx and one of the sesamoid
b on es.

The sesamoid bones are firmly united to each other by a strong in terosseous
ligament and are further attached to the proximal part of the first phalanx
,

by ligaments on each side of the j oint as well as on its plantar aspect .

A rticu la tio n es digitorum p edis — The j o ints between the fir st and second ,

and second and third phalanges are pro v ided with capsules and collateral
ligaments In addi tion the j oin t between the second and thir d phalanges
.
,

has two dorsal ligaments which spring from the sides of th e proximal end
,

of th e second phalanx and are attached to the proximal end of th e third

phalanx .

P E LVI s —Th e pelvis is a cavity bounded by the sacrum and the two hip
.

bones and di ff ering in its contents dependent upon the sex It is convenien t
,
.

to suppose that the subj e c t being dissected is a male The contents of the .

female pelvis will be considered late r .

The c ontents of the male pelvis may b e tabulated as follo ws

Rectum .

P ossibly a small part of the prostate .

V isc era P rostatic and membranous parts of

.

the urethra .

D eferent ducts .

t Hyp ogas tric vessels and their branches .

Blood vessels - J

( M iddle sacral vessels

.

P udendal nerve .

Sacral plex us and its branches .

Nerves Obt urator nerve

.

Sacral part of the sympathetic nervous

sys tem .
1 08 D ISSE CTION OF TH E DOG

mesentery c ontinuous wi th the mesocolon the rectu m has its dorsal surfac e ,

c overed by peritoneu m to a level s lightly caudal to the acetab ulum The l ine .

of peritoneal reflec tion slopes obl i q uely across the lateral face of the tub e in
such a manner that the ventral sur face has scarcely an y peritoneal investment .

The term inal openi ng of the intestine the an us is surrounded by t hi ck skin , ,

provided with a somewhat scanty supply of short fine hairs Close to the line .

of j unction of skin and mucous membrane is a small open ing on each side
lea di ng into a sac from a hazel nut to a walnut i n size known as the p ara a na l
,
-

,
-

s in us ( sinu s para analis )

-
The sinu s lies b etween the external sphincter muscl e
.

of the anus and the longitu di nal muscle of the rec tum and has a lini ng ,

membrane provided with glan ds which produce a t hi c kish strong smelli ng ,

-

s ecretion .

M L E VA TO R A r m— The levator m u sc le of the anus of the dog i s relatively large

.

b ut thin Triangular in form it li es over the lateral face of th e rectu m Since

.
,
.

it is medi al to the c occygeus muscl e t hi s has to b e t urned aside in order that the
,

fu ll extent of the levator may b e exposed The levator ani arises from the .

symphysis of the isc hi a and pubes from the oral border of the pubis and from , ,

the medi al sur fac e of the i lium S ome of its fibres blend with the sphin cter ani
.
,

and some end on the fi rst vertebra of the tail .

M S P HI N C TE R A NI E X TE R N U S — Th e external sp hi ncter s urrounds the an us

. .

as a ring It consists of t h ree p ortions more or less blended together and is

.
,

attached to the aponeurosis of the tail The oral portion is poorly developed . .

The mid dl e portion is c onnec ted with the m b ulbo cavernosus and the aboral .
-
.

portion wi th the retractor muscle of the peni s .

M S P HI N C TE R A N I I N T E R N u s Th e internal sphi ncter muscle is merely a

. .
-

thi ckening of the c ircular m u s c le of the rectum .

It should b e noted here that the longitudinal musc ul ar fibres of the rectum
send a well defi n e d band to the ventral aspec t of the fir st few coccygeal
-

vertebr ae .

VE SI CA UR IN AR I A — Al though not a pelvic organ in the dog it is c onveni ent

.
, ,

because of its c onnections to study the urinary bladder here rather than wi th
,

the abdominal vis c era A n ovoid sac wi th a strong musc ul ar wall the b ladder
.
,

i s di vided for descriptive purposes into a main p ortion or body ( corpus vesic ae )
, ,

a blunt cranial end the vertex ( verte x vesic ae ) and a narrow pelvic extremity
, ,

the n eclc ( collu m v es ic m) continuous with the urethr a

, .

V entrall y the bladder lies on the abdominal wall the great omentu m ,

sometimes intervening D orsally i t is in c ontact p artly with the c olon partly

.
,

with c oil s of the small intestine D orsal to the neck are the deferent ducts
. .

O n each side the bladder is in relation to the small intestine and the ureter .

Naturally the relations of the vertex of the bladder depend materially upon
the amount of distension of the viscus When the sac is m oderately f ull it .

may touch the ileum A t all times the vertex is in c ontact with some part of
.

the sm all intestine .

 D ISS E C TI ON O F T HE D O G 109

— O pen t h e bladde r by m akin g

1) is s ec tio n . an in c i s io n al ong th e mid ventr a l
-

l ine from t h e vertex to the neck .

Th e interior of t h e u rinary bladder is lined by a mucous membrane of

distinctly rugose character but towards t h e neck the r ug ac are genera lly le s s
p rominent than over t h e rest of the interior .

In the dorsal part of the neck t h e o penings of the u reters will b e found and ,

if a probe be passed along a urete r its obli q ue passage through the wall of the
,

bladder can be demonstrated The term tr igon e of th e bladder ( trigonu m

.

vesic ae ) is app lied to that triangular area whose angles are denoted by the
ope nings of the ureters and u rethra .

S tr uc t ur e of th e bladderz — Fro m a naked eye examination it is evident that

-

the wal l of the urinary bladder is c omposed of the four layers c ustomarily found
in c onnec tion with hollow viscera of a like nature A serou s c oat is derived .

from the peritoneu m A muscular tunic c ontains fibres runn ing in di ff erent
.

d irec tions and arranged i n rather ill —de fi ne d strata The superficial stratu m .

c ontains fibres mai nl y longitudinally disposed A middle stratu m h as .

c ircular and a deep stratu m obliqu e and longitudi nal fibres The ob liqu e
,
.

and c ircular fibres form a sphin cter ves icce muscle at the neck of the bladder .

A submuc ous tela u ni tes the lining muc ous membrane to the muscular tunic .

PR O ST A T E — Th e prostate is a rounded lobulated yell owish mass c ompletely

, ,

surroundi ng the first part of the urethra and imperfec tly di vided i nto two
,

lateral lobes by a shallow median longitudinal groove The s ur fac e is thinly .

c overed by longitudi nal muscular fibres c ontinued from the bladder Generally .

o nl y a very small portion of the organ lies within the c onfines of the pelvis .

The two deferent ducts insinuate themselves close together between the
prostate and the neck of the bladder .

U R E T }LR A — The male u rethra is a tube concerned in the trans m ission of

~

b oth ur ine and semen and extends from the neck of the bladder to the free end
,

of the penis I n the female it is much shorter and purely urinary i n function
. .

The tube is di v isible into three p ortions ( l ) P ars p rostatica surrounded by

the prostate ( 2 ) pars m em bra na c ea exten di ng to the b ony arch formed by the
b orders of the ischia ( 3 ) pars ca vern osa within the c orpus c avernosu m urethr ae
of the peni s .

The pelvic p ortion ( c onsisting of pars prostatic a and p ars membranacea )

runs along the mi ddl e line i mmedi ately dorsal to the symphysis of the pel v is
and ventral to the rec tum This p ortion of the urethra is s u rrou nded by
.

th e u rethra l m us c le ( m ur ethrali s ) A branch of the pudendal nerve des tined

. .

for the prostate will b e found r umi i ng along the ventral face of the pars
membran ac ea .

If the pelvic p ortion of the urethr a be op ened by c ontin uing the mi d— ventral
in c ision of the bladder backwards to the b ony arch formed by th e ischi a it will ,

b e evident that the lumen of the prostatic part is narrow whereas that of th e ,
1 10 D ISS E CTION OF TH E D O G

membraneous part is wider On the dorsal wall of the prostatic part moreover
. , ,

an elongated ridge the cr ista ureth ralis and c olliculus sem ina lis will b e noticed ;
, ,

and on each side of the ridge the openi ng of the ductus deferens and the '

nu merous openings of the ducts of the prostate will be found .

M IS C HIO —
.
CAV E R N OSUS — The ischio cavernosus muscle is short and broad
.
-
,

and c overs the crus penis Its fibres arise from the dorsal aspec t of the medi al
.

angle of the sciatic tuber and are spread out over the expanded portion of the
,

c orpus cavernosum peni s .

M BU L B O CAV E R NO S U S — The bulbo cavernosus muscle of the dog is well

.
-
.
-

developed I t consists mainl y of transverse fibres c overing the bulbus urethr ae

. ,

and is connec ted wi th the mid dl e part of the sphincter muscle of the anus .

M R ETR AC TO R P E N i s Th e long pale retractor of the peni s leaves the aboral

. .
-
,

part ( possibly also the middle portion ) of the sphi nc ter am and runs along the ,

urethral surface of the peni s towards the glans .

M IS C HI O UR ETHR AL IS — The isc hi o urethral muscl e is rather small and

.
-
.
-

sprin gs from the dorsal aspect of the medi al angle of the sciatic tuber T h e .

fibres of the muscle pass to the symphysis of the ischiu m and are ins erted
into a fibrous ring thr ough which pass the dorsal vei ns of the p enis .

M UR ETHR AL IS — A S has already been mentioned the p elvic portion

. .
,

of the urethra is surrounded by a circular muscl e w hi ch can now b e ,

demo n strated as c ontinuous with the bulbo —cavernosus muscle .

A H YP O GA STR I CA — One of the terminal branches of the abdomi nal aorta

. .
,

the hyp ogastric artery pursues an oblique caude lateral c ourse across the -

brim of the pelvi s Between it and the m iddl e sacral artery is a group of
.

lymph glands ( lym ph og lan dulae iliac ae) Scarc ely has the hyp ogastric artery
-
.

reached the pel v ic c avity than i t di vides into two parts w hi ch may be ,

c alled from their di stribution the one visceral the other parietal
, , , .

The artery crosses the ventral aspec t of th e c om mon il iac vein obliquely .

Th e ili o psoas muscle li es on its l ateral side and ventrall y i t is separated

-
,

from the termi nal part of the colon by peritoneum only .

A U M BI L I CAL IS — The only c o ll ateral branch of the hyp ogastric is the

. .

u mbilical artery which proceeds towar ds the side of the vertex of the bladder
,

in the l ateral peritoneal fold c onn ected wi th this viscus A cra n ial ves ica l .

a rtery ( a vesic ali s crani alis ) arises from the umbilical

. and supp lies b oth the ,

bladder and the prostate A s mall branch the a def eren tialis follows the
.
,
.
,

deferent duct for some distance .

A P U D EN DA INTE R N A — The visceral part ( pars V i sceralis ) of the hypo

. .

gastric artery c onsists solely of the internal pudendal artery whi ch travels at ,

fir st al ongside the rec tu m— from which i t is separated by peritoneu m

then across the lateral fac e of the c occygeus and levator ani muscles wi t hi n
the sciatic spine to bend round the arch formed by the ischia and finally
, , , ,

to b e continued as the dorsal artery of the penis .

T h e following are the branches of the internal pudendal artery l

( ) The
1 12 D ISSE CTION OF TH E D O G

s up e r fi c ialis ) has been noted before as supplying branches to the gluteal gemelli , ,

i nternal obturator qua dratus femoris adduc tor biceps se mi tendi nosus and
, , , ,

semi membranosus muscles .

V H YP O GA STR I CA — The hyp ogastric vein di ffers fro m the artery of the
. .

same name i n not having di stinc t parietal and visceral parts It has two .

main tributaries vi z the caudal gl uteal vein and a c ommon vessel formed
,
.

by the u nion of veins from the peni s ( dorsal and deep ) the perineal vein and , ,

the mi ddl e h aemorrhoidal vein .

The hyp ogastric vein thu s formed lies lateral to and midway between , ,

the parietal and visceral parts of the artery Its collateral tributaries are .

the cranial gluteal ( often double ) cranial vesical and ilio lumbar veins ,
-

c orrespondi ng to th e arteries wi th the same names .

N PUD EN D US — The pudendal nerve is formed by roots fr om the first

. .

and second sacral nerves These j oin on the medial side of the hyp ogastric
.

vessels and the nerve so produced accompanies the visceral p art of the artery
,

( internal pudendal artery ) There is a close connection

. b etween the pudendal
and posterior cutaneo us femoral nerves .

Fr om the pudendal ner ve the followin g branches take origin : ( 1 ) A

branch runn ing vertically in a ventral di rection from the parent n erve clos e
to its commencement and supplyin g the urethr a prostate and urin ary
, , ,

bladder ( 2 ) m iddle h eemorrh oida l n erve ( n h aem orrh oidalis medi a ) ( 3 ) p erin ea l .

n erv e ( n perinei ) ( 4 ) dorsal n erve of th e p en is ( n dorsalis p eni s ) The three

. . .

last mentioned follow the arteries of the same name From the dorsal nerv e .

of the p enis springs a twig a lready noted which follows the ventral face
, ,

of the membranous urethra t o the prostate .

D issection— Remove the p elvic organs Cu t Open the rec tu m longitudin ally .

and observe the transverse folds of mucous membrane which b ecome ,

longitudin al as th e anus is approached The lumen of the tub e will .

b e noted as greater than that of the c olon Cut O p en th e para anal .

-

s inus .

Clear away the fat from that p elvic wall which is yet intac t By removal .

of the levator ani muscle the internal obtur ator muscle will be exp osed
,
.

D etermin e the constitution and branches of the sacral plexus .

M . OBTUR A TO R INTE R NUS —The internal ob turator muscle is thin

. and ,

l ies on the ventral wall of the pelvis over the obturator foramen Its origin .

is from the pubis and ischi um as they form the margin of th e foram e n Th e .

muscular fibres c onverge to a flat tendon which lies up on the gemelli muscles
and is attached to the femur with in the trochanteric fossa .

N N LUM B AL E S E T N N S ACR AL ES — The seven lumbar and three sacral

. . .

spin al nerves form a plexus which is simple at the c ommencement of the

l umbar region but b ecomes increas ingly complicated towards the sacral
,
 OF TH E DO G 1 13

region Th e c onstitution of the nerves a rising f ro m the lumb a r and s ac ra l

.

plexus may be su mmarised in this place .

N ilio h ypog a s tr ic us is formed by t h e firs t lumbar

.
-
.

N ilio ing ui na lis consists mainly of fibres derived fro m t h e second lumb a r
.
-

nerve bu t has i n addition a re inforc ement fro m the firs t lumbar

, , , .

N g e n ito f e mora lis generally c ontains fibres from th e third and fourth
.

lu mbar nerves but occasion ally those fro m the fourth are absent
, .

N c uta n e u s f e mo r is la tera lis is mainly formed by the fourth lumbar nerve

.
,

bu t i t also receives a branch from the third .

N f emoralis is c onstituted by the union of two main roots from the fifth
.
-

and sixth lu mbar nerves with an occ asional thin root from th e fourth nerve
,

i n addition .

n . c ut aneus

f emor is p osterior

11 .
pa

0 n itio in£7u inal w

-

caudal i s
.

71 . cuta ne us
a

n . is ch iad i cus

FIG . 43 .
—Ple x us of l u m b ar a nd sac ra ln e rv e s .

N o btura to rius results from the c onj unc tion of three roots namely fro m
.
,

the fo urth fifth and sixth lumbar nerves

, , .

N isch iadic us is formed by the fusion of large roots from the sixth and
.

seventh lumbar nerves and a small er root from the fir st sacral nerve
,
.

N g lutce us cranialis receives its fi bres from the same spinal nerves as
.

does th e sciatic ner ve .

N g lutce us ca uda lis c ontain s fibres c ontribu ted by the fir st and second
.

s ac ral nerves .

N p udend us has roots from th e fir st second and third sacral nerves

.
, ,
.

N c uta n eus f em oris poster ior is formed by the sec ond and th ird sacral nerves
.
.

N h wmorrh oida lis ca uda lis is c omposed of fibres derived from the fir st
.

and s ec ond sacral nerves .

With the exc eption of the obtur ator and caudal h aemorrhoidal nerv es ,

all th e above have been examined .

N OBT UR A TO R I U S — The obturator nerve is of c onsiderable siz e and is

. . ,

formed by roots which j oin me di al to the i lio psoas muscle The nerve crosses -
.

the m edi al surfac e of the iliu m and enters th e ob turato r foramen by insinuatin g
I
1 14 D ISSE CTION OF TH E D O G

itself between the pubis and the in ternal obturator muscle Entering the .

thigh it lies bet ween the pectineus and adductor muscles

,
.

N HZEM O R R H O I D ALI S CAUDAL IS — The caudal h aemorrhoidal nerve suppli es

. .
~

branches to the bladder and rectum .

A S ACR A M E D I A —The middle sacral artery arises from the end of the
. .

aorta in the angle formed by the two hyp ogastric arteries and r uns alon g the ,

mid ventral lin e of the sacrum in to the tail

-
.

P AR S A B D OMI N ALIS E T P E LVI N A S Y STE M E S YMP A THI CL — The sympathetic

system is c ont inued from the thorax into the abdomen and onwards into
the pelvis The abdominal part is conn ected with a chain of seven lumbar
.

gangli a which will b e fo und deep down in the narrow chink between th e
two psoas min or muscles Th e gangli a have the usual c ommu nications with
.

the sp inal nerves and filaments arising from them take part in the formation
,

of an aortic plexus .

The various plexuses in c onnection with the abdom inal v iscera hav e already
been examined .

Af ter the formation of the seventh lumbar ganglion the sympathetic cord ,

becomes markedly thin ner The sacral part is feebly develop ed and run s
.

along the ventral sur fac e of the sacrum im medi ately dorso lateral to th e .
-

middle sacral artery and vein On e or two small gangli a are present
.
-
.

TH E P E LVI S — The examin ation of the female p elvi s foll ows

F E M AL E .

the same lin es as those laid down for the p elvi s of the male The fir st t hing .

to b e done is to make a general exam ination of th e disposition of the p el v ic

organs so far as is possible before any di ssection has been carried ou t .

The pelvic in let is occupied by the ur in ary bladder the vagin a and a , ,

part of the c olon Thus the entranc e to the female p elvis c ontain s practically
.

the same organs as are associated wi th the male cavi ty with the addition ,

of th e vagin a .

The general form of the bladder agrees with that of the male organ bu t ,

there are no deferent ducts associated with its nec k As in the male the .
,

p eritoneu m is reflected fro m its mid ventral and lateral aspects onto th e -

abdominal wall in the form of three membranous sheets In the female the .
,

peritoneum associated with the bladder does not extend into the p elvi s bu t
is reflected ventrally and laterally onto the abdomin al wall about the brim
of the pelvic inlet From the dorsal side of the neck of the bladder peritoneu m
.

is c ont inued to the vagin a .

The vagin a occupies a p osition dorsal to the bladder and ventral to the
termination of the colon Lateral folds of peritoneum —c ontinuations of the
broad ligament of the uterus —c onnec t th e vagin a with the wall of the cavity
.

D orsally the peritoneum is carried back for some distance in to a p ouch ( the
1 16 D ISSE CT ION OF TH E D O G

to j ust beyond the margin of the ischium where it is continuous with the ,

uro g enital s inus .

The interior should b e exposed by mak ing a longitudi nal incision in the
mid ventral lin e When this has been done there will b e no di fficulty in
-
.
,

determin ing the extent of th e vagin a for its conspicu ous longitudin al folds ,

of mucous membrane c ease abruptly at the j unction of the vagin a and the
ur o genital sin us
-
.

The proj ection of the vag ina l portion ( po rti o vagin alis ) of the cervix of
the uterus into the vagin al ca vi ty should b e noticed .

S IN U S U R O GENITAL IS — The uro genital s inus is a short tub e with a com

'
-
.
-

ar at iv e ly smooth interior Just ab out the poin t of j unction of the vag ina
p .

and uro — genital s inus the ventral wall of the latter is pierced by the external
,

Op en ing of th e u reth ra ( orifi c iu m urethr ae externum ) .

P AR TES GENIT AL E S E X T E R N ZE — The external Openin g of the geni tal canal

.

or vulva is in the form of a vertical sli t with a rounded dorsal and a sharp
ventral commissur e The margin s of the op ening are formed by promi nent
.
,

ro unded labia p uden di .

Immedi ately within the ventral commissur e is th e clitoris the homologue ,

of the m ale penis .

M u scles of th e externa l g enital parts — The sphin cter ani muscle is di visible .

i nto two p arts b oth more or less cont inuous with muscular fibres of the perineum
, .

Th e oral part of the sph inc ter is c ont inued almost c ompletely towards
the v ulva as an a n o vulvar m uscle The aboral portion of the sphincter is
-
.

only partially cont inuous with a p erin eal muscle also run nin g to the vu lva .

The vulva is provi ded with a constrictor muscle connected with the two
perin eal sli ps j us t mentioned and c onsistin g of external ( ab oral ) and internal
( oral ) p arts .

A H YP O G A STR I CA — The hypogastric artery has the sam e orig in and the
. .

same general di sposition as has the c orrespon ding vessel of the male Natur ally .
,

however there are certain di ff erenc es dependent up on the diff erences in the
,

organs of the two sexes .

From the ram us visceralis ( internal p udendal artery ) springs a large branch
from which the uterine and the cranial and caudal vesical arteries arise Th e .

u ter in e ar tery ( a uterina ) follows the body and cornua of the u terus Th e
. .

cran ia l ves i ca l a rtery ( a v esicalis craniali s ) suppli es the bladder mainly but
.
,

in addi tion sen ds twigs to the vag ina The caudal ves ical artery ( a vesicalis
. .

caudali s ) is ma inly c oncerned in the nourishment of the vagina and the

ur o genital sinus
-
.

The termin al branches of the in ternal pudendal artery are c onc ern ed i n
the supply of blood to the uro —genital sin us and the vulva .

The ram us pa ri etalis of the hypogastric artery comports itself as i n the male .

The rest of the dissection of the female pelvis proceeds on the li nes given
for the male .
 D ISSE CTION OF TH E D O G 1 17

D issection — Remove the s ki n from the side of the neck shoulder and , ,

trunk P reserve the cu taneous nerves the largest of whi ch are derived
.
,

from the second t hi rd and fourth c ervic al spinal nerves

, ,
.

M C U T A NE US —O n th e removal of the ski n fro m the neck thorax and

. .
, ,

abdomen a musc ul ar sheet the cutaneous muscle is revealed Thi s is di visible

, , ,
.

i nto two parts : ( 1 ) the cutaneous mu scle of the face and neck and ( 2 ) the ,

cutaneou s muscl e of the thorax and abdomen .

Glandul a p arotis

m d eido wrvi calis

.
-

Gla ndula sub max il lan s

m. trapez ius j cerv ica lis

z
m trap e ius thoracalis
.

latissimus dorsi

63 1 67 710

ni anm - transversar ius

.

m deltoi deus
.

“ ~
m . sterno - cep halicus

in rect us abdom inis

CaP at toWum
.

m " 1 091’
s brach n
m . obliq uus abdominis externus .

v . cep hal i ca

m tri cep s brach ii Cap ut Zat eraZe

‘
.
.

m brach ialis
.

FIG . 44 4
. upe r fi c ial disse c tion of th e sh oulde r a nd n ec k .

( 1) M .
f c uta n eus — ac iei et colli
In the neck the cutaneous m usc le is arranged
in two strata the deeper of whi ch c onsists of transverse fibres and extends from
,
'

t h e im an ub rium ster ni to the larynx The superficial stratum c ontains fibres .

which run obliquely ventro orall y and is cont inued to th e fac e -

In the ,
.

face itself there is a thi rd still deeper layer c onfined to the region of the c hi n
, ,

wher e it forms the s ubm en tal m us c le .

( )
2 M c uta n eu
.s abdom i n is et p ec tor is —
Covering the whole of the l ateral .

aspec t of the abdomen and thorax caudal to th e scapula is an extensive sheet

1 18 D ISS E CTION OF TH E D O G

of fibres runni ng cranio ventral in di rection and c onverging upon the axi lla
-

where a tendon c onnects the c utaneous with the deep p ectoral muscle .

Two muscles the brachi o c ephali c and the sterno —

,
cephalic are more or
-

less blended and together form a muscular sheet of no great t hi ckn ess c overin g
,

the lateral and ventral aspects of the neck .

M B R AC HIO C E P H AL I CU S —The brac hi o c ephalic muscle is di vi sible into

.
-
.
-

two parts cleido cervical and cleido —

, mastoid j oined together i n the region
-

of the shoulder j oint and c ontinued t o the arm as a single muscle The place .

of uni on of the two parts is marked by a transverse tendi nou s li ne with which ,

the vestige of the cla v icle is associated .

The cleido cervical m uscle is attached to the occipita l b one and the cranial
-

half of the li gamentum nuch ae .

The cleido m astoid m uscle c overed by the sterno —cephali c muscle is

-

, ,

c onnected with the mastoid p art of the temp oral b one .

It will b e noted that the cleido cer v ical and sterno cephali c muscles in - -

th e lateral and dorsal parts of the neck are in the same plane and practically
parts of the c ontinu ous thin muscular sheet ; whereas the cleido mastoid -

muscle is much thi cker and in a deeper plan e .

The c ommon ab oral part of the brachio cephali c muscle is i nserted into -

the crista tub ercu li maj ori s of the humerus .

M STE R N O —
. C E P HALI CU S —The sterno c ephali c muscle arises from the
.
-

manubrium of the sternum and is ins erted into the mastoid part of the ,

temp oral b one Its intimate c onn ec tion wi th the cleido c ervical muscle
.
-

has j ust been noted .

M TR AP E Z IUS — The trap ezius muscle forms a thin ir regularly triangul ar

. .

shee t over the scapular region and c onsists of two parts — cervical and thoracic
, .

The cervical trap ez ius arises from the ligamentu m nuch ae caudal to the
attachment of the cleido cervical mu scle I t is also attached to the spinous
-
.

processes of the fir st two thr ee or four thoracic vertebr ae The fibres of the
,
.

muscle run in a caudal and ventral dir ection to b e inserted i nto the spine of
the scapula .

The th oracic trap ez ius c onsists of fibres whi ch run in a crani al and ventral
di rection Their origin is from the spinous processes of the thoracic vertebr ae
.

from the third or fourth to the ni nth or tenth and also from the lumb o dorsal ,
-

fascia The insertion of the muscle is to the dorsal t hi rd or so of the spine

.

of the sc apula .

D issection — Cut through the trapezius and cleido cervical muscles close to -

their dorsal attachments and tur n them downwards In do ing so note ,

.
,

the presence of lymph glands ( lym ph o glandul ae cervicales prof und ae )

- -

between the two muscles and under c over of the cleido cervi cal and -

omo transverse muscles In the same neighbourhood the superficial

-
.

cervical branches of the transverse scapular vessels and the accessory

1 20 D ISSE CT ION OF TH E D O G

M LA TISSI M U S D OR SI — The latissimus dorsi muscle has already been partly

. .

exposed in the di ssec tion of the ventral aspec t of the thorax and the axill a ,

and its i nsertion into the crista tuberculi minoris of the humerus has been
examined A t the present stage of the di ssection the origin of the muscle by a
.

tendi nous expanse from the lumb o dorsal fascia by means of which i t is c on -

mooted wi th the last seven thoracic and all the lumbar vertebr ae is to be ,

e xamined It will be found further that there is a fleshy origin from the las t
.

two ribs
N ACC ESSO R I U S —The acc essory or eleventh cerebral nerve passes towards
.

. .

the shou lder ventral to the wing of the atlas under c over of the brachio ,

c ephalic muscle and between this and the omo transverse I t then li es between -
.

the cervical part of the trapezius and the cervical part o f the ventral serratus
and supraspinous muscles and finally di sappears into the substance of the ,

thoracic part of the trapezius D uring the passage of the accessory nerve down .

t h e neck it is c onnected with the c ervical nerves from the second to the fif th .

D issection — R e fl ec t the omo transverse muscle

-

M SE R R A T U S
. di ssec tion of the wall of the ches t
V E N TR ALI s .
—
D uring th e
th e thoracic part of the ventral serratus muscle was examined The c ervical .

p ortion of the muscl e arising from the transverse processes of the third fourth
, , ,

fi fth sixth and seventh cervical vertebr ae is now exp osed

, , ,
.

D issec tion — A fter noting the presenc e of a s mall communicating vein from
the cephalic to the j ugular on th e surface of the brachio cephali c muscle -
,

the li mb may b e removed by c utting through the brachio c ephalic -

rhomboid latissimus dorsi and ventral serratus muscles Then th e

, ,
.

muscles nerves and vessels on the deep face of the scapul a and arm
,

should b e cleaned .

M . S u B s C AP U LAR I s .
—
Th e subscapular muscle is broad and fan shap ed -

and occupies the whol e of the subscapular fossa of the scapula Its fibres are .

separated into fi v e or more portions by tendin ous bands which c onverge towards
the shoulder j oin t The origin of th e muscle is from the subscapular fossa and
-
.
,

its insertion is into the tuberculu m m inus of the humerus .

M T E R E s M A JOR — A p owerful muscle placed immediately aboral to the

. .

forego ing the origin of the teres maj or is from the axillary border of the
,

scapula the angle separat ing the axillary and vertebral borders of this bone
, ,

and the subscapular muscle The in sertion of the muscle is in c ommon with .

that of the latissimus dorsi to the crista tuberculi m inoris of the humerus .

M BI C E P S B R AC HII —The biceps muscle runs parallel to and to the medi al

. .
,

side of the hu merus Aris ing from the coracoid process of the scapula the
,
.
,

strong tendon of orig in is bound down in th e intertubercular sulcus of the

 D ISSE CT ION OF TH E D O G 121

humerus by a transverse band of fascia and is surrounded by a synovial

prolongation from the shoulder —
j o int .

m . subscap ularis

m . suprasp i natus,

n . supras cap ulari s

fl

m pectoralis p rof a
.

n . ax illaris

n . masonic -
cut aneus m latissimus dorsi
.

n radi ali s
axillari s
.
a .

a. prof unda brach i i

m brach io
.
-
ceph ali cus
m tensor fascia:
’

. antibrach z i

n . ulnari s
n . musczd o -
cutaneus

m tri cep s brach n

. . Cap ut long um
m 10ectorali s
m tri cep s broch u
.

. . Cap ut mediate
m bicep s brach n
.
a. collateralis ul nari s

n . median us r

a collaterali s
.

p roxi mali s A
a
‘

radiali s sup er cial is fl

n
n
4
.

m . extensor carp i radians,

flexor carp i
o Q

7n radi ates
m p ronator
. teres
I

m flexor digitorum subli mi s

a radi ali s
.

m flexor dig itorum p rof und us

.

7 _, a ulnaris
.

FI G 4 6 . .
—D iss e c tion of t h e m edial aspe c t of th e s h oulder, arm , and f orearm .

The t e ndon of insertion of the bic eps is double Th e stronger part is attach e d .

to the tuberosity of the ulna th e weak e r to the tuberosity of the radius .

M C oR A c o BR A C HI AL I s — Th is is a small muscle lying in a depression

.
-
.
122 D ISSE CT ION OF TH E D O G

bounded by the subscapular teres maj or and biceps muscles It arises from , ,
.

the corac oid process by a long narrow flattened tendon which crosses the , ,

insertion of the subscapular muscle and its in sertion is into the cr ista tuberculi ,

m inoris lateral to th e c ommon tendon of the teres maj or and latissimus dorsi
,

muscles .

M TENSO R F A seIz E A N T IB R A C HI I — The thin tensor of the fascia of the

. .

forearm lies mainly lateral to th e latissimus dorsi from which it takes orig in .

The fibres of the muscle end on the olecranon of th e uln a and in the fascia
of the forearm .

M TR I C E P S B R AC HI I — Th e triangular gap b etween the scapula hu merus

. .
, ,

and olecranon of the uln a is occupied by th e p owerful triceps muscle Two of .

the hea ds — capu t longu m and cap ut mediale c an be dissected at th is stage -

.

The rest of the muscle must b e left until the lateral asp ec t of th e arm is
'

examined .

Capu t long um — The clean ing of the long head is facili tated by the reflection
.

of the tensor fasci ae an tib rac h ii Th is head of the tric eps is a thick triangular
.
,

muscle springing from the distal two thirds of th e a x ill ary b order of the scapula
,
-
.

and ending in a strong tendon inserted in to the olecranon .

C apu t m ediale — Sup er fi c ially th e medial head of the tric eps appears as an
.

elongated muscle between the long head and the biceps but a considerable ,

amo unt of the muscle is hidden beneath the long head Th e origin of the .

medial head is by one fleshy band from the crista tuberculi m inoris and by ,

another fr om the neck of the humerus A c ommon tendon attaches the long .

and me dial heads to the olecranon of the u lna a syn ovial b ursa intervening ,

between the tendon and the bone .

N S UPR A S CAP ULAR IS — Th e large suprascapular nerve dis app ears into the
. .

interval between the oral b order of th e subscapularis muscle and the supra
spin at us Af ter cross ing the oral border of the scapula branches are c on t ributed
.
,

to the supraspin ous infrasp inous teres mi nor and deltoid muscles
, , ,
.

N N S UB S CAPULA R ES — The subscapular nerves are small in size and thr ee

. .

or four in number They termin ate in the subscapular and teres maj or muscles
. .

N AX IL LAR IS — The axillary nerve is of large size and enters the triangular
. .
,

space circumscribed by th e subscapular teres maj or and c oraco brachi al , ,

-

muscles Then passin g between the long and medi al heads of the triceps
.
, ,

it reaches the lateral aspec t of the shoulder Its branches supply the deltoid .
,

teres maj or and min or and infrasp inous muscles ,

.

N M U SCU LO C UT A N EUS — The muscul e cutaneou s nerve passes distalwar ds

.
-
.
-

between the axillary artery and the c orac o brachial muscle and then aecom -
,

p an ies the brachial artery lying oral to the vessel The terminal part of the
,
.

nerve runs between the radius and the biceps Branches are given to the .

biceps coraco — ,
brachial and brachial muscles ,
.

In the distal thir d of the arm a communicatin g branch j o ins the medi an
nerve and a short distanc e distal to this the n cutan eus antibrachii la teralis arises
, . .
1 24 D ISSE CTION OF TH E D O G

which one di sappears into the bic eps muscle The other travels towards the .

shoulder j oin t and finally anastomoses with the posterior circumflex artery
-
, .

h m — Th e p osterior circumflex humeral

3
( ) A c ir c u.m fl ex a u er i p os te r ior .

artery accompani es the axillary nerve roun d the back of the proxi mal part of
the humerus In the di ssection of the lateral asp ec t of th e shoulder i t will b e
.

foun d under the deltoid muscle .

4
( ) A th o r a.c o d o rsa lis A -
r ising close to the c ommencement of the sub
.
-

scapular artery the thoraco dorsal artery crosses t h e medi al face of the teres
,
-

maj or— to whi ch it gives a branch or branches — and ends in the latissimus
dorsi and cutaneous muscles and in the skin .

5
( ) A c i rc u.m fle x a s c a p u l ce — The cir cu mflex scap ul ar artery is a small
.

vessel whi ch pierces the origin of the l ong head of the tricep s and r amifi es
i n the inf raspinous muscle From it springs the nutrient artery of the .

sc apula .

A B R AC HI ALIS — From its origin at the di stal b order of the teres maj or th e
. .
,

brac hi al artery runs distalwards i n a g roove formed by the bic ep s and the
medi al head of the triceps Cross ing the fl e x or aspec t of the elb ow j oin t i t
.
-
,

enters the forearm in c ompany wi th the m edian nerve The musc ul e cutaneous .
-

nerve foll ows the oral and the medi an nerve the ab oral b order of the arte ry
, ,
.

The foll o wi ng branches leave the brachi al artery whil e it is still in the arm
b —
1
( ) A p f
r o u.n da r a ch i i The deep art ery of the arm leaves the brachial
.

cl ose to its origin and acc omp ani ed by the radial nerve enters the chi nk
, , ,

b etween the long and medi al heads of the triceps .

2
( ) R am u s m u sc u la r is — A branch to the bic eps leaves the brachi al in
.

the di stal thi rd of the arm .

3
( ) A co ll at er a li s u ln a r i s r o im a li s — The prox imal ul nar c oll ateral
.
p x .

artery takes origin from the aboral side of the brac hi al al most opposite the
artery to the biceps Cr oss ing the f ac e of the medi al head of the triceps in
.

company with the palmar cutaneous ramus of the u l nar nerve it is exp ended ,

in the region of the elbow j oint and the ul nar asp ec t of the proximal half of
-

the forearm .

4
( ) A c o lla.t era l is r a d i a li s p ro x i m a li s — The proxi mal ra di al c ollateral .

artery arises from the brachi al ab out the same level as the origin of the ul nar
c oll ateral b ut from the oral b order of the parent vessel Af ter passin g in
, .

succession over the c ommuni cating branch from the m usc ul o cutaneous to -

the median nerve the medi al fac e of the bicep s and the fl ex or asp ec t of the
, ,

elbow it reaches the forearm

, .

( 5) A collateralis radialis distalis The di stal c oll ateral ra di al artery

. .
-

leaves the brachial artery close to the elbow j oint Run ni ng lat er alwards -
. ,

al most at right angles to the parent ves sel i t lies between the biceps and th e ,

brachialis muscles on the one hand and the humerus on the other The artery .

thus c omes into relationshi p with the deep radial nerve whi ch it accompa ni es ,

into the forearm .

 D ISSE CTION OF TH E D O G
— P roceed to the examination of the outer aspect of the shoulder
Dissectio n
and arm Remove the remains of the trap ezius and omo transvers e
.
-

muscles Observe the termination of the subscap ul ar artery and the

.

m i nf rasp inatus
.

m teres t
l
v
\w m suprasp inat us
.
f\ .

a. subscap ulari s "

m . tri cep s Caput long um - r

brachi i Cap ut laterale ~

~ deltoideus

-
ce p h ali cus

-
m bra ch ialis
.

.. v. cep hali ca

n radial i s
. . R e mus super fi cialis

m extens or carp i radia lis

m . anconaeus
.

m . ex tensor dig itor um commun is

m flexor
. carp i m . extensor dig iti q uinti

n ul na r is
. R amus .

cutaneus
p al maris
m . extensor di g i ti term
et q uar ti

n . 1dnari s . R amus
dorsal is

m . abductor

polli cis long us

FI G 4 7 — isse c tion of t h e late ral aspe c t of t h e sh oulde r, arm ,

. . D an d f ore arm .

Com . te ndons of th e c om m on e x te ns or of th e dig it s ; , , I II III , IV, and V t endons

of th e e x te ns ors of th e fir st, se c ond, t hi rd, f ourt h , an d fi f th dig its .
 126 DISSE CTION OF TH E D O G

c ommencement of its c ompani on vein Th e artery appears at the axi llary .

b order of the scapula i n the interval bounded by the teres maj or inf ra ,

spinous and long head of triceps muscles Cros sing the inf raspinous
,
.

muscle and the aponeurotic origin of the deltoid it ends i n the trapezius , .

M SU PR A S P IN A T U S — The supraspinou s muscle fil ls the whole of the supra

. .
~

spinous fossa of the scapula from which it takes origi n In addi tion some of .
,

its fibres arise from the subscapular muscle .

I ts insertion is into the greater tubercle of the humerus and into the insertion
of the deep pec toral muscle .

M D E L TOI D E U S — Irregularly triangular in outline and placed in the angle

. .

formed by the spin e of the scapula and the humerus the deltoid muscl e can ,

be di vided into two portions : ( 1 ) arising from the spine of the scapul a by
aponeur osis ( 2 ) taki ng origin fr om the acromi o n The two parts blend into .

a common ins ertion to the deltoid tuberosity of the humerus .

Vein s of th e arm — The main veins of the arm b egin as superficial veins
.

in the forearm .

V M E D I A N A CU BITI —The m edi an vein of the forearm di vides on a level with

. .
,

the tendon of insertion of the bic eps into a medi an bas ili c and a medi an ,

c ephalic The m edian basilic vein ( v medi ana basili ca ) crosses the medi al
. .

fac e of the biceps and receivi ng the ulnar vein or veins b ecomes the basilic
, ,

v ein ( v basili ca )
. This follows the brachi al artery to the di stal border of the
.
.

teres maj or muscle where it receives the deep humeral vein and becomes the
,

ax illary ( v axill aris ) . .

V M E D I A N A C E P HALI CA —
. The me di an cephali c vein runs in a groove formed
.

by the brachi o c ephalic and brachiali s muscles receives the radi al vein and
-

, ,

becomes the c epha lic vein ( v c ephali ca ) Af ter a short single c ourse the . .

cephalic vein becomes double One of its parts the original vein travels .
, ,

al ong the groove b etween the superficial pectoral and deltoid muscles and
finally j oins the external j ug ular vein The other part generally the larger .
, ,

follows the border of the deltoid and di sappears between the lateral and long ,

heads of the triceps to j oin the subscap ul ar vein Before its disappearance a .

s mall twig l eaves it to cross the brachio cephalic muscle sup erficially and enter -

the external j ugular vein .

D iss ectio n— R e fl ec t b oth parts of the deltoid muscle This wil l expose the .

i nfraspinous and teres mi nor muscles the origin of the lateral head of the ,

triceps and the termination of the axill ary nerve The last n amed .

appears along with the p osterior c ircu mflex vessels from a triang ul ar
, ,

space bounded by the long and lateral hea ds of the triceps and the teres
minor .

M . IN FR A S P IN A T U S —The inf raspinous muscle occupies the fossa of the

.

same name . Its origin is from the whole extent of the fossa and in addi tion
12 8 D ISSE CT ION OF TH E D O G

along the ab oral border of the infraspinous muscle Its origin is from th e .

di stal thir d of the a x ill ary border of the scapula and p articularly from a rough
elevation close to the gl enoidal margin Th e insertion is to the cr ista tuberc uli
.

maj oris between the attachment of the i nf raspinou s tendon and the orig in of
the lateral head of the tric eps
M T R I C E P S B R AC HII — T WO head s—c apu t longum and c apu t mediale—of
.

. .
‘

the tri ceps have already been exami ned I t will b e notic ed that the l ong head .

is i ncluded in both the medi al and lateral aspects of the arm .

C ap ut laterale — The lateral head arises from the crista tub ercul i maj oris
.

of the humerus under c over of the i n sertion of the deltoid The main insertion .

of the head is into the olecranon of the ulna in c ommon wi th the rest of the
triceps In addition there is a c onnection with the fasci a of the forearm
. .

D issection — R e fl ec t the lateral head of the tricep s This will all ow of an .

exami nation of the lateral p art of the medi al head which has origin
c lose to the head of the hu merus The brac hi al and ac on eus muscles .

and the radial nerve are also exp osed A branch of th e deep artery .

of th e arm acc ompani es the nerve and foll ows it into the forearm .

M . B R AC HI AL IS .
—The brachi al muscle has its origin im medi a tely me di al to
the in sertion of the teres minor and the origin of th e lateral head of the triceps .

R unni ng along the hu merus in a spir al manner the muscle crosses the fl ex or ,

aspect of the elbow j oint and ends in two tendons whi ch j oin t h e two tendons
-

of th e biceps Thus it ob tains insertion into b oth radi us and ul na

M A C O N ZEU S —The ac one us is a small muscle lyin g b etween the olecranon
. .

. .

and the humerus Its c hi ef origin is from the lateral epic ondyl e ; but s ome
.

fibres c ome from th e lateral c ollateral ligament of the j oint The insertion .

of the ac on eus is in to the lateral fac e of the olecranon of the ul na S om e of .

the fibres moreover are inserted into the capsul e of the elbow j oint
, ,
-
.

N R AD I ALI S — In the di ssec tion of the medi al aspect of the arm the radial
. .

nerve was observed to pass between the long and medi al heads of the triceps .

M ore of its c ourse may now be examined The nerve will be found at fi rs t .

between the two portions of the medial head of the triceps then between the
medi al head and the brachi al mu scle ; and l astly between the lateral head , ,

and the brachial musc le H ere the nerve di vi des into deep and superficial
.

branches b oth of which proceed into the forearm

,
.

The s uperfic ial bran ch ( ramus superfi c ialis ) of the radi al nerve is subcutaneous
and acc ompa ni es the ra di al vein The deep bran ch ( ramu s profundus ) follows
.

the brachi al muscle .

D iss ection — Remove the ski n from the forearm and the dorsum of the
manus In the superficial fascia blood vessels and nerves should b e
.
-

discovered .
 D ISSE CTION OF TH E D O G 129

V . C UBITI — The median vein b egins by dr aining the first

M E DIAN A .

digit . A fter crossing the medial aspec t of th e forearm it comes to occupy

the groove between the extensor and fl ex or mass of muscles The termina .

tion of the vein on the fl ex or aspect of the elb ow j oint has alre ady b een -

e xam ined .

V R A EI A LI s — The large radial vein c ommences as the dorsal veins of th e

. .

second to th e fifth digits Just ab ove th e c arpus a c onsiderable augmentation

.

of volum e results from th e reception of a larg e branch from th e median vein .

Th e radial vein n ow follows th e anterior border of th e forearm and ends ,

by assisting th e median c ephalic vein in the formation of the c ephalic

vein .

V v U L N AR ES —
. One or two small ulnar veins will b e found over th e
.
~

p osterior and medial p art of th e proximal third or so of the forearm They .

may j oin th e basilic vein .

A R AD I AL IS C O LLA TE R AL IS PR O X I M AL IS — T h e proximal radial c ollateral

. .

artery a branch of th e brachial enters the forearm by crossin g the surfac e

, ,

of th e biceps muscle A division into two branches takes plac e Th e more

. .

lateral and larger of the two passes in to th e metacarpus and terminates as

three com m on dorsal digital arteries ( aa digitales dorsales c ommunes I I III .
, ,

e t I V ) which lie in the grooves between th e second and third third and fourth , ,

and fourth and fifth metacarp al bones .

N CU T A N EUS A N T I BR A CHI I LA TE R AL IS — Th e lateral cu taneous nerve a

. .
,

branch of the m u sc ulo— cutaneous enters the foramen between the biceps and ,

brachialis muscles and then follows the m edian vein

,
.

N R AD I AL IS — Th e superficial branch of th e radial nerve travels down

. .

the forearm in c ompany with the radial vein A bou t the level of the elbow .

it divides into m edial and lateral branches The m edial bran ch the smaller .
,

of the two ac c ompanies the communicating vein from the median to the radial
,

vein and ends as the dorsal nerves of the first and sec ond digits .

The lateral bran ch crosses th e extensor aspec t of th e carpus and terminates

as dorsal nerves of the second third fourth and fifth digits , , ,
.

D EE P F A S C I A — The deep fascia of the forearm is strong and thick

. It .

forms a sheath for all the muscles and passes between them as intermuscular
septa A t the b orders of the limb it is attached to th e radius and uhi a and at
.
,

the distal end of the radius forms an annular ligament by which th e tendons
of the extensor muscles are retained in plac e .

D issection — The deep fascia must b e removed in order to allow of th e

examination of th e anterior and lateral regions of th e forearm an d th e
dorsum of the manus The annular ligament however must b e l e ft in
.
, ,

position for th e present .

It is c onvenient to note h ere that the annular ligament has b ony at tach
ments at five places The result is that four p assages in which tend on s are
.
1 30 D ISSE CTION OF TH E D O G

lodged are produced The arrangement of the tendons

. be summarised
in the followin g manner

U L N AR . R A D IA L .

The muscles in front and on the lateral aspec t of the forearm are arranged
in two layers superficial and deep
,
The superficial layer c ontain s the
.

mm brachio —radialis extensor carpi radialis extensor digitorum communis

.
, , ,

extensor digiti tertii e t quarti extensor digiti qu in ti and extensor carpi

, ,

ulnaris — in this order from the radial to the ulnar border of the forearm
“

M B R AC HIO —
. R AD I AL IS — Th e brachio radial muscle is very often exceed
.
-

in g ly rudimentary or even absent and lies im m e diat e lv under the skin

,

superficial to the radial extensor .

The orig in of the muscle is from the proximal part of the ridge above the
lateral epic ondyle of the humerus and its insertion is into th e medial border
,

of the radius .

M E X TENSO R CAR P I R AD I ALIS — T ll is the most bulky muscle in front of

. .
,

the forearm has origin partly from th e lateral epic ondyle of the humerus but
, ,

main ly from the ridge proximal to the eminence The fleshy belly of the .

muscle hes lateral to the brachialis and is imperfectly divided into two layers .

The superfic ial layer gives plac e to a flattened tendon which is inserted into
the base of the sec ond metacarpal bone ( m extensor carpi radialis longus ) . .

Th e deep part of the muscle larger and longer than the prec eding is succeeded
, ,

by a strong tendon which terminates at the base of the third metacarpal bone
( m extensor carpi radialis brevis )
. The two tendons are crossed obliquely in
.

the distal third of the radius by the abductor pollicis longus and are held down .

in a broad groove at the distal end of the radius by the a n nular ligament .

M E X TENS O R D IGITO R U M C O M M UN IS — The c om mon extensor muscle of

. .

the digits is lateral to the foregoing with which it is in timately connected at

,

its origin from the lateral epicondyle of the humerus and from the septum
 132 D ISSE CTION OF THE D O G

the fir st phalanx each tendon is fur ther j oined by the slender tendon of
,

an in te rosseous muscle The short extensor and interosseous tendons

.

may blend before they unite with the c ommon extensor tendons .

M E X TENSO R D I GI Ti .

TE R TII E T QUAR TI : M .

E X TENS O R D IGITI QUINTI .

m . t n
ar e a p i ul
sor c r i nar s
!
—These two extensors of
m xt . e dig iti q ui nt i
ensor
the di gits arise as a
m m en dig iti sor
t t
.

t qu tz
er i i c ar m t n
_ ~

a pi di li
common -
muscle
.
from the
ex e sor c r ra a s

m t. d g it
ex ensor m i or u _ lateral epic ondyle of the
mmu i co n s
humerus and the lateral
collateral ligament of the
elbow j o int In the prox i -
.

mal third of the forearm ,

the common mass divides

p lli l ng u
bdu t in to two fleshy b ellies of
a c or o ci s o s
,

which that of the extensor

of th e th ird and fo urth
digits is the longer The .

tendon in which the

m t n
ex e s or p lli i l g uo c s on s
t
e di i p p iu
in c s ro r s longer b elly terminates
di vides as the carpus
into two parts which j oin ,

those tendons of the com ~

mon extensor destin ed

for the thir d and fourth
digits The very much .

stronger tendon of the ex

tensor of the fifth digit ,

in like manner j o ins the ,

common extensor slip

belongin g to that digit .

M E X T E NSO R CAR P I .

U L N AR IS —The ulnar ex .

tensor of the carpus forms

the extreme uhi ar border
of the forearm A fl at .

tened and partly ten

di n ous belly takes origin
from the lateral ep ic on
dyle of the hu merus -

where it is closely asso

50 — T nd n n th d um f th m n
. e o s o ec iate d with the anconeus
ors o e a us . .
 D ISSE CT ION OF TH E D O G 1 33

The strong flattened tendon

of the muscle is inserted u ,-M M
. ,
’ l ! m ,“
Ja
R am“s lat
.

rali s R amus medwlw

i nto the base of the fifth
.

metacarpal b e ne A n addi
.

t ion al connection of the

tendon is with the annular
i fifizfiz m
0

’
ligament of the carpus and Ra fi

with a broad band of fascia

c rossing the pisiform bone .

B etween the band and the

b one there is a synovial
b ursa . It should b e noted nn . di g i tales
do l fl u wk f f
fiffiffz ii
_

that unlik e the tendons of

‘

the oth er extensors th e ,

tendon of the ulnar extensor

is not encl osed in a synovial
sheath at the carpus .

The deep layer of muscles

in front of th e forearm in
c lude s the mm extensor .

p olli cis l ongus e t indi cis

proprius abduc tor p ollicis
,

longus and supinator The .

two fir st mentioned can b e

c ompletely exp osed by c ut
ting that part of the ann ular
ligament which binds down
the t en don s of th e c ommon
extensor muscle of the di gits .

To exp ose the supinator

muscle it is necessary to
,

reflect the ra di al extensor of

the carpus and the comm o n
extensor of the di gits .

M E X TENS O R P O LL I C IS
.

L ONGUS E T IN D I C IS PR O PR I U S .

The extensor of the fir st

and sec ond di gits is a s mall
muscle lying under c over of
the common extensor wi th ,

an origin from the middle

thir d of the lateral b order of
t h e uln a The small tendon
.
FI G. 51 .
—Di ag ram of n erv e s on t h e dors um of th e m a nus
.
1 34 D ISS E CTION OF TH E D O G

of the muscle passes down that groove of the ra di us in which the c ommon
extensor tendons lie In the metacarpal region i t di vides into two parts
.

one ( inc onstant ) j oins the firs t di git ( m extensor pollicis longus ) the other .

fuses with that slip of the common extensor whi ch goes to the sec ond digit
( in extensor indi cis proprius )
. .

M AB D U C TO R P O LL I C IS L ON G US — The abductor of the first di git is di st inctly

. .

semi penni form Its origin partly under c over of the foregoing muscle is from
-
.
, ,

the mi ddl e two fourths or more of the adj acent borders of the radi us and ulna
-

and the interveni ng interosseous memb rane The tendon runs along the .

me di al b order of the mu scle crosses ob li quely over the tendon of the radi al
,

extensor and ends on the b ase of the fir st metacarpal bone A sesamoid b one
, .

i s associated with the tendon at its insertion .

M SU P IN A TO R —
. Th e supinator muscl e is small flat and irr eg ul arly
.
, ,

triangular and l ies on the proximal fourth of the radius Ar ising from the
, .

lateral epic ondyle of the humeru s and the lateral c oll ateral ligament of the
elb ow j oint i n association with the c ommon origin of the extensors of the
-

t hi rd fourth and fifth di gits the musc le is inserted into the anterior surfac e
, , ,

and medi al b order of the radi us partly under the insertion of the pronator
teres muscle .

N R AD I AL IS PR OFUN DU S —In the d issection of the arm it was seen that the
. .

radi al nerve di vi ded into deep and superficial branches Th e deep radi al nerve .

c rosses the fl e x or asp ec t of the elbow j oint under c over of the radi al extensor -

and supinator muscles Inc lini ng laterally i t then passes between the radi us
.
,

and the extensors of the third fourth and fifth di gits to end i n the ulnar , ,

extensor of the carpu s .

D iss ection — Before removing the skin from the palmar asp ec t of the manus ,

observe the presence of callosities similar in p osition and form to the five
emin ences enc ountered i n the pel vic li mb In addi tion there is a sixth .

call osity present in a li ne with b ut imme di ately distal to the prominenc e

, ,

caused by the pisifor m b one When the callosities have been exam ined
.

t h e skin should b e removed and the characters and connec tions of the
fascia noted .

—
FA S C I A The fascia at the back of the forearm may b e divided i nto two
.

l ayers The more superficial of the two is the looser and is c ontinuous with the
.
,

fascia of the arm The deeper and denser layer is more limited to the forearm
.

itself It forms a tough i nvestment for the muscles of the region and sends
.
,

septa between the individual members of the group The fascia of the forearm .

is especially strong and tendinous i n charac ter close to the carpus Here a .

band of i t passes u nder the annular ligament ( from the carpu s to tendon of
superfic ial fl e x o r of the di gits ) and is partly attached to the medial b order of
the carpus and partly c ontinued to t h e dorsal aspec t of the manus Over the .
1 36 D IS SE CTION OF THE D OG

A t the c arpu s three strong fibrous bands j oin the superficial flex e r tendon .

The fir st passes from the medi al bord e r of the carpus the second is derived
from the pisiform b one and the t h ird from the sesamoid at the medial side
of the c arpus c onnected with the tendon of the abductor pollicis longus .

In the pal m the fl e x or te ndons are c ontained in fl ex or sheaths comparable

to those of the pes .

Slips to the callosities of the di gits leav e the tendons on a level with th e
metacarpo phalangeal j oin t Close to the carpus a separate ten di nous and
-
.

feebly muscular slip branches off fr om the lateral b order of the fl ex or tendon of
the fifth digit and ends in a transverse thickening of the fl ex or sheath opposite
the metacarpo phalangeal j o int
-
.

M F L E X O R CAR P I U L N AR IS —This really c onsists of two separate muscles

. . .

The more superficial and the weaker head ( caput ulnare ) arises from the
olecranon and is inserted into the pisiform bone by a thin flattened tendon
which begin s abou t the middle of the forearm The deep strong humeral .
,

head ( caput hu merale ) li es mainly under c over of the fl ex or di gitoru m sublim is .

It arises from the medial epicondyle of the humerus and is inserted into th e ,

p isif orm b one by a very short strong tendon ,

.

The humeral head is anterior to the ulnar at its origin but the uln ar h ead
passes obli quely across the lateral surf ac e of the humeral head with the result ,

that the small ulnar tendon 1s i nserted into the pis iform in front of the stou t
hu meral tendon A t their insertion a small synovial b ursa intervenes between
.

the two tendons .

Th e deep layer of muscles c onsists of mm fl ex or digitorum profundus and .

pronator quadratus .

D iss ection — In order to follow the deep fl ex or tendons it is necessary to cu t

across the superficial fl ex or abou t the end of its fleshy belly Liberate the .

tendon from its accessory slips derived from the carpus and turn it ,

downwards A t the c arp us th e superficial and deep fl ex or tendons are

.

separated by a strong transverse band p assing from the pisif orm to the
medi al border of the carpus This must be divided Reflect the two
. .

heads of th e flex e r c arpi ulnaris .

M F L E X O R D I GITO R U M P R OF UN DU S
. deep fl ex or of the digits has .
—
The
three independent fleshy bellies The largest the humeral head arises from
.
, ,

the medial epicondyle of the humerus The u hi ar head— second in poin t of .

size —has origin fro m the proximal half of the u lna The radial head is slender .

and springs from th e middle two fourths of the medial border of the radius
-
.

The tendons of the three heads j oin a short distance proximal to the carpus .

The c ommon tendon passes down the fl ex or side of the carpus and arriving , ,

in the palm divides into four parts each inserted into the terminal phalanx
, ,

of a digit .
 D ISS E CTION OF TH E DOG 1 37

A very small variable muscular slip sometimes diffic ult of demonstration

, , ,

leaves the hu meral head of the deep flex e r in the distal third of the forearm
and has been c onsidered as homologous with the m p alm aris longus of man . .

Its very thin tendon soon divides into two parts which acc ompany the c ommon
tendon of the deep fl e x or into th e palm and terminate at the metacarpo ,

phalangeal j o int by uniting with the superficial fl ex or tendons of the third and
fourth digits .

M PR ON A TO R QUAD R A TUS —Th e quadrate pronator muscle consists of

. .

transvers e fibres crossing from the radius to the uhi a and filling th e inter
osseous space except at its ends .

N M E D I A N U S — Th e m edian nerve enters the forearm by passing between

. .

the pronator teres and the proximal end of the radius It follows the hu meral .

head of the deep fl ex or and is related superficially to the fl ex or carpi radiali s

,
.

In the distal half of the forearm th e nerve occupies a groove formed by the
hu meral and radial heads of the deep fl ex or F inally cross in g the fl ex or aspec t
.
,

of the carpus between the tendons of the superficial and deep fl ex ors it ends
, ,

as the v olar metacarpal nerves ( n n m e tac arp ei volares ) of the fir st second and
.
,

third digits which gain these by c oursing between the first an d second second
, ,

and thir d and th ird and fourth metacarpal bones

,
.

Th e following arise from the median nerve : ( 1 ) A branch is c ontributed

to the pronator teres j ust before th e median passes under this muscl e ( 2 ) .

U nder the pronator teres a large nerve arises for the supply of th e radial fl ex or
of the c arpus the superfic ial fl ex or of the digits and the hu meral head
, ,

of th e deep fl ex or ( 3 ) A small branch acc ompanies the c om mon interosseous

.

artery for a short distance and terminates in th e pronator quadr atus and
,

r adial head of the deep fl ex or of the digits ( 4 ) A s mall branch supplies the .

muscular slip which has been thought h omologous with the m palmaris .

longus of man .

N UL N A R IS — The u lnar nerve gains the forearm by traversin g the in terval

. .

between the two heads of the fl ex or carpi uln aris It then travels towards the .

carpus on the deep fl ex or of th e digits ( humeral head ) and under cover of the
hu meral head of the u lnar fl ex or of th e carpus Gainin g the metacarpus by .

crossin g the me dial aspect of the pisiform b one the ulnar nerve ends by divid ing ,

in to a superficial and a deep branch .

The branches of th e nerve are as follows ( 1 ) A s the ulnar nerve is enterin g

the forearm it gives off a bunch of branches to the fl ex or carpi u hi aris and th e
h u meral and ulnar h eads of the deep fl e x or of the digits 2
( ) A dors a l bra nc h .

( ramus dorsalis ) arises in the proximal thir d of the forearm bec omes ,

superficial on the u lnar border of th e limb j ust above the carpus runs along ,

the lateral border of th e carpus and metacarpus and ends over the fif th digit ,
.

( 3) T erm in a l bran ch es Of these the deep ramus ( ramus profundus )

.
,

disappears from view almost at once and must therefore ,be followed later
, ,
.

T h e s up erficial bran ch ( ramus super fi c ialis) p asses along the lateral border of
 138 D ISSE CTION OF TH E D O G
the flex e r ten do ns and
n . medi anus 71 . ulnari s divides in to two parts of ,

which one supplies the fifth

digit and the other follows
,

th e groove between the

fourth and fifth metacarpal
bones to j oin a part of the
ramus profundus .

A M E D I A N A — Th e bra
. .

nn . metaca rp ei
chial artery procee ds from
volares I , 1 1 , ct 1 1 1 the arm into th e forearm by
following the median nerve
under the pronator teres ,

and so b ec omes th e median

artery A b out the j unction
.

of the proximal and middle

th irds of the forearm the
median termin ates by di vid
in g into two vessels of
unequal size — the radial and
u lna r arteri es .

The collateral branches of

the median artery are ( 1 )
articular to the elbow j o int ; -

( 2 ) muscular to the fl e x ors ;

and ( 3 ) the comm on in ter
osseous artery ( a interossea .

c ommunis ) .

The common interosseous

artery leaves the median a
short di stance distal to the
elbow j oint and soon divides
-

in to a dorsal and a v e lar

branch The dorsal in ter
.

osseous artery ( a interossea .

dorsalis ) at onc e pierces the

in terosseous membrane b e
tween th e radi us and the
ulna and thus gain s the
,

dorsal aspect of the forearm .

Here it is c ontinued distal

wards between the exte nsor
FIG . 52 .
—D iag ram of ne rv es on th e v e la r as
pe c t of t h e m e nus . carpi uhi aris and the exten
 D ISSE CT ION OF T HE D O G

di vidi ng into a dorsal

and a v e lar branch The .

former assists i n the form

-
a ul na?
.
! ation of the rete carpi
dorsale ; and the l atter
is c oncerned in the pro
duc tion of the deep v e lar
- a. i nterossea volar is arch .

A U L N A R IS —The ul
. .

nar artery is so much

l arger than the ra di al that
it might b e regarded as
the di rec t c ontinuation of
the m edian It foll ows .

the medi an nerve along

the medi al b order of the
deep fl e x or and crosses ,

the fl ex or aspec t of the

c arpu s into the meta
c arpus between the super
fi c ial and deep fl e x or
tendons Just ab ove the
.

c arpus there is a slender

c ommunication b etw e en
th e ulnar and radi al
arteries I n the meta
.

c arpus the ulnar artery

c ontributes a com m on
ve lar digita l artery to the

first di git and then ends

ab out the m i ddl e of the
metac arpus by dividi ng
into com m on ve lar digitals
for the sec ond third and , ,

fourth digits ( aa digitales .

volares c ommunes II ,

III e t I V )
,
Each c om
.

mon artery is j oined by

a com muni cating branch
from the dorsal common
digital artery and then ,

divides at the end of

FIG 54
. .
-
Di ag ram of the v olar arte ries of t h e m anus . the metacarpus into two
 D ISS E CT ION OF TH E D O G 14 1

branches for the adj acent borders of neighbouring di gits ( aa digitales volares .

propri ae ) .

MM LU M BR I CAL ES — Three slender l umbrical muscles arise from the pal mar
. .

aspect of the deep fl e x or tendon and lie between the tendi nous slips belonging
to second thi rd fourth and fifth digits The middl e muscle of the three is
, , ,
.

th e best developed Their fine tendons are inserted into the radi al side of the
.

proximal end of the first phalanx of the third fourth and fifth digits , ,
.

D issec tion — Cut across the deep flex e r tendon on a level with th e c arpus .

This will allow of the dissection of the deep mu scles etc of the palm ,
.
, .

MM INTE R O S SEI
. .
—There are four fl eshy and moderately larg e interosseous
muscles lying over the sec ond t h ird fourth and fifth metac arpal b ones and , , ,

in the grooves between them They arise from the v e lar asp ect of th e distal .

row of the c arpus and from the proximal end of the metacarp al b ones Each .

muscl e di vides into medi al and lateral parts and is inserted to a pair of meta
c arpal sesamoid b ones In addition tendi nou s c ords are c ontinued to the
.

c ommon extensor tendon .

SHO R T M US CL ES O F T H E F IR ST D IGIT — T hr ee small short muscles are .

,

c onnected with the fi rst digit The most medi al m a bductor p ollicis brevis et .
,
.

Op p on en s p ollicis is rudi mentary and arises from the band which leaves the
,

sesamoid b on e at the medi al side of the c arpus to j oin the tendon of th e sup e r
fi c ial fl e x or The ab duc tor and opponens mu scle is ins erted into th e di stal
.

part of the first metac arpal b one and th e proximal phalanx of the fi rst di git .

M flexor p ollicis brevis is b etter developed than the foregoing to the lateral sid e
.
,

of whi ch it li es and arises from th e v e lar aspec t of the c arpus The muscle
,
.

is ins erted into the proximal phalanx of the fir st di git The third short muscle .

of the p ollex m adductor p ollicis is th e largest of the three Its origi n is from
,
.
,
.

the v e lar surfac e of the c arpu s b etween the foregoing and the interosseou s
muscl e of the sec ond di git and its insertion is into the lateral face of th e ,

proxi mal phalanx of th e fir st di git .

M A D DUC TO R D IGITI S E CU N DI — The add uctor muscl e of th e sec ond

. .

di git is thi n and narrow Lying along th e lateral b order of th e interosseou s

.

muscle of the sec ond di git it has origin from the vol ar face of th e c arpus and, ,

is inserted into the first phalanx of the sec ond digit .

S H O R T M U S CL E S o r T H E FIFTH D 1 GI T — Four short muscles are c onnected .

with the fifth digit One of these the interosseous has already been described
.
, , .

M adductor digiti quin ti arises from the fl e x or aspect of the c arpus close
.

to the origin of the adduc tor of the sec ond di git Crossing the interosseous .

muscles of the third and fourth digits ob liquely it gains the first phalanx of ,

the fifth di git by sinking b etween the fourth and fifth interosseous muscles .

M abductor digiti quinti —The abductor is the largest of the three muscles
.

n ow u n de r c onsideration
,
It h es imme diately u nder the skin on the lateral
.

b order of the c arpus The relatively t hi ck fleshy b elly arises from th e pisiform
.
142 D ISSE CTION OF THE DO G

bone and gives place to a thin tendon at the proximal part of the metacarpus .

The insertion of the abductor is i nto the lateral aspect of the base of the first
phalanx of the fifth di git and into the lateral sesamoid bone
,
.

ill flex or dig iti quin ti brev is — The short fl ex or li es medial to the abductor
. .
,

and has origin from the strong ligamentous band which j oins the pisiform
bone to th e t h ird and fourth m etacarpals Its slender tendon j oi ns that of
.

the abduc tor .

D issection — The deep vessel s and nerves of the palm must now be examined .

The c ontinu ation of the ulnar artery runs under the ligamentous band
whi ch j oins the pis iform to the third and fourth metacarpal bones and ,

then under the short fl ex or of the fifth di git To follow it it is necessar y

.
,

to reflec t the adductors of the sec ond and fifth di gits as well as the
interosseous muscle of the second di git This di ssection will also expose
.

the c ontinuation of the ulnar nerve .

AR CU S V O LAR IS PR OF U N DU S The deep v e lar arch is formed under th e

.
-

short muscle s of the di gits in the proximal thir d of the metacarpus by the ,

u nion of the continuation of the ulnar artery and the ter mi nation of the radi al
artery The radi al artery gains the arch by passing under the short muscles of
.

the fir s t digit .

From the arch arise vo lar m etaca rpal arteries ( aa metacarpe ae volares I I .
,

III e t I V ) whi ch run di stalwards between the sec ond and third thi rd and
, ,

four th and fourth and fifth metacarpal bones The third artery i s the larges t
,
.

and most superficial .

A t the di stal end of the metacarpus the volar metacarpal arteries are
c onnected wi th the common dorsal digital arteries .

RAM US PR OF U N D US or T HE U L N AR N E R V E — The deep branch of the

ulnar nerve foll ows the ulnar artery into the pal m and is there related to th e
deep v e lar arch Filaments are suppli ed to the deep muscles of the palm and
.
,

three co m m on v olar dig ital n erves ( for th e second third and fourth digits ) are
, ,

al so furnished The c ommon volar nerves foll ow the arteries of the same
.

name and at the distal end of th e metacarpus di vide into th e p rop er digital
, , ,

n erves ( nn digitale s proprii ) for the adj ac ent sides of neighbouring di gits
. .

Diss ection — I t now only remains to examine the variou s j oints of the li mb .

Remove the muscles and remains of fascia e tc and begin the dissec tion , .
,

of the articulations wi th the shoulder j oint -

.

AR TI C U LA TI O HU M E R I — The n ecessity for many or powerful ligaments in

.

c onn ection with the shoulder j oint is obviated by the numerous strong
-

m uscles closely surroundi ng the articulation Indeed there is only a j oin t.

ca ps ule ( capsula articularis ) attached to the marg in of the glenoid c avi ty of the
144 D ISSE CTION OF TH E DOG

proximal row of carpal bones are four ligaments which together close in th e
j oint on all sides and form a capsule .

Liga m e n tum r a dio ca rp e u m -

do rs a le — The dorsal radio carpal ligament is
.
-

thin and membranous and passes from the dorsal asp ec t of the distal end
,

of the radius to the cuneiform and scapho lunar bones -

.

In gam en tum radio — ca rp eum volare — The v e lar radio c arpal ligament dis
'

-
.
,

posed similarly to the dorsal ligament is thick and strong In association ,

.

with it there are t wo definite b ands One runs from the radius to th e .

scapho lunar bone : the other very oblique in dir ection unites the ulna
-
, ,

to th e scapho lunar S mall bundles of fibres also end on the pisiform

-
.

bone .

Ligam entum collatera le ca rp i u lnare — A not very well defined uln ar collateral
.

ligament j o ins the uln a to the cuneiform A few fibres may b e c ontinued to .

the fifth metacarpal b on e .

Ligam en tu m collaterale ca rp i radiale — M uch better marked than th e u lnar .

ligament the radial c ollateral passes from the s tyloid process of th e radi us
,

to the tubercle on the seaph o— lunar .

AR TI C U LA TIO os srs P I SI FOR M IS — The pisiform bone is held in position by

.

fi v e bands which connect it with ( 1 ) the ulna ( 2 ) the scapho lunar ( 3 ) the -

cuneif orm ( ligamentu m piso — hamatu m) ( 4 ) the fifth metacarpal b one

ligamentum piso m e t ac arp eu m ) ; and ( 5 ) th e third and fourth metacarpal
(
-

bones .

I A
L G M ENT A I N T E R C AR P E A —The individual bones of the carpus are j oin ed
.

tog ether by dorsal volar and interosseous in tercarpal ligaments

, ,
.

The dorsal ligam ents ( ligamenta in t erc arp e a dorsali a) are six in nu mber .

One j oins th e scapho l unar and c uneiform and three unite th e members of
-

the di stal row of bones Of th e remainin g two one runs from th e cuneiform
.
,

to the unciform the other from the scaph o lunar to th e trapezoid -

.

The vola r ligam ents ( ligamenta in terc arp ea v olaria) are also six and have
the same c onnections as th e dorsal ligaments excep t that the more medial ,

of the two j oining the two rows of bones passes from th e scapho lunar to the -

magnu m and trapezoid .

The i nterosseo us liga m ents ( ligamenta in terc arp ea interossea ) are c oncerned
with the union of the di ff erent members of the sam e row of bones ; that is th ere ,

are no interosseous ligaments runnin g from one row to the other .

AR TI CULA TION ES CAR P O M E T A C AR P E ZE — The four members of the distal row

-
.

of carpal bones are j oined to the bases of the five metacarpal bones by dorsal
and v e lar ligaments .

The remaining articulations of the manus are similar to the c orresponding

j o ints of the p es .

D iss ectio n — Clean up th e dorsal part of the chest wall and the lumbar
 D ISS E CT ION OF TH E DO G 14 5

region Note the cutaneous branches of the interc ostal nerves an d the
.

vessels accompanyin g them .

The two dorsal serratus muscles demand first attentio n .

M S E R R A T U S D O R S AL IS C R A N I AL IS — The cranial dorsal serratus muscle

. .

sprin gs by a broad thin ap oneurosis from the ligamentu m nuch ae and the
,

spinous processes of the first six or seven thoracic vertebr ae The fibres run .

in a ventral and c audal direc tion to be inserted by digitations into the rib s
from the sec ond e r third to the ninth or tenth
‘

M S E R R A T U S D OR S AL IS C A U D A LI s —The caudal dorsal serratus muscl e

. .

arises from th e dorso lu mbar fascia Its fibres have th e same direc tion as
-
.

those of the internal oblique muscle of th e abdomen with which it appears to .

be continuous The insertion of the muscle is into the last three ribs
. .

D issection — R efl ec t the dorsal serratus muscles .

M L ONGISSI M US D O R SI
. p owerful muscular mass lies in the groov e
, ETC .
—
A
formed by the transv e rse and spinous proc esses of the lumbar vertebr ae On .

a level with the last rib the mass divides into thr ee muscles : ilio c ostal is -
,

longissimus dorsi and spinalis dorsi e t c ervicis

, .

M I LIo C os T A LI s
.
-
The ilio c ostal muscle leaves the c ommon mass abou t
.
- -

t h e last rib and has attachments by independent tendons to the ribs abou t
,

their angles and the transverse processes of the last two or more cervica l
vertebr ae Each tendon passes over one or two ribs before finding insertion
. .

Slips from all the ribs except the first four or five j oin th e muscle as it runs
along the wall of the chest .

M L ON GISSI M U S D OR SI — The fibres of this p owerful muscle arise from th e

. .

ventral surfac e and crest of the ilium and are attached to the transvers e ,

proces ses of the lu mbar thoracic and last c ervic al vertebr a to the spinous
, , ,

processes of the lumbar and thoracic vertebr ae and to the ribs ,

.

M SE M IS P IN ALI S D OR SI E T C E R VI C I S cannot be c ompletely examined at

.

the present time .

Diss ection — Remove the longissimus dorsi muscle In doing s o observe .

,

the muscular branches of the dorsal rami of the interc ostal and lumbar
arteries .

M . M UL TIFI DU S .
—A
series of small muscles larger i n the lumbar than in ,

the thoracic region arise from the sacru m and the articular and transverse
,

processes of the lumbar and thoracic vertebr ae and are i nserted into the ,

spinous proc esses of these vertebr a E ach muscle passes over one spinous .

process before its insertion .

M S U B M U LT IFI D U S —
. In the thoracic region it is customary to find ye t
.

shorter m uscles underneath the m ultifi dus The bundl es of the sub m ultifi dus .

muscl e pass from the transverse process of a vertebra to the spinous process
of th e one imme di ately precedi ng it .
1 46 D ISSE CTION OF TH E DOG

MM L E VA TO R ES C O STAR UM — The levators of the ribs are a series of small

. .
~

muscles arising from the transverse processes of the thoracic vertebr ae The .

fibres of each muscle run in a c audal and ventral direction to be i nserted into
the cranial border of the rib succeeding the vertebra from which they have taken
origin .

D iss ection — The muscles of the tail should now b e cleaned and exami ned .

MM . S ACR O C O CCY G EUS D OR S AL ES — The dorsal sacro c occygeal muscles are

-
.
-

two in number a medi al and a lateral The medial muscle arises fro m the
,
.

spinous processes of the lumbar sacral and first c occygeal vertebr ae and i s , , ,

inserted into the dorsal surface of the c occygeal vertebr a .

The lateral muscle springs from the articular processes of the last thr ee
lumbar and all the sacral vertebr a and from the transverse process of the first ,

coccygeal vertebra Rounded tendons pass over several vertebr a and are
.

inserted into the dorsal aspect of all the bones of the tail .

M S ACR O C O CCY G EUS A c C E S S O R I U s — The acc essory sacro —

.
-
c occygeal muscle.

may possibly represent the intertransverse muscles of other regions I t is .

a rounded muscle lateral in position to the prec eding and with origin from the
dorsal border of the ilium the lateral b order of the sacrum and the transverse
, ,

process of the first c occygeal vertebra The insertion is into the side of the .

tail vertebr ae .

M C O CCY G EUS —
. The c occygeal muscle has already been examined
. .

MM S ACR O C O CCY GEUS V ENT R AL E S — A S on the dorsal so on the ventral

.
-
.
,

side of th e tail there are medial and lateral muscles

, .

The lateral ventral sacro —coccygeal muscle arises from the ventral face of
the last lumb ar vertebra the sacrum and the transverse processes of coccygeal
, ,

vertebr a By long tendons the muscle is inserted i nto the ventral surfac e
.

of the bones of the tail .

The medi al muscle springs from the ventral surface of the sacrum and the
first coccygeal vertebra and is inserted into the c orresponding aspec t of the tail
,

vertebr ae .

D issectio n — R e fl ec t the ski n from the ventral side of the nec k and th e
mandibular region Secure the previously detached manubrium of the
.

sternum and the first costal cartilage so as to keep the ventral cervical ,

muscles on the stretch Then clean up the external j ugular vein on the
.

side from which the limb has b een removed .

V . J U GU LAR IS E X TE R N A — The external j ugular

much larger than the
.
,

i nternal vessel of the same name is the main vein of the neck Formed at the
, .

aboral border of the submaxillary gland by the union of the external and i nternal
148 D ISSE CT ION OF TH E D O G

The lingual vein appears i n the angle formed by the borders of the mylo
hyoid and digastric muscles and is at onc e j o ined by a transverse vessel which
,

passes ac ross from one li ngual vein to the other .

A group of lymph — glands ( lymph e glandul a sub m ax illares) are present -

about the point of j unction of the facial vein and the c ommon trunk of the
lingual and sub li ngual veins .

V M AX I LLAR IS INTE R N A — The internal maxi llary vein is formed under

. .

c over of th e parotid gland and is onl y vi sible at the present stage of the
, ,

di ssection as it ru ns along the ab oral b order of the sub maxillary gland to uni te
,

wi th the external maxil lary vein .

D iss ection — Cut across the sterno —c ephalic muscle a little di stanc e fr om
its sternal attachment and turn it aside This will p ermit of the demon .

s tr atio n of the c ommon carotid artery the internal j ugular vein the , ,

vagus and sympathetic nerves as well as certai n muscles ,

.

M . S T ER N o -
H Y OI D E U S — The sterno hyoid muscles of Opposite sides of the
.
-

neck li e in c ontac t with each other in the middl e line Each takes origin from .

the manubrium of the sternu m and is inserted into the body of the hyoid bone .

M S TE R N o T HYR E O I D E U S — In the region of the sternu m the sterno thyroid

.
-
.
-

muscle is almost c ompletely c overed by the precedi ng b ut owing to a di ver ,

genc e of the two sterno thyroid muscles they are exposed more and more i n
-

their c ourse to the larynx .

The sterno thyr oid muscle h as origin from the manubriu m of the sternu m
-

and from the first c ostal cartilage and is inserted i nto the ab oral border of ,

the thyroid cartilage about its middl e .

It should be noted that a short distanc e fro m their orig ins th e abov e
, ,

muscles are crossed transversely by a tendin ous in tersection and that at th is

line the two muscles of the same side of the neck are intimately c onnec ted
with each other .

The nerve supply of the sterno hyoid and sterno thyroid muscles is largely - -

from the ventral divi sion of th e first cervical nerve but with th is the descendin g
branch of the hyp oglossal nerve is blended The c omposite nerve will be found .

along the lateral b order of the muscles .

V J U GU LA R Is I NTE R N A The internal j ugular vein is a vessel of small and

. .
-

variable size ly ing in the main lateral to th e c ommon carotid artery Not
, ,
.

only does the size of th e vein vary in di fferent animals but th e two vessel s of ,

th e same animal are not necessarily of the same calibre The origin of th e .

internal j ugular may be traced to the occipital and cerebral ve ins .

A cc omp anying th e c ommon carotid artery th e vein is c lose t o th e trache a ,

on th e right side of the neck and to th e oesophagus on th e left It e nds by

,
.

j o ining either th e i n n om inate vein or th e external j ugular of its own side .

Th e internal j ugular receiv e s th e cranial and c audal thyroid musc ular trach eal , , ,

and oesophageal veins .

 D ISSE CTION OF TH E D O G 1 49

A CA R OTI S C O M M U NI S — The two c ommon c arotid arteries leave th e brachio

. .

c ephalic at no very great distanc e from each other The right artery runs .

obliquely lat eralwards across the ventral surfac e of the trachea and then ,

along the lat eral face of this tub e T he left artery has a similar relation to
.

the trachea ab out the thoracic inl et b u t i n the neck it is in c ontac t with the
,

oesophagus Each artery is i n relation dorso laterally with the c ombined -

.

trunk of the vagus and sympathetic nerves .

On a level with the wing of the atlas the c ommon carotid artery divides
i nto external and i nternal carotid and occipital arteries The c ollateral .

branches of the artery are : ( 1 ) Th e caudal thyroida rtery ( a thyreoidea c audalis ) .

,

a small vessel arising at the entranc e to th e ch es t and acc ompanying th e

rec urrent nerve up th e nec k to end in th e thyroid gland ; ( 2 ) th e cran ial
th yroid a r tery ( a thyreoidea crania lis ) an artery of som e size supply ing the
.
,

thyr oid gland and c ontrib uting the as cen ding ph aryn geal artery ( a pharyngea .

asc endens ) m uscular ( rami musc ulares ) and glan dular ( rami glandulares to
,

the sub maxillary gland ) branches ; ( 3 ) the laryn gea l artery ( a laryngea ) a .
,

small vessel ram ifyin g in the larynx .

N VA G U S E T T RU N C U S S Y M PA THI CU S —
. T h e thick nerve c ord lying dorsal
.

and lateral to the c ommon carotid arter y is formed on a level with th e wing
of th e atlas by the union of the vagus nerve and the cervic al cord of the
sympathetic These are b ound together by strong c onnective tissu e
. .

N R E C UR R ENS — The recurrent nerve a branch of the vagus already

. .
,

enc ountered in th e chest follows the lateral asp ec t of th e trachea and ends in
,

the larynx In the neck th e nerve supplies branches to the trachea and oeso
.

ph ag u s ( rami tracheales et oesophagei ) .

M M Y Lo H Y OI D E U S — Lying in th e spac e between the two halves of th e

.
-
.

mandi ble the mylo —

,
hyoid is a flat broad thin muscle c omposed of transvers e
, ,

fibres arising from th e m ylo hyoid lin e clos e to the alveolar b order of the
‘
-

mandi ble The fibres j oin a raphe in the middle lin e as well as th e s y mphysis
.
,

of the man di ble and th e body of the hyoid b one .

D issection — Turn the manubriu m of the sternu m with the muscles attached ,

thereto as far as p ossible towards the h ead and so exp ose the trachea
, ,

and oesophagus .

TR AC HE A — The trachea is an almost cylindrical tub e exten din g from the

.

larynx to a p oint opposite the fourth rib where it di vides into the two bronchi , .

T h e lumen of the tub e is not qui te uniform on acc ount of a certain amount of
narrowin g from the larynx to the thoracic entranc e Nor is the trachea ab s o .

lut ely in the middle li ne sin c e there is some degree of inclination towards the
right A t its c ommencement the windpip e is in c ontac t dorsally wi th the
.

oesophagus but later this relation is exchanged for one with the longus c oll i
,

muscle .

The skeleton of th e trachea c onsists of a variable nu mber ( th irty fi v e to forty ) -

L 3
1 50 D ISSE CTION OF THE DO G

of in c omplete rings of c artilage ( cartilagines tracheales ) j oined together by

membranous annular ligaments ( ligamenta annularia ) The interruption in .

the c ontinuity of each ring is placed at the dorsal part of the tube where ,

transverse muscular fibres occur The interior of the trachea is lined by a .

mucous membrane .

( E SO P H A GUS — The oesophagus is that part of the ali mentary canal which
.

intervenes b etween the pharynx and the stomach For descriptive purp oses .

i t is di vided into cervical thoracic and abdomin al parts ( pars c ervicalis pars
, , ,

th orac alis e t pars abdom inalis )

,
In th e earli er dissections the thoracic and
.

abdominal parts have been exposed and examined .

The cer v ical part is at first in the middle l ine and im mediately dorsal to
the trachea but an inclin ation towards the left soon bec omes noticeable A t
,
.

the entranc e to the chest the oesoph agus may b e at a level even ventral to that
of the trachea .

GL A N DULA TH Y R E OI D E A — One of the ductless glands the thyroid c onsists

.
,

of two la teral lobes c onnected ventral to the trache a by an isth m us of variabl e

dimensions Frequently th e isthmus is absent ; but when p resent it c onnects
.
,

the more caudal part of the two lateral lobes Each lobe is elongated with .
,

narrow oral and aboral extremities and lies on the lateral face of the trachea ,

immedi ately ab oral to the laryn x ( over six or seven tracheal rings ) The .

late ra l surface of each lobe is c overed by the stern o cepha lic muscle and its -

ventral border is in c ontac t wi th the sterno thyroid muscle -

.

I n association wi th the thyroid gland are two or more small parathyro ids .

Dissection — Remove the ski n from the ear and the parotid region . Clean
up the auric ular nerves vessels and muscles , ,
.

AUR IS E X TE R N A — Before c ommencing the di ssection of the muscles of th e

.

external ear it is necessary to have some knowledge of the c artilages to which

,

they are attached .

The cartilages of the external ear are thre e i n number — c onchal scutiform , ,

and annular The con chal ca rtilag e or auricula is the largest and forms the
.
,

proj ec ting c onspicu ous part of the ear Its form varies greatly with the
, .

breed of the dog b ut generally speaking it may be said to have a funnel like or
, ,
-

trumpet shaped outline The wide free part of the cart ilage has two borders
-
.

cra ni al and caudal — meeting at the tip of the ear A t the base of the cra ni a l .

border is an irregular proj ec tion known as the h elix A t the lateral part of the .

narrow basal p ortion of the cartilage is a curved plate like proj ection the
, ,
-
,

trag us and immedi ately caudal t o this an irregular process the a nti tragus ,
-
.

The scutif orm cartilag e is in the form of a plate of irregular out line and lies ,

on the temporal muscle oral to the base of the c onchal cartilage .

The an n ula r cartilage as its name implies is ring like in form and is adherent
, ,
-
,

to t h e margin of the external acoustic meatus of the temporal b one .

152 D ISSE CTION OF T HE D O G

M . trag ic us latera lis

springs from the border of the mandi bl e between the
c ondyloid and angular processes .

M trag ic us m edialis j oins the tragus to the base of the conchal cartilage
. .

M HE LI C IS j oins helix and antitragus

. .

M TR A N S V E R S U S A U R I CU L ZE —
. The transverse muscle is a band of fibres
.

lying on the c onchal cartilage close to the insertion of the long levator .

M A NTITR A GI CU S c onsists of a few fibres plac ed imme di ately aboral to the

.

att ac hment of the inferior auricular muscle and runs from the tragus to th e ,

antitragus .

A AUR I C U LAR IS P O STE R IO R

. The main artery of the external ear is the
.
-

posterior auricul ar a branch of the external c arotid Commencing on a level

, .

with the hyoid bone this artery runs to the base of the ear u nderneath th e
,

parotid gland and is di stributed to the ab oral and medi al p ortions of the ear
,
.

A A UR I C U LAR IS A NTE R IO R — The anterior aur ic ular artery is a branch of th e

. .

superficial temporal from whi ch i t is derived on a level with the zygoma The .

vessel r am ifi es over the oral and m edi al parts of the external ear .

N A U R I CULAR IS P o sTER I oR —
. The p osterior aur icular nerve leaves th e
.

seventh cerebral nerve under the parotid gland and divides into branches which
follow those of the p osterior auricular artery .

N A UR I CULAR IS I NTE R N US — Also a branch of the seventh cerebral nerve

. .
,

th e in ternal auricular pierces the deep lateral p art of the c onch al cartilage in
the in terior of which it is distributed .

The temporal di vi sion of the auriculo palpebral branch of the seventh nerve
-

supplies the oral part of the ear .

The auricular branch of th e second c ervical nerve is di stributed over th e

lateral and aboral part of the ear and th e occipital branch of th e first cervi cal
nerve spreads out over the medial surface .

M O c c I P I T ALI s — A lthough not belonging to the ear th e occipital muscle

. .
,

may b e exami ned at this stage of the dissection Th e muscle is a narrow .

,

thin band runn ing longitudi nally from the superior nuchal line of the occipital
b one and the sagittal crest of th e parietal into the fascia which is blended with
the p eriosteu m of the frontal bone .

The muscles of the dorsal part of the neck must now be examined .

M S PL ENI U S —
. The splenius muscle is triangular with its apex caudal and
.
,

its base at the occipital bone The orig in of the muscle extends as far caudal as
.

the fif th or sixth thoracic spinous process and is c ontinued along the middle ,

dorsal lin e throughout the cervical region A t fi rst the orig in is aponeurotic
. ,

b ut from the first or sec ond thoracic spin e onwards it is fleshy The insertion .

of th e muscle is into the occipital bone and mastoid p art of the temporal bone .

A bout the level of the atlas the fibres of the splenius are closely connected
w ith the tendon of the longissimus capitis muscle .
 D ISSE CTION OF TH E D O G 15 3

M L ON GIS SI M U S C E R VI C IS — This muscle is immediately ventral to th e

. .

splenius and intimately c onnected with the longissimus dorsi With an

, .

orig in from the transverse processes of the first five or S IX thoracic vertebr a its ,

insertion is int o the transverse processes of the last four or five cervical vertebr a .

D iss ection — R e fl ec t the splenius by cutting through the entir e length of

.

i ts origin Observe the branches of th e c ervical nerves Then reflec t

. .

th e longissimus cervicis by a transverse inc ision ab out the middle of the

muscle .

M .L ON GISSI M U S CAP ITIS E T A T LA N T I s — These two muscles are readi ly .

separated bu t are better c onsidered together The longissim us cap itis muscle
,
.

arises from th e transverse processes of three or four thoracic vertebr a and

from th e last thre e or four cervical articular p rocesses By union with the .

splenius the muscle obtains an insertion into the mastoid part of the temp oral
b one.

Th e long issim us atlantis is a very much s maller muscle than th e prece ding ,

and p as ses from the thir d fourth fifth and sixth cervical articular processes
, , ,

to the wing of the atlas .

M S E MI S P IN AL IS C AP I TI s —
. D orsal and medial to the preceding in position
. ,

the semi sp inalis muscle of the head consists of two parts —m biventer c ervici s .

and m comp lexus The former is readily distinguished by the presenc e of four
. .

obli que ten di nous intersections This muscle arises from the Spinou s proc esses
.

of the sec ond to the fo u rth or fifth and fro m the transverse processes of th e,

fourth fifth and sixth thoracic vertebr a as well as from th e li gamentu m nuch a
, , ,
.

The complexus muscl e has its origin from the transverse processes of the first
two or thr ee thoracic vertebr a and from the articular processes of the last five
,

c e rvical vertebr ae .

The two parts of the s em isp in ah s muscle may or may not j oin about the
level of the atlas In any case they are in serted into the occipital b one
. .

Two branches of th e sec ond c ervical nerve are associated with the biventer
cervicis muscle A larg e branch pierces the muscle close to its insertion and
.

proceeds to the ear A much smaller nerve either pierc es the m uscle close
.

to th e middle li ne or appears between the muscle and the ligamentum nuch a

, ,

and ram ifi es in the skin medial to the base of th e ear .

D issection — Cut across the c omplexus muscle on a level with th e j o int

b etween the atlas and th e epistropheus Free the biventer c ervicis muscl e .

fro m its orig in and turn it towards th e h ead In reflecting these two .

muscles the large dorsal primary divisions of th e cervical nerves will b e

observed b etween the c omplexus and m u ltifi dus muscles .

M SE MI S P IN ALI S D OR SI
.
— This muscle as has previously
ET C ER VI CI s .
,

been n oted is c ontinuous with th e longis simus dorsi It receives a bun dl e of

,
.
154 D ISS E CT ION OF THE DOG

fibres from the first thora cic vertebra and is attached to th e articular and ,

spinous processes of the last six cervical vertebr a .

M M U L TIFI D US C E R VICIs — The m ultifi dus of the neck is a continuation of

. .

the a lready exam in ed m ultifidus muscle of the back bu t is much better ,

.

developed In position lateral to the semisp inalis and underneath the c om

.

plexus the muscle c onsists of four or five bundles which run from the articular
,

processes of the las t four or five cervical vertebr a to the spinous processes of
the second third fourth and fif th vertebr a of the neck
, , ,
.

The dorsal divisions of the c ervical nerves appear at the lateral border of
the muscle and lie on its sup erficial surfac e .

MM INTE R TR A N S V E R S AR II — The intertransverse muscles of the neck are

.
-
.

double with the ventral primary divisions of the cervical nerves pass ing
,

between the ir dorsal and ventral portions .

LIG A M ENTUM N U C H ZE — The ligament of th e nape of the neck is in the form

.

of a flattened elastic c ord extendin g from the sp inous process of the epi
,

s t r oph e us to the tip of the sp inous process of the fir st thoracic vertebra where ,

it is c ontinuous with the supraspin ous ligament By careful examin ation the .
,

dissec tor can satisfy himself that the ligament consists of righ t and left halves .

Immediately behind the occ ipital bone there is a group of muscles the ,

straight and ob lique muscles of the head which connects th e atlas and epi ,

s troph eu s to the skull Th e occipital nerve ( a branch of the sec ond cervical
.

nerve ) and branches of the occipital vessels cross the muscles superficially .

M R E C I U S CAP ITIS D O R S AL IS M A JO R — The larger dorsal straight muscle

. .

of the head is flat and in contac t with its fellow of the opposite side With .

an origin from the spinou s process and possibly also from the adj acent part
of the caudal articular process of the epistropheu s or sec ond c ervical vertebra .

its insertion is into the occipital b one immediately ventral to the insertion of
the se mi spinalis capitis .

A separab le part of the muscle ( m rectus capitis dorsah s medi us ) arises

.

from the oral extremity of the spinous process of the sec ond c ervical vertebra .

D iss ection — B e fl ec t the rectu s capitis dorsalis maj or muscle .

M RE C T U S CAP ITIS D O R S AL IS
.
M IN Q R .
—
This is a small muscle passing from
the oral border of the dorsal arch of the atlas to the occipital bone .

M OB L I QU US CAP ITIS CAUDAL IS — O i the two oblique m uscles of the head

.
.

th e more caudal is the larger A powerful muscle springing from the whole
.

of the spinous process of th e epistropheus its fibres run ob liquely oral and ,

lateral to b e inserted into the wing of t h e atlas

i

M OB L I Q U U S CA P ITIS C R A N I A LIs —Smaller than the prece di ng thi s muscle

.
.
,

arises from the oral and l ateral border of the wing of the atlas runs obliquely ,

orally and medi ally and i s inserted into the mastoid process of the tempora l
,

bone .
1 56 D ISSE CTION OF TH E D O G

piece of c artilage ( c ar tilag e palpebr a terti a ) which will b e e xamined along wi th

t h e other c ontents of the orbit .

D issectio n — Remove the skin from the face and proceed to exami ne the
underlying muscles The nerves and vessels of the fac e must be carefull y
.

preserved .

M Z Y G O M A TI CU S — A narrow band like muscle arising from the scutiform

-
. .
,

c artil age of the ear the zygomatic crosses the face obli quely and is inserted
,

at the angle of the mouth .

M R I sO R I U S — The risorius muscl e is m erely that portion of the cutaneo us

. .

m usc le of the fac e which lies i n the region of the angle of the mouth and i s
inserted close to the termination of the zygomatic muscle .

M QUAD R A TUS LA BII S uP E R I oR rs — Covering the side of the nose th e

.
.
,

quadr ate muscle is di vi sible into three parts : ( 1 ) M n aso labialis with fibres .
,

arising from the maxillary and frontal b ones l n the neighbourhood of the me di al
c ommissure of the eye and from the f1 ontal fascia to end i n the substance of
, ,

the uppe1 lip ( 2 ) m m alaris thin and c onnected wi th the foregoing at i ts

.
,

origin where it blends also with the orbicular muscle of the eye and c onfused
, ,

with the buccinator muscle at i ts insertion ; ( 3 ) m levator labii s up erioris .

r opr ius with an origin from the maxillary b one in the region of the infra
p ,

orbital foramen and an insertion about the nostril

,
.

M CAN IN U S — V entral to the proper l evator of the upper lip in position

. .
,

the canin e muscl e arises close to the infraorbital foramen and from the can in e
fossa of the maxillary bone Its in sertion is in to the upper lip . .

M B UCC IN A TOR —The buccinator muscl e consists of two strata : ( 1 ) Th e

. .

more superficial stratu m contains fibres running ob liquely from the alveolar
border of the maxilla to the lateral fac e of the mandible ( 2 ) the deeper fibres
run obliquely down wards and forwards from the maxilla on a level with the l ast
two or three cheek — teeth to the lateral face of the man di ble .

M OR BI C U LAR IS O R I s —A sphincter m usc le c ontained in the lips the

. .
,

orbicular muscle of the mouth provides a means by which the lips are ,

approximated and the entranc e to th e mouth is closed .

MM IN C ISI V I LA BII SU P E R IO R IS E T INFE R IO R IS — The upper and lower

. .

incisive muscles are best demonstrated by removing the muc ous membrane
from th e in side of the lips In dissec ting th e upper incisive muscle of each sid e
.

a large branch of the infraorbital nerve is exposed .

The muscles consist of bundles of fibres passing into the lips from the
incisive bone and the mandible 0 11 a level with the sec ond and thir d incisor
and the canine teeth .

M M A SSETE R — Tll e masseter muscle is powerful and lies over the mandible
. .

ven tral to the zygomatic arch A c omplete examination should be postponed

. .

GLA N D U LA PA R OTIS — The parotid gland of the dog is relatively small

. .
 D ISSE CTION OF TH E D O G 15 7

Irregularly triangular in ou t line with a base notched and embrac ing the ,

auricle and an apex overlying the submaxillary gland it is lodged in a depression ,

b ounded by the base of the external ear th e masseter muscle and the wing , ,

of the atlas Th e lateral s urface of the gland is c overed by the cutaneous and
.

inferior auricular muscles ; while its deep or medial surfac e c overs the facial
n erve the internal maxillary vein th e base of th e external c ar part of the
, , ,

digastric muscl e and part of the sub maxillary gland T h e great auricular
,
.

vein runs along its ab oral b order .

n . e ur ic ulo-p alp ebrali s .

R e mus zyg omat i cus

l

n . lacri mal is

n .
f rontalis

m orbicularis ocul i
-
.

n . zyg omaticus

ule ris p oster ior

Gle nda le p aroti s

m masseter
.

Gle nda le submaxi llaris

Q
v . maxillaris interna

I
I
I
v j ug ularis externe
b uccalis dorsalis
1
l
.

n .
I

’
a . ct v. f aciali s

Duaus p arotide us
' '
l
ventralis
l
n . bu ccal is Il
r
Lymp h o glanduloe
-

v me xillaris externa
.

R e mus colli

FI G . 56 .
—Superfi c ial dissec tion of th e f ac e .

Commencing at th e oral border and close to the apex of the gland an d ,

formed by the union of a number of smaller ducts the pa rotid duct ( duc tus ,

parotideus [ Sten on is] ) crosses the s urfac e of the masseter muscle pierces the ,

cheek and op ens into the mouth on a level with the thir d maxillary premolar
,

tooth .

The nerves of the face are derived from two sources namely the fifth and ,

th e seventh cerebral nerves .

N E R VU S F AC I AL IS — The facial or seventh cerebral nerve ac quires a super

.
,

fi c ial p osition by emerging between the b order of the man di ble and the parotid
158 D ISSE CTI ON OF TH E D O G

gland . The following are its superficial branches ( 1 ) The auriculo— pa lp ebral
n erve ( n auriculo palpebralis ) which di vides into a temporal ramus ( ramus
.
-

temporalis ) supplyin g the front part of the ear and a zygomatic ramus ( ramus
, ,

zygomaticus ) The latter crosses the zygomatic arch furnishes twigs to both
.
,

eyelids and ends on the side of the nose where it arrives by curving round the
, ,

me di al side of the eye ( 2) The dorsal buccal n erve ( n b uccalis dorsalis ) crosses
. .

the surfac e of the masseter muscle and ends in the upper hp ; while ( 3 ) the
ventra l bucca l n erve ( n buccalis ventralis ) follows the ventral border of the
.

muscle and ends in the lower lip A c onsiderable amount of in t erc om m u n i c a .

tion takes place between branches of the two buccal nerves ( 4 ) The s mallest .

superficial branch of the facial nerve — the cervica l bran ch ( ramus c olli ) — pierc es
the parotid gland and j oin s the superficial c ervical branch of the second spinal
nerve .

N TR IGE MI NUS —The trigemin al or fif th cerebral nerve has not long left
. .
, ,

th e brain b efore it divides into three parts —the ophthal mi c maxillary and , ,

mandibular nerves — all of which supply b ranches which should be sought at

t his stage of the dissec tion .

N O ph th alm icus — Two branches of the ophthalmic nerve become superficial

. .

about the eye ( 1 ) The f rontal n erve ( n frontalis ) leaves the orbit by bending .

ro un d the orbital band— a fibrous c ord stretching from the zygomatic to the
frontal bone— and is exp ended in th e upper eyelid and its neighbourhood ,

wh ere it assists in the formation of the anterior auricular plexus ; ( 2 ) the

i nf ratroch lea r n erve ( n infratrochlearis ) appears medial to the eye
. .

N m ax illaris — The maxillary nerve furnishes fo ur branches — two small

. .

and two large — to the fac e : ( 1 ) The lach ryma l n erve ( n lac rim ah s) leaves the .

orbit lateral to the p oin t of exit of the frontal nerve and plays a part in the ,

formation of the anterior auricular plexus ( 2 ) the z ygom atic n erve ( n zygoma .

t ic us ) is quite small emerges from the orbit close to the lateral c ommi ssure of
,

the eyelids and ends ma inly in the lower eyeh d ( 3) the two large i nf raorbital
n erves ( nn infraorbitales leave the foramen of that name and spread out in the
.
)
substance of the upper lip and nose They will receive fur ther attention at a .

later stage .

N ma ndibu la ris — The mandi bular nerve c ontributes t hree branches to the
. .

face ( 1 ) The s up erfi cial tem pora l n erve ( n temporali s sup erfi c ialis) bends round .

the b order of the m andible and divides i nto auricular and temporal
branches ; ( 2 ) the m ental n erve ( n mentalis ) leaves the foramen of the same .

name and supplies the lower h p ; ( 3) the bucc ina tor n erve ( n bucc inatorius ) .

becomes visible at the oral border of the masseter musc le and ends in the cheek
and lower lip some of its branches j oin ing the plexus formed by the bucc al
,

nerves derived from the seventh c erebral nerve .

A F AC I ALI S —The facial artery will be found in a groove b oun ded by the
. .

mass eter and digastric muscles Its branches are the inf erior labial artery .

( a labialis i nferior ) the ang ula r artery of th e mouth ( a angularis oris ) and the
.
,
.
,
1 60 D ISS E CTION OF TH E D O G

attached to the margins of the temporal fossa and particularly t hi ck ,

at its attachment to the zygomatic arch M ake an incision along the .

border of the arch and turn the fascia upwards In doing thi s some
,
.
,

fibres of the muscle which arise from the deep fa ce of the fascia wi ll
have to be di vi ded The fascia shoul d b e removed c ompletely The
. .

superficial temp oral vessels will be exposed in the process .

IVith bone forceps sni p through the zygomatic arch cl ose to the man di bular
articulation and at its other end as close as possible to the orbit The
,
.

piece of bone wi th the remains of the masseter muscle attached th ereto

, ,

must be removed .

M TE MP O R ALIS —The powerful temporal muscle mi xed with much ten

. .
~

din ou s tissue arises from the whole of the temp oral fossa w hi ch it fills
, ,

c ompletely In ad di tion to the bony origin some fibres spring from th e orbital
.
,

band and the temporal fascia .

The inserti on of the muscle into the coronoid process of the mandible is
rendered somewhat indefi ni te by c onfusion wi th the masseter .

A TE M P O R AL IS S UP E R FI C IAL IS —
. The superficial temporal artery is one of
.

the two termi nal branches of the external carotid Cross ing the aboral end .

of the zygomatic process of the temp oral bone it pierces the temporal fascia ,

and runs towards the frontal bone approximately parallel t o the zygomatic
arch and i n close relationship wi th the temp oral muscle Terminal twigs .

supply the frontal region and b oth eyelids .

The c oll ateral branches of the artery are as foll ows : ( 1 ) T ra n svers e
f ac ial artery ( a transversa faciei ) a s mall vessel already enc ountered on the
.
,

surfac e of the masseter muscle ; ( 2 ) an terior a uricula r artery ( a auriculari s .

anterior ) leavi ng the parent vessel as this crosses the zygomatic arch and
, ,

termi nating in the muscles and skin over the me di al and oral parts of the
external ear ( 3 ) in addi tio n there are small branches which end in the parotid
,

gland the masseter and other muscles and the ski n

, , .

V TE M P O R AL IS S UP E R FI C I AL IS — The superficial temporal vein is arranged

. .

i n c onf ormity with the artery .

D issection —The following dissec tion must be performed on one side of

the head o nl y Wit 11 a saw or b one forceps separate the c oronoid
.
- -

process from the rest of the mandible and then cu t through the bone on ,

a level with the first premolar tooth Liberate the insertion of the .

di gastric muscle from the bone and carefully pass the kni fe through ,

the muscles etc attached to the medi al surface of the man di ble keepin g
,
.
, ,

the edge of the knife as close to the bone as p ossible D isartic ulate .

the mandi bular j oint bearing in mind the close relations hi p which exists
,

between the j oint and the i nternal maxillary artery Remove th e .

piece of mandible which the foregoing operations have isolated .

This dissection involves the partial destruc tion of the pterygoid muscles and
 D ISSE CTION OF THE D O G 16 1

the i nferior alveolar vessels and nerve b ut the dissector will have an
opport uni ty later of exami ni ng these on the other side of the head .

Note the presenc e of the mylo hyoid nerve— a branch of the man di bular -

nerve— and the su b h ng ual vessels .

Now turn the mylo hyoid muscle downwards as far as p ossible-

.

GLAN DULA S UB M AXI LLAR IS — The sub maxill ary gland is a rounded yell ow .
,

ish obj ect placed between the digastric muscle and the wi ng of the atlas
,

on a level s lightly deeper than that of the parotid gland Whi le b eing the .

least di stinctly lobulated of all the salivary glands the sub maxill ary i n , ,

consequence of a strong fibrous capsule is th e most defin i te in form , .

In c ontac t with the lateral surface of the gland are the narrow ventral ,

end of the parotid the inferior auric ul ar and cutaneous muscles the c ervi cal
, ,

branch of the facial nerve and the sup erficial branch of the second sp inal nerve
,
.

Thi s surfac e moreover is not i nf requently traversed by a shall ow groove in

, ,

whi ch the internal maxill ary vein is lodged The medi al s urfac e is moulded .

up on the sterno c eph ah c and di gastric muscles

-
.

Th e subm ax i llary duct ( ductus sub max ill aris [ Wh ar t oni]) leav es th e medi al
'

surfac e of the gland and crosses the surface of the di gastric muscl e under
cover of the sublingual gland Then acc ompanying the larger sub h n gu al duc t .
,

over the styl e glossal muscle it finally O pens into the mouth on a p oorly
-

marked elevation— the sublin gual carun cle ( caruncu la su b h n g uah s) —b y the
side of the fr a n ulum of the tongue .

GLA N DULA SUB LIN G UAL IS — The su bh ng ual gland is el ongated narrow .
, ,

reddi sh in hu e an d stretches from the submaxill ary gland with whi ch it

, ,

is in intimate c ontact to ab out the l evel of the third premolar tooth Two
,
.

parts are readil y di stinguished : ( 1 ) a larger t hi cker aboral p ortion ; and ( 2 ) ,

a much s mall er thi n and narrow oral part

, ,
.

The ab oral p ortion ( gl sub h n g uah s gran di c an alaris) hes b etween the
.

digastric p terygoid and masseter muscles and a p art of the mandi ble
, ,
Its .

duct ( ductus subh ng u ah s maj or ) runs along the surface of th e stylo glossal ‘

muscle in c ompany wi th and somewhat dorsal to the sub maxill ary duct
. ,

in c ommon with whi ch it opens into th e mouth .

The feebly develop ed oral portion of the subhn g u al gland (gl subh n g uahs .

a r ic an alaris) hes b etween the mylo hyoid muscl e and the muc ous membrane
p v
-

of the mouth and is occasionall y slightly overlapped by the ab oral p ortion

, ,

from whi ch it can o nl y b e di stinguished by its sh gh tly paler colour Th e .

lingual nerve crosses the lateral surface of thi s part of the subh ng ual gland
obh q u ely . There are several ( eight to twelve ) small er subh ng ual ducts ( ductus
subh ng u ale s m inores ) .

D iss ecti on — Remove the sub max ill ary and sub h n g ual glands and clean
the muscles vessels and nerves on the side of the tongue pharynx and
, , , ,

larynx .
 1 62
. D ISSE CTI ON OF TH E DOG

M D IG A STR I CU S — Inasmuch as this muscle has only one fleshy belly

. .

i n the dog the name di gastric is apt to mislead The strong muscle arises
,
.

from the j ugular process of the occipital bone and is inserted into the medial ,

surfac e and ventral border of the mandi ble .

M S T Y Lo H Y OI D EUS —A thi n and narrow fleshy slip crosses the sur face of
.
-
.

the digastric muscle This is th e styl e hyoid muscle which has an attenuated
.
-

n . Ii ng ue lis

a ! a . temp oralis s up er fiCi alis

e . a ur i c ular is p oster i or

cra ni alis
m g em o glossas
.
-

'
ng ens
n.
g eni o
-
h yoideus

m mylo h yoi deus

.
-

1
Gle nda le
m b ye g losse s -

t th yreoz dea
.
,
a
1
n .
g losso p h ary ng eus
-
c

m .
p h aryng e u
cere to- s
a maxi llar is ex ter na
.
i
f
m . cli ondr o-
p h aryng eus l
I

m. h yO Ulyr eoide us
-
n recurrens
.

m ster no h yoideu s
.
-
/
l

m . ster no-th /reoide us

z

FI G . 57 .
—D isse c tion of th e t ong ue , ph aryn x , etc .

tendinous origi n fr om the poi nt of u ni o n of the stylo hyal with the temporal -

bone and an insertion i nto the body of the hyoid bo ne

, .

M S T Y Lo GLO S SU S — Long and flat in form the styl e glossal muscle will
.
-
.
,
-

be found medi al to the di gastric muscle and along the side of the tongu e .

A rising from the stylo hyal bone its fibres are lost in the substance of the tongue
-

M G ENIO GLO S S U S —The right and left geni e glo ssal muscles are i n c on
.
,

-
-
. .

tac t with each other in the me di an pl ane of the head The ventral border .

of each muscle extends from the symphysis of the mandi ble to the body of
the hyoid bone and from i t the fibres radi ate i nto the substance of the tongue
, .
1 64 D ISS E CTION OF TH E DO G

A CAR OTIS E X TE R N A — The external carotid artery c ontinu es the direction

. .

of the c ommon carotid for a short distance along the side of the pharynx and ,

then forms a curve round the medial and oral sides of the di gastric and between ,

this and the styl e glossal muscle The curve brings the artery to a more super
-
.

fi c ial level and it ends j ust aboral to the post —

,
glenoid process of the temporal
bone by dividi ng into the superficial temporal and internal maxillary arteries .

A t no great distance from its c ommenc ement the external c arotid artery is ,

crossed laterally by the hyp oglossal nerve Its c ollateral branches are the .

lingual external maxillary and posterior auricular arteries

, ,
.

A L INGUAL IS — The l ingual artery leaves th e external c arotid ab out the

. .

aboral border of the digastric muscle and pursues a c ourse towards the side of
th e tongue being accompanied by the hyp oglossal n erve as far as the b order of
,

the hyo glossal muscle Af ter cross ing the medial face of this muscle it enters
-
.
,

th e tongue in company with its satellite vein and the hyp oglossal nerve In .

order that the full course of the artery may b e satisfactorily demonstrated it ,

is well to reflec t the hyo — glossal muscle Th e terminal branches of the artery .

are lost in th e substanc e of the tongue One collateral branch — the hyoid
—
.

bra n ch ( ramus hyoideus ) should be n oted as arisin g where the l ingual artery
crosses the hyoid bone and term inat ing in the basal part of the tongue Th e
,
.

largest twig of the hyoid branch follows the geni e — hyoid muscl e towards the
tip of the tongu e .

It will b e observed that the lingual vein ceases to accompany the artery
abou t the aboral border of the hyo — glossal muscle and becomes superfic ial in ,

order to flow into the external maxillary vein .

A M AX I LLAR IS E X TE R N A — A S the external carotid artery crosses the hyoid

. .

b one and as it lies between the digastric and styl e glossal muscles it gives
,
-
,
‘

o rig in to the external maxillary artery Travelling along the dorsal and medial
.

b order of the digastric muscle this vessel reaches th e groove between the ,

masseter and digastric muscl es at the ventral border of the mandible and here ,

becomes the fac ial artery the course of which has already been traced
,
.

The collateral branches of the external maxillary artery are ( 1 ) Arteries

to the sub maxillary and subl ingual salivary glands ( 2 ) branches to the
digastric styl e — glossal and pterygoid muscles ; ( 3 ) the su blingua l a rtery ( a
, ,
.

s ubl in gualis ) which follows the border of the digas tric muscle and then
, ,

runs between the mylo hyoid muscle and the mandible -

.

A AUR I C U LA R IS P O STE R IO R — The great or posterior auricular artery leaves

. .

the external carotid close to the origin of the digastric muscle and between the
muscle and the hyoid bone The artery as its name implies is distributed .
, ,

over the aboral part of the c ar which it reaches by ben ding round the digastric
,

muscle and running upwards under c over of the p arotid gland .

The following branches should be observed ( 1 ) O ne or more small vessels ‘

spread out over the sterno cephalic and cleido mast oid muscles and supply the
- -

parotid and submaxillary glands ( 2 ) a branch of small size —the sil — m astoid
 D ISS E CTION OF TH E D O G 1 65

—
a rtery ( a stylo mastoidea ) enters the styl e mastoid foramen of th e temporal
.
- -

bone ( 3 ) an anterior auricular branch supplies the front of th e ear and

anastomoses with the anterior auricular artery .

A
. M R R —
AX I LLA IS INTE N A From the circumstanc e that it passes through
.

the alar canal of the sphenoid bone the in ternal maxillary artery may b e ,

divided into two parts namely ( 1 ) a part before th e canal is entered and
, , ,

( 2 ) a p art after the canal has been traversed Th e firs t portion of the .

artery is now exposed and will b e observed to take a curved c ourse towards
,

the medi an plane of the head and in an oral direction ventral to the mandibular
, ,

articulation .

From the first part of the internal maxillary artery three imp ortant vessel s
arise ( 1 ) The inf erior alveolar artery ( a alveolaris in ferior ) crosses th e external .

pterygoid muscle and enters the man di bular foramen Within the b one thi s .

artery c ontributes twigs to the teeth and the m en tal artery ( a mentalis ) which , .
,

leaves the bon e by the mental foramen and assists in the supply of blood to
the lower lip ; ( 2 ) the p osterior deep tem p ora l artery ( a temporalis profunda .

posterior ) leaves the internal maxillary ab out the same plac e as does the inferior
alveolar and c urves round th e oral side of the mandibular j oint to reach the
,

temporal fossa where it is exp ended in the muscles therein contain ed On e

, .

of its branches acc ompanies the masseteric nerv e through the mandibular
notch ; ( 3 ) j ust b efore the internal maxillary enters the alar canal it gives
origin to th e m iddle m en ing ea l artery ( a meningea media ) which at once enters .
,

the craniu m by the oval foramen .

N TE M P O R AL IS PR OF UN DA — The deep temporal nerv e a branch of the

. .
,

mandi bular accompanies th e deep temporal artery into the temporal muscle
, .

D issection —Remove the remains of the digastric and p terygoid muscles

. .

Sever the styl e glossal muscl e a short distanc e from its origin and turn
-

it down as far as possible Ou t through the stylo hyal bone about its .
-

middle and di sarticulate its di stal p ortion Then carefully clean the
,
’
.

s truc t ur es lyin
g in the neighb ourhood of th e base of the skull and th e
pharyn x The struc tures to b e examin ed are a nu mber of small muscles
.
,

the c omm encement of th e ex tra cranial c ourse of the last four c erebral -

nerves th e ventral branch of the first sp inal nerve a part of th e

, ,

symp athetic nervous system the occipital and in ternal carotid arteries , ,

and the c ommenc ement of the internal j ugular vein .

M TENS OR V E L I PAL A TINI — The tensor muscle of the p alatine velu m that
. .
,

is of the soft palate li es me di al to th e pterygoid muscles

, A rising from the .

m uscular process of the temp oral b one the muscle b ec omes tendi nou s on the ,

lateral face of the p terygoid and bends round the free b order of this b one to
end in the soft palate .

M L E VA TOR V E LI PALA TINI —

. The levator of the palatine velu m arises i n .

M 3
1 66 D ISSE CTION OF THE D O G

c ommon with the tensor and crosses the medi al surface of the p teryg o
pharyngeal muscle to reach the soft palate .

M P TER YGO —
. P HAR Y NG EUS —The p teryg o pharyngeal muscle has its orig in .
-

from the hamulus of the pterygoid b one from which it passes i n a caudal ,

di rection to reach the raphe of the pharynx .

M P HAR Y N Go PALA TIN U S —

. P artly blended with the foregoin g the fibres of
-
.
,

the pharyngo palatine muscle stretch from the free b order of the palatine
-

b one to the pharynx .

M JUG UL O H Y OI D EUS — If sufficient care b e ex erc is ed the very small

.
-
.
,

j ugulo hyoid muscle may b e disc overed crossi ng the narrow i nterval b etween
-

the j ugular proc ess of the occ ipital bo ne and the cartilagi nous co nnectio n
of the stylo hyal with the temporal bo ne
-
.

M ST YL O —
. P H AR Y NG E U S — The styl e pharyngeal muscle arises from the .
-

proximal part of the stylo — hyal b one and terminates under cover of the , ,

hyo pharyngeal muscle in the wall of the pharynx

-
,
.

M HY O P H AR Y N G E U S — The b ye pharyngeal muscle c onsists of two parts

.
-
.
-

both of which end in the wall of the pharynx ( 1) The more superficial part
of the muscle ( m chon dr o pharyngeus ) is much the more extensive and aris es
.
-

from the thyro hyal bone and possibly also from the adj acent p ortion of the
-

'

hyp o hyal ; ( 2 ) the deeper part of the muscle ( m c erato pharyngeus ) is i n

-
.
-

the form of a narrow band springing from the c erato hyal bone -
.

M T HY R E o P H AR Y NGE U S — The thyro pharyngeal muscle passes from

.
-
.
-

the obli qu e li ne on the lamina of the thyr oid cartil age to the raphe of th e
pharynx .

M CR I C O —
. P HAR Y NG E U S —D isposed i n the same manner as the foregoing .
,

the c rie o— pharyngeal muscle arises on the lateral s urfac e of the cricoid c artil age .

M C E R A TO H Y OI D E U S — T O di splay the c erato hyoid muscle properly it is

.
-
.
-

necessary to reflect the b ye pharyn geal m usc le When this has been done a mass -
.

of muscular fibres will b e found attached to the whole length of the thyr o and
hyp o hyal b ones and the adj acent part of the c erato hyal
- -
.

N G L O SSO P H AR Y N G EUS —The glosso —

.
-
pharyngeal or ninth cerebral nerv e .

leaves the crani um by the j ugular foramen and s oon divides into two branches
1 The li l b ran ch ( ramu s li nguali s ) is much the larger and crossing the
( ) n g ua , ,

lateral surface of the styl e pharyngeal muscle passes between the styl e glossal -

,
-

styl e pharyngeal an d b ye pharyngeal muscles to reach the muc ous membrane

-
.
-

of the tongue ( 2 ) the pharyng ea l bran ch ( ramus pharyngeus ) is much small er

and i s j oined by a t wig from the superior pharyngeal branch of the vagus nerve .

N VA GUS —. The vagus or tenth c erebral nerve c omes ou t of the cranium by

.

way of the j ugul ar foramen in c ompany with the glosso pharyngeal and accessory -

nerves T wo ganglia augment the volume of the nerve at di ff erent p oints

. .

The j ug ula r ga nglion ( ganglion j ug ulare ) is formed on the nerve while it is wi thin
the j ugular foramen ; and the n odose ganglio n ( ganglio n nodosum ) when i t
has become free from the cranium The latter ganglion is long and fusiform .
,
1 68 D ISSE CT ION OF TH E D O G

A O CC I P IT AL IS —
. One of the two smaller terminal branches of the externa l
.

carotid which arise about the aboral border of the digastric muscle the oc cipital ,

artery crosses th e internal carotid artery the superior laryngeal nerve th e , ,

nodose ganglion and the cranial c ervi cal sympathetic ganglion to reach th e
,

surface of the ventral straight muscle of the head where it is crossed in it s turn ,

by the hypoglossal nerve .

In order to follow the further c ourse of the artery it is nec e ssary to remov e ,

the remains of th e se muscles attached to the occipital bone which were dissected
in c onnec tion with the neck .

In the neighbourhood of the j ugular process of the occ ipital bone the
artery makes a curve which brings it to a level with the lateral border of th e
process This the vessel follows underneath the posterior straight muscle s
.

of the head thus arriving at a groove between the two nuchal lines of th e
,

occipital bone .

D uring its course th e occipital artery c ontributes several branches

( 1 ) Numerous small twigs leave it close to its commencement and are expended
in the wall of th e pharyn x and surroundi ng muscles ; ( 2 ) at a po int befor e
the occipital artery curves round the j ugular proc ess the condyloid artery ( a ,
.

c ondyloide a ) takes origin This vessel divides into several branches som e
.
,

of which end in the a nterior straight m uscles of th e head One enters th e .

j ugular foramen while another — which may be regarded as th e main c ontinua

,

tion of the p arent artery— enters the c ondyloid foramen ; ( 3 ) while in t h e

groove bet ween the two nuchal lines of the oc cipital bon e the occipital artery ,

gives orig in to the posterior m en ingea l artery ( a menin gea posterior ) whic h .
,

at onc e enters the cranium by a neighbour ing foramen ( 4) the cerebro sp in a l -

a rtery ( a cerebro spinalis ) enters the vertebral canal by the in tervertebra l

.
-

foramen of th e atlas and j o ining a branch from the vertebral forms th e

, , ,

b asilar artery of the brain .

A CA R OTIS INTE R N A — Like the occipita l th e internal carotid artery i s

. .
,

small From its origin immediately aboral to that of the occipital artery th e
.
,

internal carotid runs in a dorsal and oral direction within the occipital artery
and the hyp oglossal nerve and lateral to th e superior laryngeal nerve and th e
nodose ganglion Af ter crossing the ventral straigh t muscle of the head th e
.
,

artery enters the c arotid canal and s o gains the in terior of the cranium .

V JU GULAR IS INTE R N A
. In th e region of th e basilar part of the occipital
.
-

bone the i nternal j ugular vein is formed by th e union of the inferior cerebral
, ,

the occipital and a nu mber of small veins By cross ing the side of the pharynx
, .

the vein gains the ventral border of the c ommon carotid artery and so tr avel s
d own the neck .

D iss ectio n —M ake a longitudinal inc ision close to the middle l ine through
the wall of the pharynx and the soft palate .

P ALA I O N '
M O LL E .
— In the dog th e soft palate forms a long and broad
 D ISS E CTION OF TH E DO G 1 69

m oveable partition between th e mouth and the pharynx One border is .

attached to the margin of the bony palate while the other border which form s ,

the dorsal boundary of th e isthmus fauciu m ( the opening from the mouth in t o
the pharynx ) is free and in a state of rest is in contac t with the epiglottis o f
, , , ,

the laryn x Of the two surfaces the dorsal is continuous with th e floor of th e
.
,

nasal cavi ty and is slightly c onvex Th e ventral surface which continues th e

.
,

hard palate is correspon dingly concave

,
.

Prolongations of the muc ous membrane of the soft palate pass to the tongu e
and th e pharynx in the form of folds kn o wn as the glosso— p a la ti n e and p h a ryng o
pala tin e arch es ( arcus glosso p alatinus e t arcus pharyngo palatinus ) Th e
- -
.

pharyngo palatin e arch really consists of two diverging folds the more dorsal
-

of which is the better developed and ends on the dorsal wall of the pharynx .

Th e other fold of the arch passes to the epiglottis .

B etween the glosso palatin e and pharyn go —palatine arches is a deep dep res
-

sion th e tons illa r sin us ( sinus tonsillaris ) bounded by prominent folds o f

, ,

mucous membrane and containing the pa la tin e ton sil ( tonsilla palatina ) an
, ,

elongated eminenc e c omp osed mainly of lymphoid tissu e Imme diately .

dorsal to th e tonsillar sinus t here is a shallow s upratonsilla r f ossa ( foss a

supratonsillaris ) .

Structurally th e soft palate may b e described as c omposed of four layers

( 1 ) M ucous m embrane c ontin uous with that of the hard palate ( 2 ) a layer of
glandular tissu e thickest towards the free border of the palate ( 3 ) an ap on eu
,

r ot ic and muscular layer c ontaining the pharyngo palatine muscles and t h e -

mu scles of the u vula ( 4) muc ous m embrane c ont inuous with that of the nasal
cavi ty Naturally the muc ous membran e on the two surfaces is continu ou s
.

round the fre e border of th e palate The pharyn go palatine muscle h as .

-

already been examined .

M U V U Lz E — The muscle of the uvula is a rounded strip runnin g from th e

. .

m argin of the palatine bone to the free edge of th e soft palate The muscle s .

of th e two sides are close to each other and are generally blended at their
termination .

MO U TH — Th e m outh is the initial part of th e alimentary canal and occup ie s

.

th e mor e ventral part of th e fac e Its ca v i ty c omprises two parts : ( 1 ) a

.

ves tibule ( vestibulu m oris and 2 a

) ( ) p rop er cavity ( cavu m oris proprium ) .

The vestibule of the mouth c onsists of a narrow spac e between the lips and
the cheeks on th e one hand and the teeth and the gums on the other Th e .

muc ous membrane reflected from the lips and cheeks t o the maxillary an d
mandi bular bones forms its upper and lower b oundaries In front and to each .

s 1de th e vesti bul e communicates with t h e exterior by an elongated fi ssur e lik e -

op enin g ( rima oris ) b etween the lips Commu nication between th e mouth
.

cavi ty proper and the vestibule is effected by irregular openin gs between th e

teeth of th e opposed j aws and behin d the last cheek tooth Into the vestibule -
.
,

on each side open th e duc ts of th e parotid and b ucc al glands

, .
1 70 D ISSE CTION OF THE DOG

The mouth cavity proper is contained within the dental arches by which , ,

a n d the gums c onnected therewi th i t is bounded in front and on each side

, .

Behind i t c ommunicates with the cavi ty of the pharynx through the isth mus
,

fa ucium . The roof of the cavity is formed by the hard and soft palates while ,

the floor is formed by the tongue and the mucous membrane extending there
from to the mandible Into this part of the mouth open the ducts of the
.

s ubmaxill ary and sublingual glands .

LAB I A e m s — The two lip s are not alik e In all dogs the upper lip is the .

better developed and the more moveable and overhangs the lower lip In some , .

breeds the overlapping is c onsiderable The upper lip moreover is marked .

, ,

i n the middl e lin e by a deep vertical gr oove the p hiltrum and in some breeds
, ,

there is in addi tion a notch of greater or lesser depth indenting its free edge
, ,

i n the middl e line .

Behi nd the level of the canine tooth the free margin of the lower lip is
generally sharp and dentated .

Each lip may b e regarded as containi ng four layers ( 1 ) The outer surfac e
i s covered with ski n provided wi th hair excep t over a small triangular median , ,

a rea of the upper lip The hairs are of two kinds The most nu merous are
. .

variable in length— depending upon the breed— and relatively fi n e Longer .

and stronger tactil e hairs are fair ly abundant on the upper lip but more scanty ,

o n the l ower ; ( 2 ) a muscular layer c omposes the greater part of the entire
thickness of each lip and c onsists of a sphincter muscle ( m orbic ul aris oris )
, .

a n d the termi nations of suCh other muscles as c onverge upon the oral fissure

( 3) small c oll ections of labial glands constitute an imperfect thi rd layer ( 4 ) the
i nside of each lip is clothed by muc ous membrane c ontinuous with that l ini ng
t h e rest of the mouth cavity In th e m edi an plane th e mucous membrane is
'

raised into a small fold the f r ce nulum of th e lip ( fr aenulu m labii ) Ski n and
, .

m ucous membrane meet at the margin of the lips .

BU C CZE . The cheeks whi ch form the lateral boundary of the mouth cavity
-

, ,

have the same general structure as the lip s The glan ds ( glandul ae buccales ) .

are arranged in two groups —an upper and a lower The former group is .

c onsiderable in volume and di sposed below the orb it where it will be exami ned ,

a t a later period The lower glands less voluminous and more di ffuse extend
.
, ,

a long the c h e c k in a line with the alveolar b order of the mandi ble and are ,

c onti nuous wi th the glands of the lower li

p .

Each cheek is pierced by the parotid duct which opens into the mouth on ,

t h e summit of a low elevation the s a li va ry pap illa ( papilla sali v ali s) about the
, ,

level of the third maxillary cheek tooth The ducts of the b uccal glands als o
-
.

o pen on the surface of the mucous membrane

D ENTE S —A tooth c onsists of a c rown ( c orona dentis ) visible ab ove the gum
.

.
,

a n ec k ( collum dentis ) embraced by the gum and a root or roots ( radi x [ radi ces ] ,

d entis ) embedded in the bony tooth c avity ( alveolus dentali s ) The crown .

o f the tooth has a chewing surfac e ( facies masticatoria ) a surface c overed ,

1 72 D ISSE CTION OF THE D O G

raphe which ends in front at a four sided incisor p apilla ( papi lla incisiva )
,
-

di vides the surface into two lateral halves Each half is raised into some .

nine or ten curved transverse pa latin e f olds ( plic ae palatin ae transvers ae ) each ,

wi th its c onvexity turned forwards The whole surface is c overed with sma ll .
,

low blunt papill ae

,
.

FL OO R O F T H E M O U TH — When at rest the tongue forms the floor of th e

.
,

proper mouth cavi ty but the term floor of the mouth is c ommonl y used
,

to express a narrow area exposed when the tongu e is raised .

Continuation of the mucous membrane from the inner surfac e of the man
dible to the tongue results in a degree of fixation of the greater part of thi s
organ In the anterior p art of the mouth however the di sposition of th e
.
, ,

muc ous membrane permits of a greater amount of freedom If the free portion .

of the tongu e b e raised a prominent medi an fold of muc ous membrane th e

, ,

f r ce n u lum of th e ton g u e ( fr a enulu m lingu ae ) is di sclosed as is also the ru di , ,

mentary flattened elevation the sublin gua l carun cle ( c ar unc ulus sublinguali s )
, , ,

on whi ch Open the ducts of the sub maxillary and aboral subli ngual salivary
glands In the narrow groove between the tongue and the mandible are th e
.

openings of the smaller sublingual ducts .

LIN G UA — The tongue is an organ c onc erned in mastication deglutition

.
, ,

and taste and c onsists m ai nl y of a mass of muscular tissue partially c overed

,

wi th muc ous membrane In its anterior half the tongue is very decide dl y
.

flattened but posteriorly it is so thickened that a transverse section present s

,

a triangular outli ne The broadest part of the organ is within a short di stanc e
.

of the anterior extremity— roughly on a level wi th the fir st maxi llary premolar

tooth The main mass of the tongue is known as the body ( corpus lingu ae )
.

the tip ( apex lingu ae) is the blunt free extremity and the root ( radi x lingu ae )
is that part whi ch is attached to the hyoid b one and the mandi ble .

D ors um linguce — The term dorsu m is applied to that surfac e of the tongu e
.

which when the organ is at rest is in c ontac t with the hard and soft palates
, ,
.

The dorsu m is di vided longitu di nally into two lateral halves by a groove
( sulcus medianus lingu ae) shallow towards the tip but becoming much deeper
, ,

as it proceeds b ackwards The whole of the dorsum is thickly studded with

.

elevations of the mu cou s m embrane the lingua l papi llae ( papill ae li nguales ) , ,

of which five kinds can be distinguished namely filiform c onical fungiform , , , , ,

vallate and foliate

,
.

The filif orm pap illae ( papill ae filifor m e s) are much the most numerous and
occupy the greater part of the dorsu m In the anterior half of the tongue they .

are small but posteriorly they bec ome larger and finally merge into the next
,

g roup The c o n i ca l a
p p illae ( papill ae co ni e ae ) are arranged in rows — as indeed ,

are all the lingual papill ae—runni ng backwards and towards the medi an groove
.
,

Each elevation is sharply p ointed and di rected backwards I t will b e noted .

that the c onical papill ae are continued somewhat beyond the posterior limits
of the tongue .
 D ISSE CT ION OF TH E D OG 1 73

The f ung if orm pap illae ( papill ae fungiformes ) though less numerous are , ,

d istribu ted over the same area as the filifor m papill ae bu t do not occur among ,

the conical papill ae i n the most posterior par t of the dorsum They can be .

d istinguished readily by their rounded form and pale c ol our .

The valla te pap illae ( papill ae v allat ae) are generally four i n nu mber two on ,

each side of the median sulcus arranged along a V shaped line the point of
,
-

the V being directed backwards Their p osition is abou t the line of transition
.

o f fil if or m into c onical papill ae Each vallate papilla is large with a slightly

.
,

c onstricted bas e and a flattened crown which reaches somewhat ab ove the
g eneral level of the mucous membrane Ar ound a papilla is a circular foss a with
.

a n outer wall known as the vallum slightly raised above the surroun di ng level
, , .

The f oliate p ap illae ( papill ae foliatae) are two i n number One occurs on .

each side i mmediately i n front of the point of attachment of the glosso palatine -

arch to the tongue and has the form of an oval area crossed transversely by
,

s ix to eight ridge like elevations

-
.

The muc ous membrane of the tongu e is c ontinu ous with that li ni ng the
i nterior of the mouth generally O ver the dorsu m it is thick dense c overed
.
, ,

wi th papi ll ae and fir mly a dherent to the underlying fibrous and mus c ular
,

tissue Beneath the tongue it is much thinner smooth and not so adherent
. , ,

t o the subj ac ent tissues P osteriorly the glosso ep iglottic f old ( p li ca glosso
.
-

e piglottica ) connec ts the tongue and epiglottis On each side of the fold is .

a depression known as the ep ig lottic va llec ula .

MUS CUL I LI N GU JE — The muscular tissue of the tongue is divisible into

.

t hat which belongs to extrinsic muscles and that which is intrinsic to the
t ongue itself
. The extrinsic muscles — stylo —
glossal b ye glossal and geni e ,
-

glossal — were examined earlier in the dissec tion The intrinsic muscular .

fi bres are longitudi nal transverse and vertical in di rec tion

, ,
.

I n the dog a thin layer of loose c onnective tissue in the medi an plane and
s eparating the muscles of the two halves of the organ is all that represents ,

the lin gual sep tum ( sep tu m lingu ae) .

If t h e muc ous membrane immedi ately underneath the tip of the tongue
b e incised longitudinally an elongated c ondensation of fibrous tissue the
, ,

l yssa will be disclosed

,
.

P H AR Y N X —The pharynx is a muscular and membranous tube succ eeding

.

the m outh and reaching from the level of the mandibular articulation to
about the j oint between the atlas and epistropheus when the head is extende d .

Func tionally the pharynx b elongs to the respiratory as well as the digestive
system sinc e through it pass both air and food D issection of the wall of th e
,
.

tube reveals three layers namely a layer of muscular tissue an aponeurotic

, , ,

layer and a lining of muc ous membrane The muscles of the pharynx have
,
.

alr eady been c onsidered and it will h ave been noticed that th e maj ority of
,

them are so disposed as to act as c onstric tors of the c avity The ap oneurotic .

layer the submucous tela is intimately c onnected with the muscles and
, , ,
1 74 D ISSE CTION OF TH E DOG

gives attachm ent to some of their fibres I t is c ontinu ous with the periosteu m .

c overing th e bones of the base of the skull and with the other c onnections of
the pharynx .

The muc ous membrane of the pharynx is moderately thick and c ontains
collections of lymphoid tissue In the dorsal part of the tube it is redder in
.

colour and somewhat softer than in the more ventral and caudal portion .

The j unction of the pharynx with the oesophagus is well defined by a

transverse mucous fold .

The cavity of th e pha rynx ( cavu m pharyngis ) is di visible in to dorsal and

ventral portions The dorsal part c ommunicates with the nasal cavities by
.

the posterior nares and is c c e xtensive with th e soft palate It is resp iratory
,
-
.

only The ventral part of the c avity is both respir atory and alimentary in
.

f un ction inasmuch as it c ommunicates with the m outh and nos e in the on e

,

dir ec tion and with the oesophagus and larynx in the other
,
.

In the cavi ty seven open in gs must b e sought Of these the openi n g .

,

from the mouth the openin g into th e laryn x and th e c ont inuation of th e
, ,

c avity into the oesophagus are sin gl e and median Two paired op enings
,
.
,

namely from th e nasal chambers and from the Eustachian tubes are present
, ,

i n th e dorsal part of th e cavity .

TUB A AUD ITI VA [ E U S T A CHII ] — The auditive or Eustachian tub e is a .

short passage leading from the middle ear to the dorsal or nasal part of th e
pharyngeal cavity It should be looked for medi al to th e tensor m usc le of
.

the soft palate That p art of the tub e which is nearest the middle c ar has
.

a bony wall formed by th e temp oral b on e and op ens into the c ar by th e ,

tympanic op en ing ( ostiu m tympanicum ) Th e remain der and greater part .

, ,

of the tub e i s provided with a cartilag inous medi al and a membran ous lateral
wall Th e pharyngeal end of the cartilage produces a ridge like proj ection of
.
-

th e mucous membrane of the pharynx m e di al to which the pharyngeal ,

op ening ( ostiu m pharyn g eum ) of the tub e will be found .

— The tongu e the pharyn x and th e laryn x should now

D issectio n , ,
be
removed in order that an examin ation of the last named may
,
be
proceeded with .

—The larynx is a tubular organ situated beh ind the root of th e

LAR Y N x .

tongu e and ventral to the pharynx On each side and ventrally it is related .

to the constrictor muscles of the pharynx and to the thyr o hyoid sterno -
,

thyr oid and sterno hyoid muscles

,
The organ is provided with a skeleton
-
.

of c artilages upon which muscles act in such a way as to cause variations in

,

the char ac ter of the interior The interior itself is lined by muc ous membran e
.

c ontinuous on th e one hand with that of the pharyn x and on the other
, , , , ,

with the lining of the trachea or windpip e .

1 76 D ISSE CTI ON ~

OF TH E D O G

surface also is largely free bu t gives attachment to the glosso epiglottic fold
,
-

of mucous membrane and the b ye epiglottic muscle -

.

Cartila gin es c un eif orm es — The cuneiform cartilages are relatively large and
.

of an irregularly triangular outline The laterally flattened base of each is

.

intim ately associated with a corniculate cartilage whil e the ap ex forms an ,

elongated curved proj ection .

CAVUM LAR Y NGIS — If the interior of the cavity of the larynx b e regarded
.

it will b e observed that its lumen is c onstricted opposite two lateral folds of
mucou s membrane These are known as the vocal f olds ( pli c ae vocales ) and
.

form sharp and prominent ridges runni ng from the angle of convergence of
'

the two thyroid lamin ae to the vocal processes of th e arytenoid c artilages .

The fol ds are close together at their ventral ends but di verge dorsally Th e , .

interval betwee n the folds is known as the intermembranous part ( pars inter
membranacea ) of the g lottis ( rima glotti di s ) its c ont inuation between the
arytenoid cartilages b eing the intercartil aginous part ( pars in terc ar tilag in e a)
of the glottis Imme di ately lateral to each vocal fold there is a sli t like
.
-

depression the ven tricle of th e larynx ( ventriculus laryngis ) The depression

,
.

or openi ng has two lips of which one is formed by the vocal fold ; the other by
,

a very inconspicuous ven tricular f old ( plica ventricularis ) .

Oral to the vocal folds the cavity of the larynx is more spacious and is
di stinguished as the v estibule ( vestibulum laryngis ) Its boundaries are formed .

mai nl y by the epiglottic and arytenoid c artilages and the folds of mucous
membrane which c onn ec t them with each other .

The entranc e to the vestibule from the pharynx shoul d rec eive attenti on .

The prominent epiglottis whi ch forms the anterior boundary of the entrance
, ,

is c onnected with the tongue by the glosso —epiglottic fold of muc ous membrane ,

to the side of which is the ep iglottic vallecula a deep and somewhat triangular ,

depression Joini ng the lateral angles of the epiglottis to the apices of the
.

arytenoid and cor ni culate cartilages are the two ary— ep iglottic f olds Each of .

these may b e c onsidered as di vided into two parts The fir st part is .

prominent and transverse in di rection passing from th e epiglottis to the ,

cuneiform cartil age which forms a di stinc t proj ection Then foll ows a much
,
.

more feeble p art sagittal in dir ection and runn ing from the c uneiform to the
, ,

corni culate cartilage Between the ary epiglottic fol d and the lami na of
.
-

the thyr oid cartilage is a rather shallow pyrif orm sin us .

Beyond the vocal folds the c avity of the larynx is roomy somewhat ,

compressed laterally and dir ectly c ontin uous with the lumen of the trachea
, .

The mucous membrane ( tuni ca mucosa laryngis ) lining the c avi ty of the
larynx is c ontinuous in one direc tion wi th that of the pharynx and i n the ,

other with the mucous membrane of the trachea It is firmly adh erent to .

the dorsal surface of the epiglottis and very thi n over the vocal folds
, .

D issectio n — Remove the remains of the pharyngeal ,

the sterno hyoid -

,
 D ISSE CTI ON OF TH E D O G 1 77

sterno thyroid and thyro hyoid muscles Take care to preserve the
-

,
-
.

laryngeal nerves and vessels Now examine the struc tures on the .

ventral aspec t of the larynx .

LIG A M EN T U M HY O -
T HYR E O I D E U M .
—The c onnection of the hyoid bone and
the thyroid c artilage is established by a c ontinuity of the ex tremities of the
th yr o —
h yals with the oral thyroid c ornu a and by the presenc e of a membranou s ,

h yo thyroid l igament
-
This ligament which fills the gap between the hyoid
.
,

b one and the thyroid cartilage i s attached on the one hand to the body and ,

thyroid processes of the hyoid b one and on the other to the oral border of the ,

thyro id lamin ae Strongest in the middle line i t becomes thinner laterally

.
,

where it is pierced by the superior laryngeal nerve .

n . lar yngeus sup er i or m . cr i co- aryt wnoideus dorsalis

I n r ecurr ens
.

Cartilag e ep ig lotti ca .

Trach ea

m . ster no
th yr eoide us

m cr i co - th yr eoz deus
0 3 hyoi de um
.

Cartrlag io th yreoi dea

‘
m .
—
th yreo h yoideus

m g enw h yoideus
.
-

FI G
. 58 .
—Dissec tion of t h e laryn x .

M .
—J r h e cric o thyroid muscl e lies on the side of the
C R I CO T H Y R E O I D E U S r
r
-

cric oid arch from the ab oral border and the lateral surfac e of which it takes its
,

origin The insertion of the mu scle i s into the ab oral border and i mmediately
.

adj acent parts of b oth surf ac es of the lamina as well as the ab oral c ornu of
the thyroid c artilage .

LIG AM ENT U M C R I C O T HY R E O I D E U M — In the triangular gap b etween the

-
.

two cric o —thyroid mu scles a strong ligamentous band the cric o —thyr oid liga ,

ment will be observed The broader end of the ligament is attached to th e

, .

margins of the shallow caudal thyroid notch w hi le the narrower end is fixed ,

to the mid —ventral part of the cric oid c artilage Laterally the ligament is .

c ontinuous with a thin membrane which will be exp osed later .

The articulation between the thyroid cornu and the cricoid cartil age should
b e looked at now bu t its c omplete examination may be deferred until the
,

dissection of the larynx nears c ompletion The j oint is a di arthrosis provi ded .

wi th the usual j oint c apsule attached round the articular margins of the two
-

c artilages .
1 78 D ISSE CTION OF TH E D O G
— Now turn to the dorsal part of the larynx Remove the
D issectio n .

muc ous membrane from the cric oid arytenoid and c orniculate cartilages , , ,

taking care not to destroy the superior laryngeal and recurrent nerves
and the c onnection between them The origin of the longitudi nal .

mu scular fibres of the oesophagus from the median ridge of the cricoid
lamina will be noted The dorsal layer of the ary epiglottic fold
.
-

shoul d b e removed D efine the dorsal cric o — arytenoid and arytenoid

.

muscles .

M CR I C O AR Y T JE N O I D E U S D O R S AL IS — The dorsal cric o arytenoid muscl e

.
-
.
-

arises from the dorsal surface and medi an ridge of the lamina of the cric oid
cartilage From this extensive origin the muscular fibres c onverge and are
.

Carti layo cor ni c ula ta

n . la ry ng eus s up er ior m . arytaeno ideus transvers us

m . e noiz leus
crico ar yta
~

do r sal is

n . 7 6011 7 7 8 71 8

Tracked

Carti lag o cr i co z dca

m . cr ico-ar yta
e noz deus lateral is
Cart i lag o th yreoidea

I
I
A ppendix v entri culi
la ryng is

FI G . 59 .
—D issec tion of t h e laryn x a f te r re m ov al of t h e la m ina of t h e th yroid c artilag e .

inserted into the muscular process of the arytenoid cartilage I t foll ows .

that all the fibres will not possess a like degree of obli quity nor will they all ,

be of the same length The more oral are the most nearly transverse and are
.

shortest the aboral fibres are l ongest and most nearly longitu di nal whereas
the intermediate fibres are oblique .

M AR Y T JEN O I D E U S
. The arytenoid muscle of the dog is neither very
.
-

well developed nor very distinc t Its fibres arise from the arytenoid cartilage .

i n the region of the muscular process and are inserted along with the , ,

bulk of the ventricular muscle i nto the i nter arytenoid c artilage Thus the,
-
.

c artilaginous nodule form s a connection between the muscles of the two sides .

D is section — The di ssection of the remaining muscles should be c onfined ,

for the time being to one side of the larynx the other side being reserved
,
 D ISSE CTI ON OF TH E D O G

orally by the ventricular fold and the base of the cuneiform c artilage .

The ventricular fold forms only a short ventral segment of the oral
boundary ; or in other words it forms a boundary to the entranc e to th e
, ,

appendix of the ventricle It should b e noted that the fold has as a .

,

basis a fibrous band th e ventric u lar ligam en t ( lig v en tric ulare ) reach in g
, ,
.
,

from the basal part of the c uneiform cartilage to the thyr oid and epiglottis .

If the glosso —epiglottic fold of muc ous m embrane be removed the under ,

lying hyo — epiglottic muscle will be revealed A t the same time t h e .

hyoid attachment of the geni e glossal muscle will be made more clear than -

was previously p ossible .

M HYO
.
- — The two hyo epiglottic muscles arise independently
E P I GL O TT I C U S .
~ -

from the body of the hyoid bone but blend as they proceed towards their ,

insertion by a c ommon tendon into the middle line of the lingual surface of th e
, ,

epiglottis .

D issection — Clean up th e nerves and vessels on the intac t side of th e

larynx .

The nerves are the s up erior laryngeal and the recurrent The former pierces .

the hyo thyroid ligament close to the oral th yr oid cornu in c ompany with the
-

superior laryngeal vessels The recu rrent nerve runs up the neck along th e
.

dorsal border of the trachea .

D iss ection —Strip the muc ous membrane from th e interior of the larynx ,

and remove the remains of the muscles Care must b e exercised in th e .

removal of the membrane from the epiglottis cuneiform and corniculate ,

c artilages as these are fairly readily torn The description of the variou s
,
.

cartilages a lready given sh ould be again gone over

, ,
.

The connections of some of the c artilages have been described as the di s

sec tion proceeded but there still remains to be discussed the attachmen t
,

of the epiglottis to the thyroid the articulation b et ween the arytenoid ,

and cric oid cartilages and the union of the two arytenoids
,
.

The petiolus of the epiglottis is attached to the thyr oid cartilage by th e

th yro epiglottic ligam ent ( lig thyr eo ep ig lot t ic u s) which in c onj unc tion with
-
.
-
, ,

the elasticity of the epiglottis itself allows of free movement , .

Now that the restrain ing muscles have been removed it is easy to demon ,

strate that the movement between the thyroid cornua and the cricoid cartilag e
is mainly rotatory about a transvers e axis running between the two j oin ts .

The cric o arytenoid j oin t is also diarthrodial enclosed in the customary

-

j oint c apsule M ovements are gliding in various direc tions and rotatory
-
.
,

about a longitudinal axis .

The two arytenoid cartilages are united by fibrous tissue which is su fficiently ,

loose to allow of the necessary rotation in the crico —arytenoid j oint .

 D IS SE CTION OF TH E D O G 18 1

Dissection— Th e dissec tor sh ould now turn to th e se muscles which lie

ventral to the thoracic and c ervical vertebr ae .

M L ONG U S C O LL I — This comp osite muscle the long muscle of th e neck

. .
, .

stretches from the sixth or seventh thoracic vertebra to the atlas It is .

decidedly c omplicated in the arrangement of t h e numerous bundles which

c ompose it and may b e divid ed for c onvenienc e of description into thoracic
, , ,

and cervical portions The distinc tion of th e two parts is readily made
.

for though all the bundles of fibres pass in a cranial direc tion those of the
, ,

thoracic p ortion slop e lat eralwards while those of the cervical portion incline
,

towards th e median plane .

Th e bundles of the thoracic part aris e from the ventral aspec t of th e bodies
of the fir st six or seven thoracic vertebr ae and ar e inserted into th e transvers e ,

proc esses of th e last two c ervical vertebr ae The fibres of the cervical part spring .

from the transverse proc esses of the c ervical vertebr ae from the sixth or seventh
to th e third and are inserted into the ventral ridge of the vertebr ae and the
,

ventral tubercle of the atlas .

M L ONG U S CAP ITIS —

. The long muscle of the head arises from the transverse
.

processes of the cervic al vertebr ae from the sixth to the second and also ,

occasionally from the lateral part of the ab oral border of the wi ng of the atlas .

From thi s di ffuse origin the fibres are gathered together and inserted into the
ventral surfac e of the basilar part of the occipital bone .

M R E C T U S CAP ITIS V ENTR AL IS — The small ventral straight muscle of the

. .

head lies dorsal to the foregoing which should be reflec ted by making a trans
,

verse i ncision c m a level with the j oint b etween the atlas and the occipital bone .

The origin of the straight muscle is from the ventral surface of the atlas and its .
,

insertion is into a depression on the occipital b one imme diately aboral to the
insertio n of the preceding muscle .

M R E C T U S CAP ITIS LA TE R A L IS — O f ab out the same size as and p arallel to

. .
, ,

the ventral muscle the lateral straight muscle of the head springs from the
,

ventral surface of the wing of the atlas and is inserted into the j ugular process ,

of the occipital bone The occipital artery curves round its insertion
. .

Dissection — A n examination of the p terygoid muscles and associated

structures should now b e made on that side of the head on which the
mandi ble has been left intact .

M P TE R Y G OI D E U S INTE R N U S The internal p terygoid muscle forms a

. .
-

c onsiderable mass the fibres of which pass from the pterygoid palatine and
, , ,

sphenoid bones to the me di al surface of the mandi bl e ventral to the mandibular

foramen A t its insertion it is partly co nf used with the masseter muscle
. .

D issection —The internal p terygoid muscle should b e removed in order

that the external muscle of the sam e name may b e examined . By this
N 3
1 82 D ISS E CTION OF TH E DOG

di ssec tionthe termi nation of the mandi bular nerve with its inf erior ,

alveolar lingual and myl o hyoid branches will b e di splayed from th e

, ,
-

inside A t the same time the di ssector wi ll note a part of the internal
.

maxi llary artery and its i n ferior alveolar branch .

M P TE R Y GOI D E U S E X TE R N U S —The external pterygoid muscle much

. .
,

small er than the internal muscle of the same name takes origin from a fossa ,

on the lateral fac e of the pterygoid and p alatine bones and is inserted into a ,

rough area on the medi al surface of the mandible ventral to the c ondyloi d
process .

D issection — Remove as much as p ossible of the zygomatic bone without

inj urin g the orbit and open up the i nf raorbital canal The full extent
,
.

of the zygomatic gland will b e exp osed .

GLA N DULA Z Y GO M A TI CA — The di stinctly lobulated zygomatic gland li es

.

under c over of the oral end of the zygomatic arch Its deep face is in contac t .

with the pterygoid mu scles the periorbita the internal ma x il lary artery and
, , ,

the maxil lary nerve The main duc t of the gland is of some size and opens into
.

the mouth near the last molar t e e th In ad di tion there are generally several
.
,

smaller but inc onstant duc ts .

The gland must b e removed in order to all ow of the examination of the

internal max illary artery and the maxillary nerve .

A M AXI LLAR IS INTE R N A ; — A S previously stated the passage of the internal

.
,

maxillary artery thr ough the alar canal p ermits of its division into two parts .

That part of the vessel whi ch occurs b efore its entrance into the canal has
alr eady been examined The sec ond part that is to say the part after the
.
,

artery has traversed the c anal now falls to be di scussed

,
.

From the oral end of the canal the internal maxi llary artery pursues a
c ourse over the sur face of the pterygoid muscles in c ompany wi th the maxillary
nerve The temporal muscle and the zygomatic gland form its lateral relations
. .

Having arrived close to the entrance to the inf raorbital canal the vessel ,

divi des into the i nfraorbital ar tery an d a c ommon stem from which the spheno
‘

palatine and greater palatine arteries arise .

The follo wi ng branches leave the second part of the internal maxill ary
a rtery : ( 1 ) The O p h tha lm ic a rtery ( a ophthal mica ) leaves the parent vessel
.

immedi ately this emerges from the alar canal A short length of the artery .

may now be disclosed between the temporal muscle and the periorbita but its ,

f urther examination should b e deferred ( 2 ) The buccinator artery ( a buccina

. .

toria ) acc ompani es the buccinator nerve across the p terygoid muscles towards
the last molar tooth and ends in the component parts of the c h ec k ( 3) The
, .

les ser p alatin e artery ( a palatina minor ) crosses the p terygoid m uscle to whi ch
.
,

it supplies one or more branches and ends i n the soft palate Small t wigs
, .

also go to the hard palate ( 4 ) The i nf raorbita l artery ( a inf raorbitalis )

. .
1 84 D ISSE CTION OF TH E D O G

an elongated obj ec t of greyish c olour connected by fin e filaments with the

spheno palatine nerve The V idi an nerve of the p terygoid canal j oins the
-
.

aboral extremity of the ganglion

N M AN D I BULAR IS —The O pportunity should n ow b e seized to again exam ine
.

. .

the mandibular nerve —the most ventral di vision of the fifth cerebral nerve
as it leaves the cranium by the oval foramen and lies alongside the first part of
the internal maxillary artery ventral to the mandibular j oint and lateral to th e
,

p terygoid muscles The various branches of the nerve are the deep temporal
.
,

the masseteric the bucc in ator the superfic ial temporal the pterygoid the
, , , ,

li ngual the inferior alveolar and the mylo hyoid nerves all of which have
, ,
-

been described as the dissection proceeded .

GAN G LION 0 TI CUM — Close to the foramen ovale the small otic gangli on
.
,

lies on the mandibular nerve with which it is c onnect ed by fin e filaments A

‘

.
,

s mall bund le of fibres forms a link b etween the ganglion and the tympanic
nerve .

The orbit and its contents n ow claim the attention of the diss ector Th e .

bony b oundaries of the orbit of the dog are very imperfect the me di al wall ,

alone bein g represented in the macerated skull Of such bony wall as exists .

the frontal b one forms by far the greater part The lac hr ymal bone assis ts .
,

as does also a narrow strip of th e palat ine above the crest limitin g the depression

from which the p terygoid muscles have their origin M oreover the entrance to .
,

the orbit from the face is not c ompletely enc ircled by bone Only some three .

fourths of it is formed by the frontal lachrymal and zygomatic b ones The , ,

.

rest is c ompleted by the orbita l ban d a strong fibrous c ord bridgin g the gap ,

between the r udi m en t arv zygomatic process of the frontal and a small proj ection
on the zygomatic b one .

P E R IO R BIT A —An exact definition of the orbit is produced by the stout

.
,

conical fibrous periorbita the apex of which is ad h erent to the bone i n the
, ,

neighb our hood of the optic foramen while the base is fused with the orbital ,

b and and the periosteum of the b ony orbital margin The periorbita there .
,

fore forms a definite separation between the orbit and the temporal and
,

p teryg o palatine foss ae and c ontain s the eyeball and its various accessor y
-

structures .

The axis of the orbital cavity is not parallel to the long axis of the head ;
nor are the two orbital axes parallel to each other Each axis runs in a dorsal .
,

lateral and oral direction from the optic foramen

, .

D issectio n — In order to e ff ec t a proper exposure of the contents of the orbit

it is necessary to remove the c oronoid process of the man di ble and th e
temporal muscle attached thereto For c onvenience the orbital band and .

as much as possible of the periorbita should also be taken away In th e .

removal of the periorbita care must be exercised not to inj ure the struc tures
lying close to its deep face .
 D ISSE CTION OF TH E DO G 1 85

GLA N DULA LA OR I M A Li s — The lachrymal gland will be found under the

’
.

orbital band and over the dorsal and lateral part of the eyeb all Flat in form .

and c urved c onformably to the struc tures with which it is in c ontact the gland ,

is pale red in c olour and distinc tly lob ulated Generally its numerous ducts
-
.
,

which Open into the superior fornix are too small to be satisfactorily di ssected
, .

P reviously the two ends of the lachrymal and zygomatic nerves have been
examined The mid dl e part of their c ourse is now revealed These two
. .

nerves — branches of the maxillary nerve— lie immediately under the periorbita ,

and run together or a v e rv short distanc e apart on th e surface of the lateral

, ,

n ,
frontalis

m q
obl i uus i nf erior
lacri malz s
.

n .

m . r ect us s up er i or

n . zygomati cu s

s lateral i s

m . r ect us i nferi or

l
nn . i n ra- or b i tales
f

F IG . 60
.
—
Di ssec tion of th e orb it .

s traight muscle of the eyeball towards the entrance to the orbit The lachrymal
,
.

nerve is the more lateral and gives branches to the lachr ymal gl and T h e .

zygomatic nerve pierc es the orbital band in order to reach the lower eyelid .

N 0 P H T HALM I CU S — The O phthalmic nerve the most dorsal di vision of

. .
-

the fifth cerebral nerve— enters the orbit at its apex and should be l ooked for ,

b etween the origins of the superior and lateral straight muscles of the eyeball .

It di vides into the frontal infratroc hl ear and naso —ciliary nerves Of these th e
, ,
.

fir st named can b e examined at onc e b ut the di ssec tion of the others should b e
,

deferred for a little .

N FR ONT AL IS — The frontal nerve lies j ust within the periorbita and wil l
. .
,

b e found run ni ng obli quely across the levator O f the uppe r eyelid and th e
superior straight muscle of the eyeball to the point of attachment O f the orbital
1 86 D ISSE CTI ON OF TH E D O G

b and to the zygomatic process O f th e frontal b one I ts distribution is to the .

upper eyelid and the adj acent part of the side of the nose .

M L E VA TO R P A LP E BR ZE S UP E R IO R IS — The thin narrow levator muscle of

. .
,

the upper eyelid is dorsal to the eyeball and j ust underneath the periorbita .

I ts origin is from the margin of the op tic foramen and its expanded insertion ,

i s into the upper eyelid .

M OB LI QUU S SUP E R IOR —O f the t wo oblique muscles of the eye the more
. .
~

superior arises from the medi al side of the Op tic foramen U nder the zygomatic .

process of the frontal b one the fleshy belly of the muscle gives plac e to a thi n
,

rounded tendon which playing through a pulley forms an angle with the rest
, , ,

m . r ectus medi ali s

’

n . naso ci liar i s
-

n tr och lea n s
.

u . oculo mowr ius

-
.

R amus inf erior

n . abduce ns

FI G . 6l .
—D issec tion of t h e orb it .

Of the muscle and attached to the sclera after passing under the tendon of
insertion of the superior st ra ight muscle .

N TR O C HL E AR IS — The trochlear or fourth cerebral nerve lies lateral to the

. .

superior obli q ue muscle whi ch it enters after a very short intraorbital c ourse
,
.

N I N FR A TR O C HLE AB I S — The infratrochlear branch of t h e Ophthalmic

. .

nerve may now b e examined The nerve is at first between the medial and
-
.

superior straight muscles but later i t passes towards the entranc e to the orbit
,

between the medial straight and the superi or O bli qu e muscles In order .

to gain the ski n medial to the eye the infratrochlear nerve passes b elow th e
,

trochlea O f the O blique muscle whence i t derives its name

, .

N N A SO C i LI A R I s — T h e naso —ciliary nerve generall y arises from a c ommon

.
-
.

stem along with the infratrochlear nerve I n order to reach the ethmoidal .

foramen by means of which i t leaves the orbit the nerve turns round th e
, .

edge of the medial straight muscle and then passes bet ween the medial straight
and superior obli q ue muscles .
18 8 D ISSE CTI ON OF TH E D O G

upper eyelid ( 4 ) The f ronta l a rtery ( a frontalis ) c ourses along the lateral
.
.

border of the superior straight muscle to reach the upper eyelid wh ere it ,

anastomoses with the superficial temporal artery ( 5 ) T wo posterio r ciliary .

a rteries ( a a ciliares
. posteriores ) acc ompany the O p tic nerve into the
eyebal l ( 6) T h e c ontinuation of the ophthalmic artery the eth moida l artery
. ,

( a
.
ethmoidalis ) traverses the
,
e th moidal foramen and gains the interior
of the craniu m where it divides into meningeal and nasal branches
,
.

A C ENTR AL IS R E T I N ZE —
.
The s mall central artery of the ret ina arises from
.

the anastomotic branch of the ophthalmic which j oins the internal carotid
artery Th e vessel enters the eyeb all within the optic nerve and is di stributed
.

over the anterior surfac e of the retina .

PA LP EB R A TE R TI A —O n making an examination of th e un di ssect ed orbit

.
,

a prominent fold of conj unc tiva will b e observed medial to the eyeball This .

is the m em bra na n ictitans or free edge of th e th ird eyelid the basis of which ,

formed by a roughly triangular plate of cartilage ( cartilago nictitans ) The .

deeper part of the cartilage is surrounded by a reddish glandular mass ( glandula

palpebr ae t er tiae

Diss ection— Before entering on the dissection of the eyeball ( bulbus ocu li ) ,

it is well that several specimens b e secured Some of thes e should be .

examin ed in the fresh condi tion others should be hardened in a formol

solution preparatory to their dissection From all of them the muscles .

should b e removed When doing this notic e the exit of the vortic ose
.

veins about the equator of the eyeball and the entranc e of the Optic ,

nerve and the posterior ciliary arteries .

In the first plac e the dissector should gain s ome id e a of the general structure
of the eyeb all by making sections of two specimens One should be .

cut in a vertical antero — posterior di rection ; the other in the p lane of

,

the e quator .

G E N E R AL CONFO R M A TION A N D S TR UC T UR E O F T HE EY EB ALL A lthough .

more spherical than in other domestic animals the eyeball of the dog is n ot a ,

perfect sphere as is shown by certa in proportions given by K osc h el A cc ord ing

,
.

to this O bserver the average transverse vertical and antero p osterior diameters
,
-

are in the proportion of 1 9 7 1 8 7 and 2 0 in small dogs and 2 4 2 3 and 242

, , , , ,

in large dogs The excess in the antero posterior diameter depends upon th e
.
-

bulging of the c ornea a part of a sphere with a shorter radius than that of the
,

sclera by which the greater p ortion of the curve of the eyeball is determin ed .

It is found convenient to employ c ertain descriptive terms in th e c onsideration

of the eyeball The an terior and posterior poles ( polus anterior e t polus posterior )
.

e the c entral points of the anterior and posterior curvatures respectively .

They are j oined by an i maginary line known as the optic axis ( axis optica )
, ,
 D ISSE CTION OF TH E D O G 1 89

the shortest distanc e between the two poles and by m er idian s ( meridi ani ) ,

which follow the surface of the eyeball The equator ( aequator ) is a line drawn
.

equidistant from the two poles cutting the meridians at right angles .

The eyeb all i s composed of three c oncentric tunics enclosing three refracting
media The tunics are
.
( 1 ) A n ou ter dense fibrous coat ( t unica fi bros a
, ,

oculi ) c onsisting O f the posterior O paque sc lera and the anterior transparent
corn ea ( 2 ) a middle vascular and pigmented envelope ( t unica vasculosa oculi )
c omprising a posterior and m ost extensive portion the choroid ( chorioid ) an , ,

intermediate c iliary body ( corpus ciliare ) and an anterior diaphragm the iris
, ,

and ( 3 ) an int ernal and thin nervous tunic the retina ,

.

The refracting m edia are ( 1 ) T h e most p osterior and most volumin ous th e ,

vi tr eous body ( c orpus vitreum ) of j elly like consistenc e ; ( 2 ) the crystallin e

,
-

len s ( lens crystallina ) the most dense of the media ; and ( 3 ) an aqueous
,

hu mour which occupies the most anterior part of the eyeball .

D issection — In order that a complete examination may b e mad e O f th

sclera and c ornea it is necessary to separate them from the struc tures
within With great care mak e an incision with a knife through th e
.

sclera at the equator The underlying choroid must not be inj ured ;
.

therefor e the incision must stop as soon as pigment becomes v isible .

Now c omplete the incision round the equator by means of scissors Th e .

separati on of th e sclera can b e very readily e ff ected except at the j unction ,

of the sclera and c ornea and at the entrance of the optic nerve In th e .

former position resistanc e is offered by the attachment of the ciliary

muscle but can b e easily overc ome by us ing a pair of closed forceps or
,

si milar blunt instrument The op tic nerve must be severed immedi ately
.

it has pierc ed th e sclera Th e fibrous tunic of the eyeball is now

.

di vid ed into two parts The rest of the specimen must be preserved
.

for fut ure exam ination .

S OL E R A —Th e sclera is a dens e resisting white tunic of c onsiderable

.
, , ,

thickn ess in the n eighbourhood of the O ptic nerve and fair ly thick close to ,

the margin of th e cornea Th e intermediat e part h owever is relatively

.
, ,

thin so much so in deed that generally the shimmer O f t he dark underlyin g

, ,

choroid imparts a bluish c olour to this part of th e sclera .

The free anterior marg in of th e sclera ( rima cornealis ) with whic h the cornea ,

is connected is almost perfectly circular The p oint of entrance of the op tic

,
.

nerv e is not quite at th e p osterior p ole of the eyeball but s lightly ventral and ,

lateral to it Here the fibrous sheath of the nerve— derived from the dura
.

mater of the brain —is c ont inu ous with the sclera and bundles of nerve fi b re s ,
-

pass thr ough small orifices in the sclera Th e area so pierced is known as th e
.

c ribros e la mina of the sclera ( lamin a cribrosa scler a

e) .

Between th e sclera and the choroid is the p erich oroideal lymph spac e
 1 90 D ISSE CTION OF TH E D O G

( spatium p eric h orioideale ) crossed by the fine ciliary vessels and ner ves and a
,

loose network of pigmented connective tissue kn own as the lam ina f usca .

CO R N E A — The cornea is transparent of great density and nearly circ ular in

.
, ,

o utline Its thickness is greatest in the central part and becomes less towards
.

the periphery The edge of the c ornea is overlapped by the sclera in much
.

the same manner as a watc h glass is overlapped by the metal rim into which-

i t fits .

CHO R IOI D — The choroid forms the greater part of the middl e tuni c of the
.

e yeball and is thickest about the entranc e of the O ptic nerve

,
If the choroid .

be viewed from the front a triangular or crescentic area beginning either

, ,

above or me di al to the entrance of the O ptic nerve is readily di stinguished ,

from the rest Thi s is the tap etum and the peculiar appearance of the choroid i n
.
,

this position is caused by the presenc e of a number of superposed layers of

c ells ( tapetu m c ell ulosum ) In the dog the tapetum has a metalli c lustre and
.

i s often of a golden c olour with a whi tish or bluish p eriphery .

The main thickness of the choroid c onsists of two layers of blood vessels .

The more superficial layer the lamin a vasculosa c ontains the larger vessels
, ,

while the inner layer the lam in a chorioca p illa ris is c omposed of a network
, ,

o f capillaries The tapetu m occurs between the two lamin ae

. .

D issection — I n order to di splay th e cili ary body an eyeball should b e c ut

across a li ttle di stance in front of the equator and the vi treous b ody and , ,

crystalline lens carefully removed from the anterior segment .

CO R PU S C I L I AR E — The cil iary body consists of the ci liary processes and the
.

c ili ary muscle The c iliary processes ( processus ciliares ) are some seventy to
.

eighty radi all y arranged ridge li ke thickeni ngs of the body ; each ri dge -

bec oming taller from the periphery c en tralwards and endi ng abrup tly as a
s li ghtly expanded prominence A portion of the hyaloid m em bran e ( membrana
.

hyaloidea ) which surrounds the vitreous body is appli ed to the ciliary pro
, ,

cesses and is ra di ally thickened and folded so as to present grooves and

, ,

elevations intimately connected with the processes and the depressions between
them Imme diately behind the cili ary processes there is a circular area
.
,

al most entirely s mooth known as the orbiculus ciliaris which however is

, , , ,

very narrow or even absent i n the medi al half of the eye .

M C I L I AR IS — The ci liary muscle consists of i nvoluntary fibres arranged

. .
,

for the most part in a meridi onal or radiating manner Some fibres however
, .
, ,

are circular in direction I n a sagittal section of the eyeball the ci liary muscle
.

forms a triangular mass in the neighbourhood of the j unction of the sclera and
cornea The radiating fibres arise from the sclera close to the rima cornealis
.

and are attached to the ciliary processes and the orbiculus ciliaris .

D iss ectio n — The iris must now be examined Its posterior surface c an be .

studi ed i n the preparation u sed to show the cili ary body To reveal its .

anteri or surface the cornea must be removed from another eyeball .

192 D ISS E CTI ON OF TH E DOG

occupying the posterior part of the c avity O f the e y eball and intervening ,

between the crystalline lens and the retina In front adaption to the lens .
,

necessitates the presence O f a c oncavity th e h ya lo id f ossa ( fossa hyaloidea )

, .

The rest of the surface of the body is c onvex and applied to the retina ( Optic
and ciliary parts ) b ut is not in any way c onnec ted with this tunic of the
,

eyeball except at the entrance of the optic nerve

,
.

Th e surface of the vitreous body is c overed by the deli cate h yaloid m embran e
( membrana hyaloidea ) which over the cili ary body is thickened by the acces
, , ,

sion of radial fibres This thickened part of the membrane is known as

.

the ciliary z onu le ( zonula ciliaris ) and is fir mly adherent to th e cili ary processes
,

to which it is adapted by a series of radial folds and grooves Close to the .

margin or equator of the crystalline lens th e zonul e spli ts into two layers .

The thinner O f the two lines the hyaloid fossa ; while the much thicker anterior
layer is c onnected with th e c apsule of the lens and thus forms its suspensory
li gamen t .

Running through the vitreous body from the op tic papilla to the back
of the lens is the min ute h yaloid cana l ( canalis hyaloideus ) marki ng the lin e
of the embryonic h yaloid a rtery ( a hyaloidea ) a branch of the central artery
.
,

of the retina The canal cannot be detected in adult material unless the
.

vitreous body has been stained .

SPA TI A Z ON ULAR I A — If a blow pipe be introduced through the suspensory

.
-

ligament a varic ose canal surrounding the equator of th e lens can b e inflated
,
.

This is formed by the zon ular spaces b ounded in front by th e su spensory

-

ligament and behind by the hyaloid membrane c overing the vitreous body .

D i s s ec tio n —Separate the lens from the vitreou s body by c utting through
the suspensory ligament .

LE N S C R Y ST ALL IN A —The transparent and biconvex cr y stalline lens lies

.

between the iris and the vitreous body It should be noted that its surfaces
.

in the dog are not so c onvex as in other domestic mammals A zone .

between the extreme p eriphery and the c entre of the anterior surfac e ( facies -

anterior lentis ) is in c ontact with the iris whereas a variable amount of the
central part of the surfac e coincides with the pupil Th e posterior surfac e .

( fac ies posterior lentis ) has a greater curve than the anterior and is received
into the hyaloid fossa of the vitreous body The central p oints of the surfac es .

are known as the an terio r and p oster ior p oles of th e lens ( po lus anterior lentis
e t polus posterior lentis ) Joining the two poles is th e ax is of the lens ( axi s
.

lentis ) In acc ordanc e with the comparative flatnes s of t h e surfaces the

.
,

margin or eq ua tor ( aequator lentis ) is moderately sharp .

If the lens be h eld up to th e light fine radi ating li nes may be detect ed
,

spreading out from the c entral point of each surface These indicate the .

planes of c ontac t of the ends of the fibres ( fib rae lentis ) which c ompose its
intimate struc ture Covering the surface of the lens is a homogeneous
.
 D ISSE CTION OF TH E D O G 193

membrane the ca psule ( capsula lentis ) much thicker over th e anterior than
, ,

over the posterior surface .

If a fresh lens b e crushed b etween the fin gers the peripheral part will ,

be found to be much softer than the more central part A hardened lens .

also should be broken by pressure in order to demonstrate the concentric

,

di sp osition of lamin ae O f fibres which c ompose it .

CA M E R JE O CUL I —Bet ween th e c ornea in front and the iris and c entra l
.

part of the lens behi n d is the anterior ch am ber of th e eye ( camera oculi anterior ) .

Within the angle formed by th e c ornea and iris the angulus iridis th e aqueou s , ,

humour fi nds its way into the spaces of Fontana ( sp atia anguli iridis
The posterior cham ber of th e eye ( camera oculi p osterior ) is a circular interval
boun ded by the iris the p eripheral part of the anterior surface of the lens and
, ,

the proj ecti on produc ed by the anterior extremities of the ciliary proc esses .

—R emove all the muscles etc from about the j oint b etween
D issection ,
.
,

the mandible and the temporal bone on that side of the head which is
yet more or less intact .

AR TI CULA TI O — The man di bular artic ulation occurs bet ween

M A N D IBU LAR IS .

th e mandibular fossa O f the temp oral bon e and the c ondyloid process of th e
mandi ble The two bony s urfaces however are not in c ontact for between
.
, , ,

them is an articular disc o f cartilage ( di scus articularis ) moulded upon the bony
articular areas .

The j oin t is enclosed by a cap sule ( capsula articularis ) attached around

th e articular surfaces of the two bones and a lso to the circ umf erenc e of the
articular di sc Thus it comes to pass that there are in reali ty two j oint cavities
.
-

on e between the temp oral bone and th e disc t h e other between th e di sc and ,

th e c ondyloid process of the man di ble Each cavity has its own syn ovial
.

membrane In general t h e capsule is strong but the presenc e of the temporo

.
,

mandibular ligam ent ( lig temp oro m andi b ular e) makes it especially so latera lly
.
-

From th e c onformation of th e bony surfaces the only mov e ments p ossibl e ,

in th e j oint are such as result in depression and elevation of the man di ble .

Dissection —As a preli m inary to th e removal of the brain the rema ins of ,

the muscles e tc should b e cleared away from the cranial bones Tha t
,
.
, .

part O f the mandibl e which is still in position should also b e taken away ,

as well as the zygomatic arch of that side The crani al bones must now .

b e cut away pi e cemeal with the bone forc eps down to the level of th e
zygomatic arc h This must b e done very cautiously in order that th e
.
,

fibrous membrane c overing the brain th e d ura mater may escape in j ur y , , .

It will b e observed that the dur a is closely applied to the inner surfac e of
o
1 94 D ISSE CTI ON OF TH E D O G

th e cranial bones and that i t is particularly adherent along the line

,

of sutures Some difficulty will b e experienced in the removal of the bony

.

tentoriu m bu t this may be overcome by the gradual stripping O f the

,

membrane from the bone .

I n the region of the foramen magnum the bone between the two occipital
c ondyles should be removed A s this means partial destruction of a
.

c onnection between th e occipital bone and the at las note should b e ,

taken of th e presenc e of the dorsal atlan to occip ita l m embran e ( membrana -

atlanto occipitali s dorsali s ) a strong membran e passin g from the edge

-

of the arch of the atl as to th e margin of the foramen magnu m .

It will b e noticed that the dura mater is firmly attached to the edge of
the foramen magnum .

D UR A M A TE R EN C E P H ALI —
The brain is enclosed wi thin three membranes
.
,

or meni nges of which th e outermost and at the same time the thickest and
, ,

strongest is the dura mater The func tion of this membrane is a double one
,
. .

In the first place it aff ords protec tion to the brain which it c ompletely surrounds , .

In addi tion it c onstitutes the periosteu m of the inner surfac e of th e crani al

bones as evi denced by the appearanc e of the membrane when it is stripped
,

fr om the bones The exp osed surfac e O f the dura in the sp ecimen now being
.

exami ned presents a more or less ragged appearance due to the presence of ,

stumps of vessels ruptur ed durin g separation of b one from membrane .

Consequently the dura mater within the crani um may be regarded as

,

c omposed of two layers : ( 1 ) an endocranial or periosteal layer and ( 2 ) a ,

supp orting layer appli ed to the brain and forming folds b etween certain parts
of thi s organ I n c ertain regions the two layers are separated by channels
.

c ontaini ng venous blood th e blood sinuses of the d ura One of these sinu ses
,
-
.
,

the sag ittal s in us ( sinu s sagittalis ) is easil y rec ogni sed as i t runs i n a longi
,

t udi n al dir ec tion in th e middl e line A t the osseous tentoriu m th e sagittal .

sinus di vides into right and left tran sverse s in uses ( sinus transversi ) which are ,

mainl y contained in the temporal meatus and c onsequently su ff er c onsiderabl e ,

inj ury during the removal of the b one .

A much smaller sinus the occip ital ( sinus occipitalis ) sometimes di fficul t
, ,

of demonstration lies in or ab out the mid dle line behind the tentorium that
, ,

is to say over the cerebellum

,
.

D issection — Raise the dura mater from the underlying brain and make
as long an incision as possible through it on each side of and parall el
to the sagittal and occipital sinuses A t right angl es to the first incisions .
,

and from about the middl e of their length make an incision on each ,

side as far as the c ut edge of the cranial bones .

—The subd ur al c avi ty— a spac e between the dura

CAV U M S U B DUR AL E .

and the arachnoid mater— is now opened It will b e observ ed that the .
 D ISSE CTION OF TH E D O G

A little farther forward and about the same di stanc e from the me di an
plane are the optic or sec ond c erebral nerves .

The last c onnec tion of the brain is that of the o lfactory nerves as they
pierc e the ethmoid bone I t is generall y very difficult to extrac t the
.

olf actory bulbs from wh ich the nerves arise without i nj ury
, , .

If the brain when removed is not su ff iciently hardened to allo w of satis

fac tory di ssection it shoul d be placed in a 5 % solution of formaldehyde
,
-
.

In any case its di ssection is better postp oned .

It will now b e well to exam ine the dura mater and the other structures
at the base of the cranium The dura mater c overing the basal bones of the
.

craniu m is removed wi th difficulty thus di ffer ing from that part of th e ,

membrane which l ines the bones of the cranial vault Not only is th e .

dura adherent to th e bones ; in addition it forms sheaths for the various

cerebral nerves and is contin uous through the foramina of the cranium
, , ,

with th e p eriosteu m o f the exterior .

One of the fol ds of dura mater the falx c erebri has been examin ed Th ere
, , .

remain two others : the tentoriu m of the cerebellum and the di aphr agm o f
the sella tur c ic a
T ENTO R I UM C E R EBE LL I —The tentoriu m is interposed between th e c erebral
.

hemispheres and the cerebellum and in the dog c ontains an extensive c entral
, , ,

bony p ortion Th e lateral membranous part i s attached to th e proj ecting

.

border of the tempo ra l bone The free edge of the partition bounds an open
.

ing by which the middl e and p osterior crani al foss ae communicat e wi th each
other and can be traced fo rw ards as far as a s mall proj ection of the sphenoid
,

overhanging th e orbital fissure .

D I AP HR A G M A S E LL ZE —A rudi mentary circular fold of dura mater surrounds

.
,

and in a manner de fi nes th e sella turc ica By means of the diaphragm the
,
.

hyp ophysis is fir mly retained with in its bony b ed .

N E R VI C E R E BR A LE s — Each cerebral nerve on its exit from the craniu m

.
, ,

provided wi th a sheath derived from all three cranial meninges With the .

exc ep tion of the Optic nerve however the identity of the three membranes
, ,

is soon lost b ecause of the disapp earanc e of the arachnoid and the subsequ e nt
blendin g of the dur a and pia mater .

The numerous small olfac tory nerves leave the cran i u m at once by the
foramin a of the ethmoid bone Th e optic nerve also makes a rapid exit by
.

the foramen which b ears its name Th e oculo motor nerve on the contrary .
-
, ,

trave ls for some distanc e within the substanc e of the d ura mater before it
reaches its point of exit the orbital fiss ure The c ourse of the nerv e can
,
.

generally be seen without dissection as it follows a lin e cross ing very obli quely ,

lat eralwards the cont inuation of the fre e margin of the tentorium c erebelli
,
.

The trochlear nerve will be foun d j ust under the free edge of the tentoriu m in
a shallow g roove on the anterior surface of the temp oral bone close to its apex .

Thenc e it runs in a s lightly c urv ed mann er to the orbital fissure .

 D ISS E CTI ON OF TH E D O G 19 7

To follow th e trigeminal nerve a c ertain amount of dissec tion is needed , .

The nerve has two roots a large loosely c oherent sen sory root ( portio maj or )
, , ,

and a much smaller m otor root ( portio m inor ) Soon after the nerve leaves
. .

the brain it passes through a sh ort canal in th e temp oral bone In order .

to follow the nerve satisfactorily it is necessary to strip the dura mater from
the bone and snip away the wall of the canal Im mediately the sensory root
,
.

h as left the canal its volume is considerably increased by the presence of the
Gasserian or semilun ar gan glion ( ganglion semilunare from which
arise th e three main divisions of the nerve namely th e O phthalmic maxillary , , , ,

and mandibular nerves To O btain an adequate view of the ganglion and

.

the n erves arisin g therefrom the dura mater must b e raised from them V ery
,
.

great care is needed in doing this since the membrane is intimately adh erent,

to the gangl ion and th e nerves The relativel y small O phthalmic nerve
.

( n
.
ophthalmicus ) has an intracranial c ourse along the side of the cavernous
blood sinus to the orbital fissure The maxillary nerve ( n maxillaris ) travels
-
. .

to the foramen rotundum parallel to th e O phthalmic nerve but on a slightly ,

lower level Th e mandibular nerve ( n mandibularis ) immediately on leaving

.
.
,

the semilunar ganglion traverses the foramen ovale and gains the exterior of
,

the cranium The s mall compact motor root of the trigem inal j oins the
.

mandibular nerve and will b e found underneath the semil un ar ganglion

,
.

The abducent nerv e pierces th e dura mater j ust below the p oint at which
the trigeminal nerve enters th e canal in the temporal bone and runs to the ,

orbital fissure medial to the Ophthalmic nerve in th e wall O f the cavernous

blood sinus
-
.

The exits of the remaining cerebral nerves from the cranium wer e noted
during the removal of the brain A closer inspection of them m av profitably
.

be made at this time .

S I N U S D UR ZE M A TR IS —The sagittal transverse and occipital sin uses

.
, ,

have already been examined There still remain for dissection the cavernous
.

and petrosal sinuses and th e basilar plexus

,
.

The cavern ous sin us ( s inus cavernosus ) lies to the side of the sella turcica ,

and is c onnected with its fellow sinus behind the infundibulum P osteriorly .

the cavernous sinus is c ontin uous with th e inf erior p etrosal sin us ( sinus petrosus
inferior ) which lies between the apex of the p etrosal bone and th e body of the
sphenoid and is thenc e c ontinued into the venou s canal b etween the p etrosal
,

bone and the basilar part of the occipital There is a transverse c onnection .

( plexus basilaris ) between the two inferior p etrosal sinuses j ust behind the
dorsum sell ae .

The s up er ior p etrosal sin us ( s inus p etrosus superior ) runn ing along the ,

proj ecting border of the temporal b one and communicating with th e confluenc e
of th e sinuses is of s mall size in the dog
,
.

A C AR OTIS I NTE R N A — Th e intracranial course of th e internal carotid

. .

artery should now b e followed Entering th e cranium by emerging from th e

.

o 3
19 8 D ISSE CTION OF TH E D OG

carotid canal at the apex of the petrous part of the temporal bone the artery ,

pursues a c ourse in the cavernou s sinus at fir st sinuous but afterwards more , ,

direct Close to the orbital fissure the artery pierces the dura mater and
. ,

proceeds to divide into branches which supply blood to the brain .

The branches at present available for examin ation are one or two s mall
twigs wh ich anastomose with the middle meningeal artery and a larger ,

anastomosis with the O phthalmic artery

A M ENINGE A M E D I A —
.

. The middl e meningeal artery has been observed

.

to leave the fir st part of the internal maxillary artery and enter the craniu m
by the foramen ovale Within the craniu m the artery lies between the parietal
.

b one and the dura mater occupyin g a deep groove in the b one A n
,
.

anastomosis is e ff ected with the internal carotid artery .

N P ETR O S U S S UP E R FI C I AL IS M A JO R — A very minute nerve the larger

. .
,

superficial petrosal should b e looked for underneath the semilunar gangli on

,
.

Ar ising from the geniculate ganglion of th e facial nerve it enters the crani um ,

by way of the carotid c anal and is j oined by the deep petrosal nerve fro m a
plexus surroundi ng the internal c arotid artery The c ompound struc tur e thus .

formed known as the Vidian n erve ( n canalis pterygoidei

, fi nally
.

j oins the spheno pal atine ganglion

-
.

D iss ec tion —The cavity of the nose must next b e examined In order
. .

to expose the interior of the cavity the skull should b e sawn across o n a
level with the sella turc ica and a sagittal section then made b y sawi n g
,
-

parallel to and slightly to the side O f the me di an plane Thus the septu m .

of the nose wi ll b e preserved intac t on one side of the plane of sec tion .

Next examine the entranc e to the nasal c avity Observe the area of pig .

m en t e d skin surrounding the nostrils The area is c overed wi th depressed

.

papules is free from hairs and in a state O f health i s moist and c old
, , .

The cartilages associated wi th the nostrils must also b e di splayed .

CAR TI LA G INE S N A SI — The cartilaginous skeleton of the nose is ma inly

.

composed of o ff shoots from the cartilaginous septu m of the nasal cavity Thi s .

proj ects above and beyond the i nc isive b ones and has its dorsal and ventral
borders prol onged to such an extent and in such a manner that they meet in
the lateral wall of the nasal c avity In addition to the dorsal and ventral.

processes of the septu m there i s an indep endent lateral cartil age of roughly
,

triangular form .

S E P TU M N A SI — The c omposition of the sep tum between the two nasal

.

cavities will b e disclosed by stripping O ff the muc ous membrane c overing it .

The septu m is partly bony p artly cart ilaginous By far the greater portio n
, .

of the bony sep tum ( septu m nasi osseum ) is formed by the vomer and the per
‘

p e ndic ular plate of the ethmoid bu t ridges proj ecting from the frontal and
,

nasal b ones play an auxiliary part .

2 00 D ISSE CTION OF TH E D O G

narrow i n front bu t bec omes more spacious b ehind These thr ee passages are .

put into communication with each other by the com m on m eatus ( meatus nasi
c ommu ni s ) a cleft li ke channel interveni ng between the turbinated bones
,
-

and the nasal septum .

A s was observed during the removal of the septum the posterior part of the ,

cavi ty of the nose i s di vided into two parts by the tra n sverse lami na of the
ethmoid w hi ch j oins the vomer The dorsal and more extensive p ortion is .

olfactory i n fu n ction the lower is respiratory

,
.

The most anterior part of the nasal c avi ty i e that part c orrespondin g , . .

to the m oveable septu m forms the v estibu le of the nose ( vestibulu m nasi ) and
,

c ontains two mucous fol ds c ontinuous with the two tur binated bones The .

dorsal fold as such soon di sappears an d its plac e may b e said to b e taken by ,

two short oblique folds The ventral fold expands anteriorly and ends abruptly
,
. .

Close to the floor of the vestibule and on a level wi th the end of the ventral ,

muc ou s fold is the Openi ng of the n a so lachrym al duc t ( duc tus naso lacrimali s )
,
- -

by whi ch th e tears reach the nose .

O R G AN ON V O M E R O N A S AL E [ JA CO B S ON I ] — If a fin e probe b e introduced
-
.

into a small Op en ing at the side of the incisor papilla it will traverse the nas o ,

pala tin e duct and appear in th e floor of the nasal cavity close to the septu m
and on a level with th e can ine tooth Into th e naso palatine duct opens .
-

the tubular vomero nasal organ of Jacobson Th e organ is enclosed in th e

-

vo m ero—
.

nas a l ca rti lag e ( cartilago vomero nasale ) situated along th e base of -

the nasal s eptum and is innervated by the olf actory and the nasal branch of
,
'

the spheno palatine nerve

-
.

S I N US MA XILLAR I s —It is best to O pen the maxillary s inus from the outside
. .

A s a preli minary step the in fr aorbital canal should b e Opened up and cleared
of its contents The inner wall of the canal is formed by a thin plate of bone
.

which may be fairly easily removed withou t in j ury to the underlying mucou s
l ining of the sinus The bony op enin g may b e enlarged as much as desir ed
.

and th e muc ous membrane should then b e incis ed to such an extent as to all ow
of a good view of the interior .

The maxillary sin us has an oval out lin e and c oinc ides in extent with th e
last four maxillary teeth It will b e noted that th e c ommun ication betwee n
.

the sin us and the nasal cavity ( aditus naso — maxillaris ) is large and oval but is ,

not in the lowest part of the sinus The adi tus opens into th e nasal cavi ty .

close to where the ventral limb of the middle meatus j oin s the inferior meatus .

S IN U S FR ONTALIS —When the skull was sawn longitudin ally one of th e

.

frontal s inuses was Opened Th e di mensions of the sin us should be ascertain ed

. .

It is generally of good size and more or less perfec tly divided in to two or more
,

parts bu t in this respec t much depends upon the breed of the dog which is
,

bein g dis sected The sinus opens into the ethmoidal meatus of the nasal cavity
. .

If the mucous membrane c overing the lateral wall of the nasal cavi ty b e
examined it will be found that a certain zone of the linin g of the vestibule is
 D ISSE CTION OF TH E DOG 2 01

distinguished by the p ossession of pigment The rest of the muc ous membrane
.
.

O f the lateral wall like that of the septum is divided into an upper olfac tory
, ,

( regio olfac toria ) and a lower respir atory region ( regio resp iratoria ) Though .

the O lfactory mucous membrane is thicker th an that over the rest of the wall ,

the l imits of the regions are not recognisable with the naked eye The .

nerves supplyin g the lateral wall of th e cavity are similar in origin to those
of the septum .

D issection— Remove the muscles which still remain attached to the spin ous
and transverse proc esses O f the vertebr ae Then open the vertebral .

canal by cuttin g through the arches of the vertebr ae j ust within the
articular processes Those p arts of the b ones which are now removed
.

m ust b e left attached to each other : in other words the li gaments ,

conn ectin g them must b e preserved intac t for future study .

This dissection will expose th e spin al c ord wi thin its membranes the roots ,

of the sp inal nerves and c ertain blood vessels

,
-
.

Little di fficulty will be exp erienc ed in demonstrating a series of spin al

vein s emergin g from the vertebral canal by the intervertebral foramina and
if th e spin al c ord b e raised so m
,

ewh at from the bodies of the vertebr ae ,

their c o nn ection with a longitudi nal vein on each side will b e s een Into the .

longitudi nal vessels O pen veins which dr ain the b odies of the vertebr ae .

U nless the subj ec t b e well inj ected it will b e difficult to detec t the small spin al
arteries which enter the vertebral canal by the intervertebral foramin a These .

are derived from the vertebral in terc ostal lumbar and sacral v essels and are
, , , ,

di stributed to the spin al cord the sp in al meninges and the b odies of the vertebr ae
, , .

ME NI N GE s — Surr oundin g th e spinal c ord are three membranous envelop es “

th e menin ges —c ontin u ous with those which cover th e brain

.

D UR A M A TE R S P IN AL IS — A certain amount of soft fat c overs the outermost

.

of the spinal menin ges and must b e removed b efore a satisfac tory examin ation
can b e made .

Th e sp in al dura mater is in the form of a dense fibrous tub e c ontin uous , ,

with the cranial dura mater at th e foramen magnu m and extendin g in to th e

s acru m. Th e tub e is of uneven calibre Wide in the cervical and lu mbar
.

regions it is narrower and much more closely appli ed to the spin al cord in th e
,

th oracic region A b orally it tap ers rapidly t o its sacral ter min ation Al ong
. .

each side the roots of the sp inal nerves pierc e th e wall of the dural tub e and ,

in doing so derive a thin fibrous sheath therefrom .

— The dur a mater should now b e carefully slit along the middle
D iss ection
l ine This having be en don e th e smooth natur e O f the interior O f th e
.
,

tub e will be man ifest Th e in terval b etween the dura and the arachnoid
.

is known as the subdural ca vity ( ca v um subdurale) .

202 D ISSE CTION OF TH E D O G

It is O bvious that di ff erences exist between the dura mater c overing th e

brain and its continuation over the sp inal c ord Th e cranial dura mater is .

closely adh erent to and forms the periosteum of the cranial bones The spin al
, ,
.

dur a mater is separated from the vertebr ae by a space in which is a certain

amount of fatty tis sue The cranial dura mater c onsists of two layers from
.
,

one of which membranous partitions are formed T h e spinal dura mater .

corresp onds to the inner of these two layers only V enous sinuses are present .

in the cranial dura mater while the c orrespond ing membrane of the spin al
,

cord is devoid of them .

AR AC HN OI D E A S P IN ALI s — This the sec ond tubular investment of th e

.
, ,

spin al c ord is very deli cat e and transparent Contin uous at its cranial en d .

with th e arachnoid of the brain caudally it forms a loose investment for the ,

cauda equina and ends by j oining the other meninges Between th e arach .

n oid and the pia mater is the subara ch noid s pa ce ( cavu m sub ar ac h n oidale ) .

Dissection — Remove th e arachnoid ma ter from a leng th of th e c ord and

so expose th e pia mater .

P IA M A TE R S P I N ALI s —
The pia mater is a tough vascular membran e
.

closely applied to the surface of the c ord and c ontin ued in to th e ventral medi an
fissure .

LIG AM ENT U M D ENTI C U LA T UM — Connectin g the pia mater with the d ura .
~

mater and suspendin g the c ord in the dural sheath the denticulate ligament ,

is attached c ontinuously along the lateral border of the sp inal cord Its .

c onnection with the dura mater however is interrupted and in the form of , ,

p ointed teeth which reach the dura mater between the apertures of exit
,

of successive spinal nerves

ME DU LLA S P IN AL IS —
.

The spin al cord is a bilaterally sym metrical c ylin

.

dric al mass of n er v e matter extending from the foramen magnu m where ,

i t is cont inuous with th e medulla O blongata of the brain to th e seventh

lumbar vertebra Its c audal extremity rapidly tap ers thus form ing the
.
,

c o nus m edullaris b eyond which is the filum term inale The last named is a
,
.

thin thr ead lik e s truc ture mainly c omposed of pia mater but contain in g
,
-

, ,

some small amount of nervous tissue .

A certain degree of dorso ventral flatten ing is observable in most of th e-

sp inal c ord This however is infin itesimal in the thoracic region The
.
, ,
.

thic kness of the cord is not unif orm Those parts are thickest from which .

S pring the nerves form ing th e limb plexuses Thus it comes to pass that -
.

there are two enlargements a cervica l s welling ( intumescentia c ervicalis ),

and a lum bar swellin g ( intumescentia lumbalis ) The longest stretch with .

u niform diameter is the thoracic part of the cord .

NN S p i N AL E s — Leav ing each side of the spinal cord are thirty four or
. .
-

thirty fi v e spinal nerves classified according to the vertebr ae caudal to which

-

they leave the vertebral canal The number of nerves agrees with the number .
2 04 D ISSE CTI ON OF TH E D O G
S ulcus m edi a nus dor s alis

F uni c ul i
S ulc us lateralis
rsa li s

Co l um na dor sal es
Commi ss ura dor sal is

Canal is central i s
F un i cul us
lateral i s

Commiss ura ventral is

g r isea

alba
ventral i s
i

S ulcus lateral i s
’

F un iculus ventrali s x
l

F is sura media na ventralis

FI G . 62 .
—T rans v erse se c t ion of th e spinal c ord .

8 1

F IG . 63 .
—Trans v e rse s ec t ions o f t h e s pinal c ord a t d1 fi e re n t le v els, dr aw
n to sc ale .

C . 3, e t c , indic ate t h e se g m e n ts
.
.
 D ISSE CTION OF TH E D O G 2 05

i ntermediate groove ( sulcus intermedius dorsalis ) divides the dorsal funiculus

into a me di al f asciculus graci lis of G0 11 and a lateral f asci culus cun ea tus of
’
Burdach Goll s fasciculus is much the narrower
. .

In the c ervical and thoracic regions m oreover a longitudinal groove runs , ,

along th e sid e of the sp inal c ord midway between the dorsal and ventral
lateral grooves .

S E O TI O N E S M E D UL L ZE S P I N AL rs — Sections should b e made across the cord

.

in diff erent regions and th e cu t surfaces stu di ed The bilateral nature of .

the cord is obvious The ventral median fissure cuts into it to a c onsiderable
.

depth and a m edian s eptum ( septu m me dianu m dorsale ) c ontinues th e dorsal

,

me di an groove into the interior Each half contains grey and white matter
.

the former more deeply placed and in th e form of a curved or comma shaped -

mass The grey matter is c ontinued from one side of the c ord to the other
.

by the dorsal and v en tra l grey comm issures ( c ommissura dorsalis grisea e t
commissura ventralis grisea ) b etween which is the cen tral cana l of the cord
,

c analis c entralis su rounded by the en tra l gr ey ma tter

( ) r c .

The exact shap e of the sec tional area of the grey matter varies c onsiderably
in di fferent regions bu t in the main it may b e indicated by saying that it
,

resembles the capital lett er H th e cross bar of th e letter bein g represented -

by th e g rey c ommissur es Each half of the c ord contain s a dorsal and ven tral
.

colum n of grey matter ( c olumna dorsalis et c olumn a ventralis ) Of these th e .

ventral is the larger and terminates bluntly some distance from the surfac e
, .

The dorsal column approaches the surface very nearly and terminates in a ,

p ointed apex .

Occasionally a sli ght c onstriction the n ec k of th e dorsal colum n ( cer vix ,

colu mn ae dorsalis ) marks o ff this c olumn from th e rest of the grey matter
, .

Th e apex of the dorsal c olu mn is c overed by a p articular kind of grey matter

c alled th e g elatin ous substan ce of R olan do ( substantia gelat inosa [ B olan di ])
from its semi transparent character
“

-
.

Th e grey c olumn s are largest in th e c ervical and sacral regions and

p articularly s o on a level with th e origin of those nerves which form th e
l imb — plexuses ; while they are smallest in the thoracic and early lumbar
r egions .

Th e white matter is disp osed external to the grey c olu mns and consequently ,

i s di vided into three funiculi A dorsalf un iculus ( funiculus dorsalis ) triangular

.
,

i n S ection lies b e tween the dorsal g rey c olumn and the dorsal medi an sep tum
,
.

A lateral f uniculu s ( funi culus laterali s ) occup ies th e concavity lateral to the
gre y columns A ven tral f uniculus ( fu ni cul us ventralis ) fills the in terval b e
.

tween th e ventral grey colu mn and th e ventral me di an fissure The two .

ventral funiculi are connected across the bottom of the fissure by th e whi te
comm issure ( c ommi ssura ventra lis alba ) From the cir cu mstance that the
.

ventral grey c olumn does not reach the surface it is O bviou s that the lateral ,

and ventral white funiculi are only imp erfectly s eparated .

206 D ISSE CTI ON OF TH E D O G

In the c ervical region the dorsal funiculus is di vided int o a f asci culus -

g ra c ilis [ Go lli] and a f asc icu lus cun ea tus [ Burda ch i] .

E N C E P HAL ON — I t is best to begin the examination of the brain by a

.

general inspection of its external conformation The brain in its entir ety h as .

an ovoid shap e th e broader caudal end being formed mainly by the medulla
, ,

O blongata and the cerebellum bu t p artly also by the c erebral hemispheres

, .

The compressed oral extremi ties of the cerebral h emispheres capped by ,

th e olfactory bulbs c onstitute the narrow end of the ovoid Of all th e com
,
.

ponent parts of the organ the cerebral hemispheres are far and away the
,

most bulky and it is these which c ontribu te the greatest transverse di ameter
, .

IVh en the brain is v iewed from th e dorsal asp ect little more than the hem i -

spheres is visible though a part of th e cerebellu m may b e seen as well as a

,

small section of the medulla O blongata A long itudina l fissure ( fi ssura longi .

t udin ali s cerebri ) separates the two h emispheres while a transverse fissure ,

divides the hemispheres and th e c erebellum from each other .

On looking at th e brain from th e ventral asp ect a considerable number

of structur es are distinguishable Of these th e most important only need .
,

be mentioned here Th e rest will b e exam ined in the proper plac e Con
. .

t inuin g the S pinal c ord at the aboral end of the brain is the m edulla O blong ata ,

a dorso ventrally flattened colu mn somewhat similar to the spinal c ord in

-

external appearance Immediately in front of th e medulla there is a broad

.
,

transverse band the p ons which can be readi ly followed laterally into the
, ,

c erebellu m A ppearin g at th e oral border of the p e n s are two thick roun ded
.
,

cords th e c erebral p edu n cles which after a diverg ing course di s appear into the
, , , ,

c erebral hemisph eres Between the two peduncles is a depression th e i nter

.
,

edu n cu la r f ossa ( fossa in terpeduncularis conta inin g a white eminenc e

p ,

the ma mm illary body and a grey prominenc e the tu ber c in ereum With the .

latter the hyp ophysis is c onnected by the hollow stalk —

, ,

,
l ike inf undi bulu m .

Th e optic tracts approach each other and finally blend at th e Op tic ch iasma ,

which lies immediately in front of the tuber cin ereum Th e rest of the ventral .

view is occupied by parts Of the cerebral hemispheres .

A lateral examination of the brain reveals little more than the hemispheres
of the cerebrum with partial views of the c erebellum p ons and medu lla
, , ,

O blongata .

MENINGE S — Oi th e three membranous c overings of the brain the dur a

.
,

mater has alr eady been examined .

AR AC HN OI D E A EN C E P HALI C ontin uous with and structurally similar to

.
,

the c orresponding membrane of the sp inal c ord the arachnoid of th e brain ,

is for th e most part closely related to the pia mater It does not however
, , .
, ,

follow the pia into the fissures of the c erebrum and at the base O f the brain ,

the relation O f the two m embranes is much less intimate than elsewhere .
2 08 D IS SE CTI ON OF TH E D O G
Each of these is j oined by the posterior c ommuni c ating branch of the internal
carotid artery and then disappears from the present di ssec tion by passing
,

between the c erebral hemisphere and the cerebral p edu ncle The posterior .

cerebral arteries are chiefly c onc erned i n supplying the posterior part of the
cerebral hemispheres .

A R TE R I A C AR OTI S I NTE R N A —The termination of the internal c arotid

.

arter y will b e found i mmediately lateral to the optic c hi asma A b ou t this .

B ulbus olf a ctor ius

Tractus ol a ctor ius

f

x a . Cerebr i anter ior

S tria lateral is

a cerebr i
. media

a . ch or ioidea

a com muni cans p osteri or

T uber ci ner e um .

Corp us m amillar e
a cerebr i
.
p oster ior

a . cerebelli a nter ior

a . bas i lar i s

a auditiva i nter na
v

a . cere bel li p oster ior

n a ccessor ius
v
.

FI G . 64 .
—
At r e rie s a t t h e b ase of th e b rain .

p oint the artery c ontributes a pos terior comm un icatin g branch ( a c ommu nicans .

p osterior ) to the p osterior c erebral artery and then i mmediately ends by ,

dividing into the middle a nd anterior c erebral arteries .

The m iddle cerebra l artery ( a c erebri media ) gains the Sylvian fissure and
.
,

spreads out over almost the whole of the lateral surface of the cerebral hemi
sphere A s mall ch oroidal artery ( a chorioidea ) leaves the middl e c ereb ral close
. .

to its c ommencement and follows the optic trac t to end in the choroid plexus
,

of the lateral ventricle .

The anterior c erebral artery ( a cerebri anterior ) passes dorsal to the optic
.

nerve and c onverging up on the me dian plane either fuses with its fell ow artery
, ,

of the other side of the brain or is j oined to thi s by a trans verse anterior com
,

m un icatin g artery ( a c ommunicans anterior )

. The anterior cerebral artery .

r amifi es over the medi al surface of the hemisphere .

 D ISS E C TION OF TH E DOG 209

CI R CULU S A R TE R IOS U S [ W1 LLI S I ] —The anastomoses mentioned above .

~

, ,

res ult in the produc tion of the arterial c ircle of Willis which lies in the depressed ,

area i n front of the pe ns A nteriorly the circle is formed by the direc t or

.

indi rec t ( by the anterior c om municating artery ) u n ion of the anteri or c erebral
arteries Laterally the posterior communicating arteries link the anterior
.

to the p osterior part O f the circle which is c ompleted behind by the two ,

termin al branches of the basilar artery .

Di ssection— Remove the membranes and vessels from the base of the b rain .

Thi s must be d one with the utmost c are in order to avoid inj ury to the
brain tissue generally but especially to prevent tearing away the roots of
,

the several c erebral nerves The relation of the pia mater to the nerve
.

roots is s o intimate that it is probably s afest to c ut the membran e with

scissors around each root .

It is wel l to preface the detailed ex a m l n a tion of the brain by a c ursory

inspectio n of certain struc tures at its base .

The ventral asp ect of th e medulla O blongata is di vided into two l atera
halves by a m edian longitudin al fi ssur e ( fi ssura medi ana ventralis ) c ontinuous
wi th the ventral fissure of the spi nal c ord and b ounded on each side by a pro
min ent white strand the pyram id ( pyramis ) which disapp ears under the pons
, , .

T h e medi an fissure terminates abrup tly at the f ora m en cae cum a blind dep r es ,

sion close to the p e n s Lateral to the pyr amid and separated from it by a
.
,

shallow groove is the oval f a c ial tubercle ( tuberculum facial e ) Immediately

, .

oral to this is a transverse prominenc e the corp us tr ap ez oi deum The promi nent
, .

p ons forms a c onvex elevation and is c ontinued laterally into the cerebell um
, .

The broad rounded c erebra l p edun cles a pp ear oral to the p e n s and di verging ,

somewhat di sapp ear into the c erebral hemispheres Consequent upon their
,
.

di vergenc e a depressed area the in terp edun c ular f ossa ( fossa interpedunc ul aris )
, ,

is produc ed The oral b oundaries O f the fossa are formed by the Op tic tracts
.

-
white cords appearing at the e dge of the pyriform lobe of the c erebrum
and t h e Optic chiasm a produc ed by the union of the two tracts The abora l .

part of the fossa is formed mainly by the p osterior p erf orated substan ce ( sub
s tantia p erforata p osterior ) whi ch derives its name from the presenc e in it of
,

nu m erous small O peni ngs by whi ch blood vessels reach the deeper brain tissue -
.

T h e oral portion of t h e fossa is occupied by the m amm illary body and the
tuber c in ereu m Th e mammillary body ( c orpus mamillare ) is a pro mi nent
.

whi te obj ect frequently showing in di c ations O f its doubl e nature c onnected
, ,

with th e two c olumns of the forni x A grey el evation of somewhat less promin
.

enc e intervenes bet wee n the mammi llary b ody and the O ptic chiasma Th is .
,

t h e tuber cinereum is c onnected by means of a holl ow stalk t h e inf un di bulum

, , ,

wi th the hyp ophysis which as a rule is left behi nd in the removal of th e brain
, , ,

fr om the crani um .

On a level with the interpeduncular fossa the cerebral h e mis pher e is raised ,
2 10 D ISSE CTI ON OF TH E D O G

into a pyriform lobe A small oral c ontinuation O f the lob e is separated from
.

th e main mass by a deep transverse depression in which the middle cerebral

artery lies Oral to the depression is the olf actory lobe ( lobus olfactorius )
.
,

consistin g of the olf actory bulb ( bulbus olfactorius ) from which arises a flattened
white band the olf actory tract ( tractus olfactorius ) A t its posterior extremi ty
,
.

th e tract divides into m edial and lateral str iae ; the former disappearing into
the fissure between the two hemispheres ; the lateral c ours ing as a white ,

band across the surface of th e oral prolongation of the pyriform lobe and
, ,

finally disappearing in the prominent part of this lobe Between th e two .

stri ae is a grey em inenc e the olf actory tu bercle ( tuberculum olfactorium ) the
, ,

greater part of which is pi tted with holes and thus c onstitu tes the anterior
ated substa n ce ( substantia perforata anterior )
p f
er or .

N E R VI C E R E BR A LE s — Twelve cerebral n erves arise from each half of th e

.

brain Thes e are either named numerically or are given names signifying
.

their func tion or distribution

First cerebral nerve Nervus olfac torius .

Sec ond opticus .

Third oculomotorius .

Fourth trochlearis .

Fifth trigeminus .

Sixth abducens .

Seventh facialis .

Eighth acusticus .

Ninth g lossOph aryng eus .

Tenth vagus .

Eleventh accessorius .

Twelfth hyp oglossus .

Each cerebral nerve is connected with cells in the interior of the brain ,

from which it can be traced to some definite point on the exterior where
’
i t has what is generally called its superficial origin The superficial origins
.

of the various nerves should now be determ ined .

N O LF A C T O R I U s —Nu merous small olfactory nerves leave the olfactory

. .

bulb and immediately enter the foramina of the ethmoid bone Th ev are .

generally left behind when th e brain is removed .

N O P TI C U s —The op tic nerve is a large ro und c ord leavin g the optic chiasma
N O CUL O M OTOR I U S —The oculom otor nerve has orig in from th e cerebral
. . .

. .

peduncle about the middle of its length and towards its medi al border
N TR O C HL E AR IS —Sin ce the origin of the trochlear nerve is from the
.

. .

anterior med ullary velum it cannot b e demonstrated at present The n erve

, .

itself however will be found curvin g round the lateral b order of th e c erebral
, ,

peduncle in the interval between this and th e cerebrum and c erebell um The
, .

trochlear is the smallest of the c erebral nerves .

2 12 D ISSE CTION OF TH E D O G

the length of the hemisphere i e the corp us callosu m does not reach the . .

frontal and occipital poles of the hemisphere .

The surface O f th e hemisphere is sculptured by lin es known as fissures ,

( fi ssur a
e ) and s ulc i which separat e winding
,
ridges referred to generally as

con volu tio ns ( gyri ) .

Lateral s urf ac e — A fissure of great f undamental importanc e the rhina l

. .
-

fiss ure ( fi ssura rhinalis ) — separates the olf actory and pyriform lobes fr om
the rest of the lateral surface That part which is dorsal to the rhinal fissure .

is c overed with c onvolutions rising tier above tier and arranged in a curved , ,

manner about a short straight fissure of c onsiderable depth the lateral cerebral ,

fi ssure of Sylvius ( fi ssur a c erebri lateralis The Sylvian fissure occur s

3 . cruc z at us
s . s up ra syl vi us

s cor onalis
s . lateral i s
.

s . orbitalis s . ectos yl vm s

s . ectolat eral is

s .
postlateral i s

1 a rh i nal “
'

T ra ct us ol a ctor i u s
f

s ,
p ostsyl vi us

laterali s [ S ylvia]

FIG . 65 .
—Lateral s urfac e of the c e re b ra lh e m isp h e re .

on a level with that transverse depression which cross es the pyriform lobe .

In the depths of the fissure and in the natural c onditi on h idden from sight , ,

are several short c onvolutions c omp osing the i n sula .

Bent rou nd the Sylvian fissure is a c onvolution b ounded on the o th e i z

side by a sharply c urved ectosylvian sulcus ( sulcus ec t osylv ius) M ore dorsal .

in position is a sulcu s c omprised in reality of two parts though in the maj ority ,

of specimens its double character is not apparent Th e oral segment is one .

of the deepest of the several c erebral sulci and is known as the s up ras ylvian ,

s ulcus ( s s upr asylv iu s)

. Continuous with thi s and uni ted to it at an angle
.
, .

is the post s ylv ia n s ulcus (s p os tsylv ius) The area between the suprasylvian
-
. .

sulcus and the dorsal m argin of the hemisphere is cu t by the lateral s ulcus
( s lateralis ) generally b ut not always c ontinuous anteriorly wi th the c orona l
.
, ,

s ulc us ( s c oronalis )
. The c oronal can b e di st inguished from the lateral sulcus
.

by its greater di stance from the margin O f the hemisphere S mall s ulci of .
 D ISSE CTION OF TH E D O G 213

little moment— oc tolateral and p ost lateral— indent the surface of the hemisphere
-

i n the neighbourhood of the occipital pole Conseq uent upon the lateral .

inclination O f the c oronal sulcus an area of cerebral c ortex roughly quadri

'

, ,

lateral in form is isolated

,
I n thi s area is the cruciate s ulcus ( s cruciatus )
. .

w hi ch crosses the b order of the hemisphere and is c ontinued onto i ts medi al

surface I n the oral part O f the lateral surfac e is the long curved orbital
. ,

s ulcus ( s orbitalis ) one end of which lies close to the cruciate sulcus while
.
, ,

the other j oins the rhi nal fiss ure .

M edial s urf ace —Th e cr uciate B ulbu lf t iu s o a c or s

s ulcus is prolonge d as has been,

said to th e medial surfac e O f

,

th e hemisphere where it is very

,

generally c ontinuous wi th the

intercalary s ulcus ( s in t erc alaris)
.
,
tu s . cruci a s

so n amed bec ause of its inter m m“ _ 8 . 0 ,

p osition between the cruciate

s ulcu s on the one hand and the
c alc arine sulcus on th e other .
8 :

The calcarin e sulcus ( sulcus l t li _ s . a era s

calcarinu s ) one of the most im

,
t yl s e c os v i us
.

portant of th e c erebral grooves ,

forms an angle wi th the inter

c alary sulc us wi th which it is
c ontinu ous and is confined to
,

that part of the medi al surfac e in

p t yl i s os s v us
c ontact with the tentoriu m of th e
.

c erebellum B etween the margin

.

of the hemispher e and the inter

c alary and c alcari ne s ulci are one
or two secondary grooves of no
“m m “
g r eat depth and inc onstant in
8“ a a

disposition The medi a] surface

. FI G 66 —D l i w f th b l h m i ph . . ors a v e o e c ere ra e s e re .

of the hemisphere oral to the

cruciate sulcus is also indented by a n umber of grooves of no great moment .

A fissure of fundamental i mp ortance— the h ipp ocam p al fissure ( fi ss ur a

hippocampi ) —forms the medial b ou n dary O f the pyriform l obe .

D iss ection — P art of one c erebral he mi sphere should b e removed to a

level wi th the c orpus call osum This must be done by making a suc.

cession of slices in pl anes parallel to that of the c orpus The specimen .

in whi ch the two hemispheres have been separated by a longitudinal

i ncision is O f servi c e in acting as a guide to the di rection and dep th to
,

whi ch the slic es should b e removed A s soon as the c orpus callosu m can .

be plainly seen it is well to remove the remains of the c onvol ution

,
2 14 D ISS E CTI ON OF TH E D O G

immediately dorsal to it by tearing rather than c utting This is n e cessar v .

because the lateral ventricle a cavity roofed over b y the c orpus callosu m , ,

proj ects above t h e level of the medi al part of the body There is .
,

therefore danger of opening the ventricle if the slici ng process is co n tinu ed

, .

When sufli c ien t of one hemisphere has been removed th e other should b e
treated in the sa me way .

In the process of this di ssec tion some features O f the inner struc ture of
the c erebrum will b e revealed The depth O f some of the sulc i will be .

demonstrated and the fact that the c onvolutions are c omposed of an

,

outer r ind O f g rey matter enclosing a c ore O f white matter wi ll be di s

closed A s the sections become deeper the white c ores O f the c onvolutio ns
.

i ntercalari s
'

s .

s . sup rasp le n {al ts

s . cr uciatus

s . cal ca r i na
B ulbus
ol a ctor i us
f

Corp us callos u m

F is sura
‘
rh i na l is

FIG . 67 .
—Me di al sur fac e of th e c e reb ral h e mis ph e re .

bec ome c onfluent Finally a large island of white matter occ upies the
.

central part of th e sec tion of each hemisphere and is c onnected by th e ,

corpus c allosu m with a si milar island in the other hemisphere .

The study O f the c orpus c allosum is best carried out by an examinatio n

of the hemi se c ted brain in c onj u nc tion with that of the specimen j ust
-

di ssected .

CALL O S UM —The c orpus callosum is a broad trans verse band

C O R PU S .

mainl y c oncerned i n c onnec ting the two hemispheres with each other It wi ll .

be noted that it i s not c o extensive with the hemisphere but that it c oincides
-

roughly with the mid dle two fourths of the length of that struc tur e -
.

The dorsal surface of the c orpus ca llosu m is flat or has a slight c onvexity .

Numerous trans verse lines ( stri ae transvers ae ) denote that the body is main ly
c omp osed of c ommissural fibres I n addition faint longitudinal markings .
, ,

equivalent to the stri ae longitudinales O f the hu man brain may be detec ted ,
.
 2 16 D ISSE CTION OF TH E DOG

obj ec ts Of thes e the most anterior is a pear —

. shap ed grey emin enc e the ca udate ,

n uc leus ( nucleus caudatus ) th e narrow end of which is c ont inued into th e

,

inf erior c ornu Al ong the m edial border of th e caudate nucleus r uns a vascular
.

fringe the ch oroi d p lex us ( plexus c h orioideu s ventricu li lateralis ) Th e

,
.

appearanc e of the plexus might lead to the assump tion that it is ac tually
within th e ven tricle It is h o wever excluded from th e cavity b v a th iri
.
, ,

C orp us callosum

I
S ep tum p el lu ei da m

N ucl eus caudat us

Fem a
le

—S tria t er m i nali s

S tr i a medullaris

’
Corp us geni culzr
ég lg
t
Thala m us
l y a

Corp us g enz c ul t
gnydgl
r ‘

a e
C orp us p ineaIe

s Corp or a quadr igemi na

FIG . 68 .
—
D is se c t ion t o S h ow th e fl oor of the la te i al v e n t ri c e l and t h e doIs al pai t of t h e m id b ra in
-
.

cell ular investment th e ep end yma c ontinu ou s with that lining the whole
“

, ,

of the in terior of th e ventricle P arallel to and partiall y c ov ered by the .

, ,

choroid plexu s is th e edge of the f o r nix and its backward prolongati on the
, ,

fi m br ia h i
ppoca mp i The last nam ed i s a white hem append ed to the greyer
.
,

ro unded ridge like em inenc e th e h ipp oca m p us with the mention of which the
,
-
, ,

l ist O f c omponen t s of th e floor is c ompleted .

The an terior corn u ( cornu anterius ) of the ventricle is s tric tly S peaking , ,

a mere extension of the central part beyond the level of the foramen of M onro .
 D ISS E CTI ON OF TH E D OG 2 17 .

It inclines in a ventral direc tion and in th e dog ends blindly abou t the level , ,

of the tuberculu m olfac toriu m In many mammals the c ornu is c ontinuous

.

with the c avity of the O lfactory bulb .

The i nf erior corn u ( cornu inferius ) is a tapering curved prolongation of

the ventricle traceable into th e pyriform lob e where it ends on a level with ,

the point at which th e optic tract makes its appearanc e on the surfac e of
th e brain The c ornu c ontains th e tail of the caudate nucleus ( cauda nuclei
.

caudati ) reduc ed to a narrow grey ridge and th e diminished continuations of ,

the choroid plexu s fi m b ria and hippoc ampu s

, ,
.

S E P TU M P E LLUC I DU M —A thin medial partition separates the anterior

.

part of the pars centralis O f th e two ventricles and fills in the triangular gap ,

between the c orpus c allosu m and the fornix This is the septu m pellucidu m .
,

in reality c omp os ed of two thin lamin ae with a narrow chink like c avity -

in tervening .

D issection—T h e fornix must now b e expos ed as c ompletely as the present “

stage of the dissec tion permits Cut across the remains of th e c orpus .

callosu m about the genu and remove it from this po int to the spleni um
,
.

I ts c onnec tion with the septu m p ellucidum is necessarily destroyed in '

the proc eeding .

The h em ifisec t ed brain aff ords much assistanc e in th e study of the fornix ,

which there appears as a curved white band ventral to the c orpus ,

callosum .

F oR N I x — The fornix consists of two bands of longitud inal fibres pursuing

.

an arched c ourse and intimately c onnec ted with each other at one place .

The united bands c onstitute the body of the fornix ( corpus fornicis ) and are
related to the c orpus c allosum and the septu m pellucidum A t each end O f .

the body the two c onstituent parts of the fornix separate A t the anterior .

end the separation is not very great and results in the production of the colum n ae
f ornicis two roun ded white cords which curve v en tr alwards in front of the
,

foramen of M onro Continuing to the base of the brain the columns form
.

the prominent mammillary body the double character of which is thus ex ,

plained Fro m the posterior end O f the body of the fornix arise two crura
.

f or n icis These widely diverging are at first c onnected with the c orpus
.
, ,

callo su m Soon they form the white hem — fim bria h ippocampi— adh erent
.

to the h ippocampus ; and as such are c ontinued do wn the inferior cornu of

, ,

the lateral ventricle Some fibres of the crus fornicis are spread out as a white
.

laye r ( alveus ) on the surfac e of the hippocampus .

Dissection — Cut across the fornix about the point where the crura are
leavi ng the body Now with th e utmost car e remove th e isolated ab oral
.
, ,

part of t h e hemispheres ; i e th e hippocampus and adj ac ent part of. .

the wall of th e in ferior cornu of the ventricle .

2 18 D ISS E CTION OF TH E D OG

This is a c onvenient opportunity to study the association of the hippo

campal fissure of the exterior with the hippocampus in the interior It will .

be observed that the t wo co incide in position ; indeed the fissure ,

c auses the elevation of the hipp ocampus Between the hippocampal .

fissure and the fi m b ria hippocampi is a narrow somewhat c orrugated ,

strip the f ascia den tata hi ppoca mpi

,
.

T E LA C HO R IOI D E A V ENTR I CUL I TE R TII — Th e choroid tela of the third

.

ventricle is a triangular double fold of pia mater contain ing a layer of arachnoid
and some blood — vessels It is interposed between the fornix and part of the
.

hippocampus on the one side and the thalami on the other The apex of .

the triangle lies at the foramen of M onro Each of its sides is bounded by.

the choroid plexus of the central part of the lateral ventricle A t its base the .

tela di vides into its two c omponent sheets of pia mater c ontinuous w it h the
pia covering the surfac e of the brain generally .

The cleft in to which the choroid tela and the ch oroid plexuses of the inferior
c ornua of the lateral ventricles are insinuated is known as the tra n sverse ,

c er ebra l fis s ure ( fi ssur a transversa cerebri ) .

D issection — Seize the apex of the choroid tela with forceps an d strip it
from the surface of the thalami up on which it lies A s this is done .

the cleft like th ird ventricle will b e exposed

-
.

T HA LAM U S — The thalamus is an oval mass O f grey matter separated from

.

the c audate nucleus by an O blique groove c ontaining a narrow white b and the ,

stria term in a lis The dorsal surfac e of the thalamus is c onvex i n the main
.

and bounded medi ally by a prominent border formed by a longitudi nal ridge .

white in colour known as the m edulla ry str ia ( stria medullaris ) The anterior
,
.

end of the stria appears to j oin one of the c olumns O f the forni x wh il e p os ,

t eriorly it is apparently c onnected with the pineal b ody The medi al surfaces .

of the two thalami are flattened and form th e lateral wall s of the narro w
th ird ventricle Crossing the ventricle and uniting the two thalami is a thick
.
,

rounded grey bridge of tissue the i nter m ediate m as s ( massa intermedi a ) The
,
.

lateral and ventral surfaces O f the thalamus cannot be demonstrated at present ,

as they are in c onnection wi th other parts of the brain The lateral surface .

is in c ontact with a band of white matter kno w n as the in tern al capsule The .

ventral surface rests on th e dorsal or tegmental part of the cerebral peduncle

( th e hyp othalamu s ) .

CO R P US P IN E AL E —I n the middle line where the posterior part of the two

.

thalami are in c ontact the small and inconspicuous pineal body will be found
,
.

The base of the body c ontains one of the recesses of the third ventricle .

VENTR I CULU S TE R TI U S — The third ventricle is the narrow space between

.

the two thalam i The choroid tela forms the roof of the ventricle while its
.
,

floor c orresponds to the tuber cinereum mammillary body and the posterior
,

perforated substance A nteriorly the c av it v is b ounded by the terminal la mina

.
,
 2 20 D ISSE CTI ON OF TH E D OG

since i t bec omes buried immediately on leaving the c olli culus The .

brachiu m of the posterior c olliculus ( brachium quadrigemin um posterius ) 0 11 ,

the c ontrary is easily traced as a rou nded ridge like eminence runni ng i n
,
-

a ventral and nasal di rec tion to disappear u nder an oval white e mi n ence ,

the m edial gen iculate body .

C O R P O R A GE N I C U LA T A —
The genicul ate bodi es medial and lateral are
.
, ,

intimately c onnec ted wi th the thalamu s and the c orp ora quadr igemi na The .

lateral gen icu late body ( c orpus geniculatu m l aterale ) is closely applied to the

Camera qua dr ig em i na
Cerebellu m

Corp us geni c ulatum

mediate

11[ edulla Oblon at a

- !

I ibrae
'
ar c uata
e eater na
e

I
Tra ctus p edunculan s tra n s ver s us
l
1 P yram is
P edun culus cerebri
P ans
trochlea r is
n .

Corp us trap e zo d um
0

i e

FIG . 69 .
—La te ral aspe c t O f h ind b rain
-
and m id b rain
-
.

posterior part O f the thal amus and from i t the O ptic trac t appears to arise
,
.

The m edia l g en icu late body ( c orpus geniculatu m mediale ) is an oval eminenc e
between the optic tract and the brachium of the posteri or c oll iculus .

TR AC T U S O P TI CU S The op tic trac t in the form of a white b and c urves

.
-
, ,

obli quely round the lateral part of the cerebral peduncle To the naked eye .

it appears to c ommence in the lateral and medi al geniculate b o di es Micro .

sc op ic ally however its fibres are c onnected with the l ateral geniculate body
, , ,

the anterior c olliculus and the thalamus

P E DU N CUL I C E R EB R I —Forming the ventral part O f the mid —
.

. brain each ,

c erebral peduncl e i s divisible into two portions— the teg m en tum and the basis
p edun cu li Of these the basis pedunculi is the s maller and the more ventral
.
,
.

The superficial di stinc tion between the two parts is indicated by two grooves .

The la teral g roo ve ( sulcus lateralis ) is visible when the mid brain is viewed fr om -

the side and runs from the p e n s to the me di al geniculate body Th e extent
,
.

of the basis pedunculi in a medial dire c tion is marked by a groove from which
the roots of the oculomotor n erve take origin— the sulc us n ervi oculom otor ii .
 D ISS E C TI ON OF THE DO G 22 1

An indistinc t narrow ridge of fibres winds round the c erebral peduncle

begin n ing at the brachiu m of the anterior c olliculus and ending vaguely ab out
the mammillary body This is the tran sverse p edun cular f asc iculus ( fascic ul us
.

peduncularis transversus

D issection — Cu t across the mid —

brain making the sec tion through the ,

anterior colliculus but not so far forwards as to inj ure the geniculate
bodies .

A n examination of the c ut surface of the mid brain reveals the aquedu c t -

of Sylvius which p laces the third and fourth ventricles in c ommunication with
,

each other In general the outline of the aqueduct is lozenge shaped and
.
-

around it is a mass of grey nerve matter .

Th e di ff erentiation of the tegmentu m and basis p edunc uli can readily be

made by an observation of the position of the two grooves already noted on
the surface In addition a stratu m of nerve tissu e of somewhat different
.
,

colour lies between the two structures .

D issection — By a median incision separate the two halves of what remains

of the cerebrum Of one half make a series of hori zontal sec tions about
.
,

t wo or thre e mm thick The other half should be cut into slices by

. .

vertical transverse incisions In making these sections it is well to use a

.

broad bladed knife or a razor

-
.

C O R PU S ST R I A T UM ,
ETO .
—
The so c alled basal ganglia of the c erebral hemi
-

sphere c onsis t of masses of grey matter sep arated by intervening strata of

whit e matter The ganglia are the caudate and lentiform nuclei of the c orpu s
.

striatu m the claustru m and the amygdaloid nucleus

, , .

NUCL E U S CAUDA TUS —A partial examination of the caudate nucleus was

.

made after the lateral ventricle had been O pened The nucleus consists of a .

mass of grey matter of c urved p ear shaped form The h ead ( caput nuclei -
.

caudati ) is thick and forms a proj ection in the anterior cornu O f the ventricle .

From the head the nucleus tapers somewhat rapidly to a tail ( cauda nuclei
caudati ) which follows the inferior c ornu of the ventricle to end in the a myg
,

daloid n ucleus ( nucleus amygdal ae) in t h e roof of the extremity of the c ornu .

From what has previously been seen and from the sections now under exa m ina
tion it is manifest that two surfaces of the caudate nucleus may b e described
,
.

A free ventricular surfac e is c overed by the ependyma of the lateral ventricle .

A deeper surface is embedde d in the substance of the cerebral hemisphere and ,

is mainly in c ontact with the internal capsule .

NUCL E U S LE N T I F O R MI s —
The lentiform nucleus is an ir regularly lens
.

shap ed mass of grey matter placed lateral to the caudate nucleus and the
t halamus Smaller than the caudate nucleus it is c onnected with this by strands
.
,

O f g rey matter wh ic h c r oss the intervening white stratum In addition the

'

.
o f! )
c d
.d — D ISS E CTION OF TH E D O G

two nuclei are c onne c ted with each other and with the grey matter of the surfac e
of the hemisphere at the O lfactory tubercle .

CI A U S T R U M —
.
The claustru m is a very thin layer O f grey matter lateral
.

to th e corpus striatu m and very nearly c o e xtensive with the insula i e the ,
. .

c onvolutions hidden in the Sylvian fissure .

C AP S ULA INTE R N A — The

.
term internal ca p sule is applied to the white
matter separating th e caudate nucleus and the thalamus on th e on e S ide fro m
the lent iform nucleus on th e other The c ontin uity of the capsule is much .

interfered with anteriorly by the g rey strands cross ing from one nucleus t o
the other In horizontal sections th e capsule is bent opposite th e stria termi
.

n alis at what is known as th e k n ee of th e i nternal capsule ( genu capsul ae

intern ae ) The limb in front of the genu may be designated the f rontal part
.
'

pars frontalis capsul ae in tern ae ) and the limb behi n d the genu the occ ip ita l
( ,

p a rt of the capsule ( pars occipitalis capsul a e intern e

a ) .

Th e internal capsule is of great imp ortance since it contain s fibres derived

from or passing to various parts of the cerebral cortex Th e divergence of .

the fibres dorsal to the capsule is referred to as the corona radiata .

C AP S ULA E X TE R N A — The term external capsule is appli ed to the layer

.

of white matter between the lentiform nucleus and the claustru m .

R HO M BE N OE P H AL O N — A ttention must n ow be d irected to the h ind brain

.
-

c omposed Of the medulla O blongata the p e n s and the cereb ellum , ,

.

ME D U LLA OB L ON G A T A — A n arbitrary limit to the spinal c ord is made

.

on a level with th e foramen magnu m bu t when t h e bra in and c ord

have been removed from the b ody it is di fficult to say exactly where the cord
,

ends and the medulla O blongata b egins Th e medulla extends as far in a

.

nasal dir ection as the p e n s A t fir st it has th e same g en eralf orm as th e sp inal

.

cord ; but soon it becomes dorso ventrally flattened and expanded laterally
-
.

Th e increase in width is associated wi th th e O pen ing out of the c entral canal

( continued fr om the spinal c ord ) into the fourth ventricle .

The bilateral character O f the medulla O blongata is made manifest on the

surface by the presence of ventral and dorsal medi an fissures c ontin uous with
the like land marks of the spinal c ord Wh ile the ven tral m edian fissur e
-
.

( fi ssur a mediana ventralis ) can be traced a s far as the p e n s where it termin ates ,

abruptly at the f oram en c aecum it is not of uniform depth throughou t A bou t

,
.

the aboral end of the medulla O blongata nu merou s fibres pass from one side
to th e other ( the decussation of the pyr amids ) and cause the fissure to be very
shallow at this point The dorsa l m edia n fiss ure ( fi ssura mediana dorsalis ) i s
.

not so extensive It is c ontinued only to the extremity of the fourth ventricle

.
,

wh ere it apparently widens out in c onformity with the lateral divergence of

the t wo halves of the dorsal portion of the medulla O blongata .

A long each side of the ventral median fissure is a very defin ite strand of
nerve fibres known as the pyra m id of the medulla O blongata ( pyr amis [ me
dullaa Followed towards the cerebrum the pyramid disappears ,
2 24 D ISSE CTION OF TH E D OG

with a very shall ow antero posterior groove in the middle line The dorsal
-
.

surfac e assists in the formation of the floor of the fourth ventricle and will b e ,

examined later On each side the pons is c ontinued into the c erebellu m as
.

t h e brachi um p on tis .

A superficial examination of the p ons suffic es to S how that it is c omposed

largely of transverse fibres The greater part of these are superficial to the
.

pyramids Some however cross the dorsal aspec t of the pyrami ds and
.
, , , .

since they are more caudal than the superficial fibres form an elongated ,

transverse area the trap ez oid body ( c orpus trapezoideum ) on the surface of
,

the brain From the lateral part of this body the facial and acoustic nerves
.

have their superficial origin .

D issection — The course of the pyramids S hould be followed through the

pe ns This can be done by maki ng a longitudi nal incision across the
.

middl e of the p e n s and a similar i ncision j ust me di al to the origin of the

,

trigeminal nerve Now with a pair of forc eps tear away the superficial
.
, ,

transverse fibres of the p ons u ntil the pyramid is exposed The c on .

t in uity O f the pyramid with the basis pedunculi c an thus be demonstrated .

CE R EBE LLUM — The c ereb ellu m a transversely elongated rounded mass

.
, , ,

forms the dorsal and more bulky part of the hind brain For descriptive -
.

purposes three parts may be di stinguished namely a c entral vermis and two , ,

hemi spheres The vermis is the most prominent part of the organ and proj ects
.
,

beyond the level of the hemispheres as a rounded ridge more sharply defined ,

i n its c audal and ventral parts than elsewhere The h em isph ere later al in ’ . .

position is narrow anteriorly but rapidly widens A s mall lateral appendage

,
.

is conspicuous when the brain has been removed from the crani u m and is ,

received into a depression i n the temporal bone when the parts are in their
natural position It is with the hemisphere that the restiform body the
.
,

brachiu m p ontis and the brachiu m c onj unc tivu m are connected ; that is to
,

say access to the vermis is onl y O b tained by way of the hemisphere The
, .

restiform body and the brachiu m p ontis have been mentioned in c onnection
with the medull a O blongata and p ons respectively A t the present stage of .

the di ssection the brach ium con j un ctivum c annot be seen i n its entirety ,

bu t a glimpse O f it i s O btained between the brachiu m pontis and the

posterior colliculus of the c orpora quadrigemina .

The surface of the c erebellum is b eset with narrow ridges or j elia separated
by fis s ur es D eeper fissures c ut the cerebellu m into lobes the di sposition of
.
,

which c an be more easily studi ed i n sections as will be done presently It ,

.

S hould be observed however that the most lateral p art of each hemisphere is
, ,

separated from the rest by a fissure run ni ng i n a sagittal di rec tion The .

portion so defined is c omposed of the p ar afl oc c ul us and fl oc c ulus The p ara .

fiocculus c onsists of two rows of folia from the more ventral of whi ch proj ects
the p etro us lobule ( lobulus named from its l ocation in a fossa of
 D ISS E CTION OF T H E D O G 2 25

the petrou s p ortion O f the temporal bone Into the depths of the fissure .

between the p arafl oc c ulu s and the rest of the hemisphere the brachiu m pontis
c an be followed Between the p arafl oc c ulus and the origins of the facial and
.

ac oustic nerves is the fiocculus a small c ollection of folia separated from the
,

a r a fl occ u lus by a fissure of c onsiderabl e depth

p .

D issection — M ake a medi an sagittal sec ti on through the vermis of the

cereb ellum and the two medullary vel a — thin membranes forming th e
roof of the fourth ventricle By separating th e two halves of the cere
.

bellu m a view of the floor of the ventricl e may b e ob tained The cu t .

surfac e of the vermis should be examined and the arrangement of

the lob es and fissures noted .

AR BO R VI T z E — A sagittal section of the vermis of the cerebellum reveals

.

i n a very striking manner the peculiar arrangement O f grey and white matter .

The g rey matter forms a c ontinuous layer on the surface of the organ The .

whit e matter within as a c onsequence of the presenc e of nu merous fissures

, ,

presents a tree —like appearanc e in sections and therefore goes by the name of ,

arb or vit ae From the central mass O f white matter various branches radiate
. .

Of these two are c onspicuously large and form the c ore of th e two larges t
,

lobes of the c ereb ellum separated from each other by the deepest of the
c erebellar fissures .

B R AC HI UM C ONJ U N C TI VUM — Two of th e c onnections of the c ereb ellu m v iz

.
,
.

the rest iform b ody and th e brachium pontis have previously been examined , .

, ,
—
U p to the present however the third c onnection the brach ium conjun ctivum
c ould not b e examin ed 1 n its whole l ength If the two halves of the c erebellu m
.

b e separated as much as possible the brachiu m will be seen c onnected with the
hemisphere immediately within the brachiu m pontis Followed towards .

the mid brain each brachiu m runs in a s lightly medi al direc tion to disappear
-
,

under th e p osterior c olliculus of the c orpora quadrigemina .

ME D ULLAR Y V E LA —V entral to the cerebellu m and c onnected round

.
,

th e ends of the vermis wi th the white matter of this organ are two thin mem ,

branes which form th e roof of th e fourth ventricle Th e anterior m edullary .

velu m ( velum medullare anterius ) is a triangular membrane fill ing the space

b etween the two brachia conj unctiva Th e base of the triangl e bends round
.

th e end of the vermis and is c ontinuous with its white c ore .

The posterior m edullary velum ( velu m medullare p osterius ) is somewhat

mor e compli cated Its cereb ellar attachment stretch es from the median plane
.

— where it has a c onnection S imilar to that of the anterior velum — to the fl oc

culns The v e lum soon loses its nervous elements and gives plac e to a very
.

th in translucent membrane c omposed of pia mater lined internally with

ependyma This completes the p osterior part of the roof of the fourth
.

ventricle and is attached to the margin s of th e cavity _ .

VENTR I CULU S QUAR T U S — Th e fourth v entricle represents the cavity of

.

Q
226 D ISSE CTION OF THE D O G

the orig inal vesicle from which the h ind brain developed Consequently i t -
.

is in c ommunication with the c entral canal of the spinal c ord at the one end
and with the c avities of the rest of the brain at the oth er The opening of .

the central canal into the ventricle has a lready been commented upon If th e .

anterior medullary velum be raised the c ommunicati on with the aqueduc t O f

Sylvius — and through this with the third ventricle — will b e revealed .

In outline the cavity is rhomboidal ; henc e the name f ossa rh om boidea as

applied to its floor From the narrow caudal p art—calam us scriptor ius—it
.

widens to the level of the place where th e restiform bodies turn up into the
cerebellu m H ere the transverse diameter is materially increased by the
.

presence of latera l rec es ses ( recessus laterales ) which c urve round the c audal ,

aspect of the restiform bodies In front of the rec esses the ventricle narrows
.
,

to the entranc e of the aqueduc t of Sylvius .

The roof or dorsal wall of the ventricle is formed by the two medullary
vela and the thin pial c ontinuation of the posterior velum S een in sagittal .

section the roof is somewhat tent like being continu ed into a recess the
,
-

, ,

f astigiu m between the vermis attachments of the t wo vela The roof moreover
,
.
, ,

is rendered irreg ular on a level with the lateral rec esses by an invagina
tion produced by the ch oroid plexus ( plexus c h orioideus ventric uli qu arti ) .

That part of the plexu s which is relat ed to the recesses can readily be se e n
in the intact brain as a vascular tuft occ upying an angular depression formed
by th e c ereb ellum and medulla O blongata .

Th e membranous roof is defective at the extremity O f the lateral rec ess ,

where a small irregular opening the latera l ap erture ( ap ertura lateralis ven
,

t ric u li quarti ) places the cavity of the ventricle in communication with the
,

s ubarachnoid spac e .

The floor of the ventricle is formed by the medulla and pons D ivid ed into .

two lateral halves by a median longit udinal groove the floor is further sub ,

divided into areas A longitudinal lim iting groove ( sulcus limitans ) forms the
.

lateral boundary of an elongated and narrow medial area The li miting .

groove is quite Shallow but deepens a little at two places known as the anterior
,

and posterior f oveae A prominent m edial em in ence ( em in entia medi alis ) occ urs
.

about the middle of the length of the strip demarcated by the medi an and
limiting grooves A triangular area the h ypog lossal trigone ( trigonu m nerv i
.
,

h y poglossi ) intervenes between the posterior fovea and the median groove ,

while lateral to it is the grey ala cin erea A n elevated acoustic area ( area .

acustica ) forms a conspic uous obj ect lateral to the limiting sulcus and opposite
the recess of the ventricle .

D issec ti o n — It
is now necessary to rem ove the remain s of the muscles
attached to the vertebral c olumn the ribs the pelvis and the oc cipital
, , ,
2 28 D ISS E CTION OF TH E DOG

A T LA NTO E P IS TR O P H I C A —The j oint c avity of the atlanto

AR T I C U LA I I O
’
-
.

epistrophic articulation c onti nuous as previou sly stated wi th that of the

,

foregoing j o int is enclosed by the cu stomary j o int capsule Intimately

,
-
.

c onnec ted therewith and pass ing between the arches of the atlas and epist ro
,

p h e u s is a tector ia l m em bra n e ( membrana tectoria ) from whi ch an in ters pi na l

, ,

liga m en t ( ligamentu m interspinale ) may be separated wi th difficulty AS SO .

c iat e d wi th the dens of the epistropheus are a la r and tra ns v erse liga m en ts .

The former ( ligamenta alaria ) spring from the tip of the dens and di verging ,

proceed forwards to be attached wit h in the occipital c ondyles The transverse .

ligament ( li g transversum dentis ) al ong wi th the atlas forms a ring wit hi n

.
, ,

which the dens rotates .

AR TI CU LA I I O N E S
’
C O STO V E R TEB R AL E S — Sinc e a rib is in contac t by its
-
.

h ead wi th the b odi es of two vertebr ae and by its tub ercle wi th the transv ers ,

process of the more c audal of the two vertebr ae it foll ows that there are t wo ,

j oints between a typical rib and the vertebral c olumn .

The ca p itula r a rticulation ( articulatio c ap itu li ) p ossesses two j oint c avi ties -
,

corresp ondin g to the two vertebral b odi es wi th which the head of the rib i s
i n c ontac t and separated from each other by an interarticular ligament to
,

whi ch the two j oint cap sules are attached The in tera rtic ula r ligam en t (li g
-
. .

c ap it uli c ost ae in t er ar tic u lar e ) springs from the depression on the head of the

rib and passes to the mid dl e plane of the body where it is c ontinuous wi th the
,

same li gament of the c orrespon di ng j oint of the other side of the body Broad .

at its attachment to the head of the rib the li gament narrows as it lies u nder ,

c over of the dorsal longitudi nal ligament of the vertebral c olumn There is .

a sli ght c onnection between the ligament and the intervertebral fi b re cart ilage -
.

O n the ventral aspect of the j oint is the radiate liga m en t ( lig capit a li c ostai .

radiatum ) with fibres extendi ng in a ra diating fashion from the neck , ,

of the rib to the bodi es of the verte br ae and the interp osed intervertebral
fi b r O cartil age
-
.

The c osto — tra n svers e a rtic ula tio n ( articulatio c osto —

tr an s v e r saria) between the
tubercle of the rib and the transverse process of the vertebra i s provi ded wi th ,

the cu stomary j oi nt capsule In addi tion there are a dor sal ligam en t and
-
.

the li gament of the neck The former ( lig c osto tran sv er saria dorsale ) passes
“

. .
-

from the vertebral transverse process to a p oint on the rib immedi ately lateral
to the tubercle The ligam en t of th e n ec k ( li g c olli c ost ae ) runs between the
. .

vertebra and the dorsal aspec t of the neck of the rib .

AR TI CULA TIO S ACR O I L I ACA — The slightly moveable articulation between

-
.
~

the sacru m and the iliu m is provi ded wi th a very short j oint capsule Ligamen t s -
.

di sposed i n the vi ci ni ty of the j oint all tend to restric t its range O f movement .
 D ISS E CTION OF TH E D O G 2 29

The ven tra l sacro iliac ligam en t ( lig s ac ro iliacu m ventrale ) c onsists of short
-
.
-

fibres j oi ni ng the sacr um and i liu m and li es as its name i ndi cates ventral to , , ,

the j oint S hort and long sa cro iliac liga m en ts ( lig sacro iliacu m dorsale breve
.
-
.
-

e t lig
. s ac rO iliacu m
-
dorsale longum ) c onnec t the iliu m wi th the spi nous
processes and the lateral border of the sacrum respectively .

A t some distanc e from the sacro — i liac j oint b ut c onveni ently considered ,

i n this place is the sacro tuber o us ligam en t ( lig sacro tuberosum ) whi ch
,
-
.
-

s tretches in the form of a stout c ord from the edge of the sacrum to the
sciatic tub er of the is chium .

SY M P H Y SIS P E LV I s —The two pubes and the two is c hia j oin in the medi an
.

plane at the symphysis of the pelvis Occasionally in O ld ani mals the u ni on .

becomes bony A few transverse fibres crossing the ventral aspec t of the
.
,

symphysis c onstitut e the a rcuate ligam ent ( lig arcuatum )

,
. .

O R G A N O N A U D I rU s — I t now remains for the di ssec tor to c omplete the

.

di ssection of the organ of hearing by an examination of the internal ear and

the cavity O f the tympanu m To do this with any degree of satisfaction i t
.
,

is necessary to have s everal specimens so that sections across some of them ,

may b e made with a fine saw whil e one at least is exami ned after piece meal
,
-

removal of parts of the bone .

P rior to c ommencing the di ssection of the internal ear and the ca v ity of
the tympanu m it wo ul d b e well that the student have some general idea of
,

the audi tory apparatus as a whole The organ of hearing is naturally di vided .

into three parts an external ear or auricle ( auricula ) a middl e ear or c avi t y ,

of the tympanum and an i nternal ear An examination of the cartilages of

, .

the external ear and the mus c les c oncerned in the production of their movements
was c onduc ted at an earli er stage of the di ssection The canal circ umscribed .

by the external ear is known as the externa l acoustic m eatus ( m e atii s acusticu s
externus ) and is partially bounded by the temporal bone The meatus ter .

m in at e s at th e m em bran e of th e tym p an um ( membrana tympani ) by w hi ch ,

.

its cavi ty is s eparated from that of the tympanum .

The cavity of the tympanu m or mi ddle ear is a space within the tempora l , ,

bone c onnected wi th the interior of the pharyn x by the a uditory tube of

E ustachius ( tuba au di tiva Cr oss ing the cavity from the membrane
of the tympanu m to its inner wall is a chain of three auditory ossicles by
-

way O f which vibrations of the tympanic membrane are transmitted to th e

internal ear . The air c ontain in g cavity of th e osseous bulla of the temp oral
-

bone is in free c ommunication with the tympani c cavity .

The internal ear consists of a series of spaces and canals with in the tem
poral bone to which is given the collective name of osseous labyrin th ( lab yrinth us
,
230 D ISS E CT ION OF TH E D O G

osseus ) containin g membranous sacs and t rib es th e m embranous labyrin th

,
m

( labyrinthus membranaceus ) The central space of the osseous labyrinth the

.
,

ves tibule ( vestibulum ) in the dried skull c ommunicates with the cavity of the
,

tympanum by an oval opening th e f en es tra Of th e vestibu le ( fenestra vestibuli )

,
.

In the fresh state and in the living animal the fenestra is occluded by the base
of the stapes one of the auditory ossicles In the posterior p art O f the vesti
, .

bule are fin e op en ings lead ing into the three s em icirc ula r ca n als ( canales semi
c ir culares ossei ) while in the lower and anterior part of the cavity is an O pening
,

into the sp iral canal of the cochlea The c och lea itself resembles the shell o f
.

a snail and c onsists essentially of the spir al canal wound round a c entral
,

c olu mn of bone designated the mo diolus Th e spiral canal ends blindly at th e .

apex of the co chlea where it forms the cupola ( cupula ) Into the canal a
,
.

s p ira l la m i n a of bone ( lamina spir alis ossea ) proj ects for some distanc e from

its in ner ( modiolar ) wall ; thus th e canal is partially divided in to two c om

p ar t m e n t s one of which the scala ves tibu li c ommunicates with the vestibule
, , ,

th e other the sca la tym pan i in th e mac erated bone open ing by a small rounded
, ,

aperture — the f en es tra of th e coch lea ( fenestra c ochle ae ) — into th e cavity of

the tympanum In the fresh c ondition the fenestra is closed by a membrane
. .

The membranous labyr inth consists of the saccule the utricle three , ,

semicir cular ducts and the cochlear duct The sa ccule ( sacculus ) and th e .

u tr icle ( utriculus ) are lodged in the vestibule and are placed in in d irec t ,

c ommunication with each other by m eans of the en dolym phatic duct ( ductu s
endolymphaticus ) Th e semicircular ducts ( duc tus semicirculares ) occupy th e
.

three bony semicircular canals and are in c ommunication with the utricle .

The cochlear duct ( duc tus cochlearis ) is attached on the one side to the ,

outer wall of the spiral canal of the c ochlea and on the other to the edge O f ,

the b ony spiral lamina A t the base of the c ochlea the duct is c onnected with
.

the saccule by a narrow un iting duct ( ductus reuniens ) The bl ind apical .

termination of the duc t does not quite reach the cupola of the c ochlea thu s ,

allowing a c pm m un ic ation between the scala vestibuli and the scala tympani .

D issectio n — A s previously stated it is scarc ely possible to make a c om,

p le t e dissec tion of the c ar on one specimen only In order to exam in e .

the cavity of the tympanu m the lower part of the osseous bulla should
b e removed bit by bit a ring of b one b ein g left roun d the external
,

acoustic meatus In order to demonstrate the tympanic membrane

.

properly it is necessary to remove the cartilages of th e auricle

, It .

will be observed that the cavities of th e tympanu m and of the osseou s

bulla c ommunicate with each other by a wide opening bounded by th e
serrated edge of a thin plate of bone .

CAV U M T Y M PA NI
The tympanic cavity is a narrow air c ontaining
.
-

,
-

chamber between the internal ear and th e end of the external acoustic meatus .

Its outer wall is formed almost entirely by the thin transluc ent tympan i c ,
 IND EX

AB D O M E N 15 , Ar te rie s Caudal t h yr oid, 149

:
A c c es sory panc reat ic duc t ( of S antorini ) , Central , of ret i n a , 18 8
39 Ce re bro spin al , 1 68
-

A c oustic are a ( of f our t h v ent ric le ) 22 6 , Ch oroidal , 2 08

A dit us of a q u educ t Of S yl v i us 2 19 , Cir c u m fl e x sc apular, 1 2 4
Ag greg at e d lym ph n odul es of P eyer 2 7
-
, C oeli ac , 39
Ala c in ere a, 2 2 6 Com m on c arot id, 5 5, 1 49 , 1 63
A m yg dal oid n uc leus , 2 2 1 int erosseous ,
138
Ann ul ar c artilag e , 1 5 0 Con dyloid, 168
An teri or c om mi ssur e , 2 19 Cost o c erv ic al trun k, 55
-

f o v e a, 2 2 6 Crani al epig as tric , 12 30 ,

ll r l
m edu a y v e um , 22 5 l l
g ut ea , 85 , 1 1 1
r r
p e f o at e d su b st an c , 2 10 e rr i l
h aem o h o da , 26
i l l
A ort c se mi un ar v a v e s, 54 m esent e c , 25 ri
l r l
A ppe ndi x of a yn ge a v e nt c e, 1 7 9 ri l t h yr o d, 149 i
l i
A queduc t of S y v u s, 2 19 , 2 2 1 i l
v e s c a , 1 1 0, 1 1 6

A que ous h u m our of e ye b a , 1 8 9, 19 3 ll r r

Deep a te y of arm , 1 2 4
i
Ar a c h n o d, 2 02 , 2 06 i
p en s , 1 1 1
Ar b or v it ae, 2 2 5 r i l
c e v c a , 55
Arran ge m e n t of c ar di ac o fi c e s, 5 7 ri i
c irc u m fl e x li ac , 7 3

Ar e al c r c e of W llis , 2 09
t ri i l i r l
f em o a , 80
vo al r r a c h , 1 39 , 142

An g ul ar, of m out h , 1 5 8 r i l
Defe ent a , 1 10
A nt erior aur ic ul ar, 1 60 r i l l r l
Distal ad a c o l at e a , 1 2 4
bronc hial , 30 r r ri i
D o sal a te es of pen s , 9 , 1 1 1
r l r 2 07
c e e b el a , i l
dig t a , 8 8 , 1 2 9
cere b ral 2 08 , r
int e osse ou s, 1 3 8
c irc umfl ex h u m eral , 1 23 r l
m et at a sa , 9 2
c omm uni c at ing , 208 l
n asa , 159
fe m oral , 7 7 8 0 ,
r i i
D o sal s p ed s, 9 2, 101
m e di astin al 3 0, 42 ,
i l
E t h m o da , 188
t i b i al , 9 2 9 7 ,
r l r i
E xt e na c a o t d, 1 64
A ort a, 54 , 5 9 7 2 ,
i
il ac , 7 5
Artery of ure t h ral b ul b , 1 1 1 i r
m ax ll a y, 1 6 4
Ar t ic ul ar art ery ( from f e m oral ) , 7 9 l
pude nda , 10
A sc en ding c ervi c al , 5 , 56 i l
F ac a , 1 58 I
p h aryng e al, 1 49 r l
Fem o a , 7 7
A x ill ary, 4 1 2 3,
r l
F ont a , 188
B asil ar, 207 r
Gast o -duoden a , 40 l
Brac hial, 1 2 4 l
- ie n a l, 40

B rac hi o c eph alic , 5 4

- r tr l i
G e a e pa at n e , 1 83
Bronc hi al , 6 1 i
H epat c , 40
B uc cin at or, 1 82 l i
Hya o d, 19 2
Caudal epig astric , 12 ri
Hypog ast c , 1 1 0, 1 1 6
g lut e al , 85
'

i
Il e o-c aec o c ol c , 2 5
-

m ese nt eric , 26 i r
Il o lum b a , 1 1 1
-
2 34 IN DE X

A rte rie s : Inf erior l l r 1 65

a v eo a , A rt erie s : R ig h t co lic , 25
l abial 1 58 , c o on a r ry , 51
Infraorb it al , 1 59 1 8 2 , g as t c , 40 ri
In te rc ost al , 2 9 , 6 1 , 6 2 g ast o ep p o c , 40 r -
i l i
Inte rnal audi t ory, 2 07 sub c av i an, 55 l
c arot id, 1 68 1 9 7 2 08 , , S aph enous, 7 7 , 8 0 9 4 ,

m am m ary, 3 0, 4 1 5 6 , S ph eno pa at n e, 1 8 3 -
l i
m a xill ary, 1 65 18 2 , l i
Sp e n c , 40
p ude n dal, 1 1 0 l
S ty o m ast o d, 1 64 i
-

s perm at i c , 7 3 l
S u b ing ua , 1 64 l
In te st in al , 2 5 r
S ub sc apul a , 1 2 3
Lac h rym al, 1 8 7 r i ll
S upe fi c a at e al c auda , 11 1 r l
L aryn g eal, 149 t e m po a , 1 60 r l
L ate ral c irc umfl e x fem oral, 7 7 , 80 ri r l i l
S upe o ab a , 1 59
n asal , 1 59 r r l
S up em e in te c ost a , 55
t ars al , 9 4 r r l
T h o ac o ac omi a , 4 -

t h orac i c , 5 r l
do sa , 1 2 4
Le ft 00110, 2 6 i
T h ym c , 42
c oron ary, 5 1 r i l
Tran sverse c e v c a , 2 8, 5 6
g as tric , 40 i l
f ac a , 1 59, 1 60
g astro epi pl oic , 40 l r
s c apu a , 5 , 5 6
-

su b c l avi an , 5 4 , 5 5 l r
U na , 140
Le sser pal at ine, 18 2 i l
U m b lic a , 1 1 0, 1 1 1
Ling ual , 1 64 r
U t e in e , 1 1 6
Lum bar, 7 3 r l
V e te br a , 55 , 1 5 5
Media] t arsal, 1 01 l r i l
V o a dig t a , 1 40
Me di an , 13 8 i r
nt e osse ous , 1 3 9
M ent al 1 65 ,
r l
m e t ac a p a , 142
Middl e c erebral 2 08 , A R T I C UL A TIO N S
c oli c 25 , At lant o e pist rophi c 2 2 8 -
,

h aem orrh oidal 1 1 1 , 227

-
oc c ipit al, -

m e nin g e al 1 6 5 1 98 , , r
C a po m et ac arpa , 144
-
l
s ac ral 1 14 Cost o v e t eb a , 2 2 8
-
r r l
Musc ulo ph reni c -
, 30 i i l
D g t a , 106
O c c ipit al , 1 68 l i
E b ow j o n t , 1 4 3 -

( E soph ag e al 6 1 , Hip j oint , 8 6

-

O m o c er v ic al trunk, 5 , 5 6
-
H u m e o adi a , 143 r r -
l
O ph t h alm i c , 1 8 2 , 1 8 7 - uln a
, 1 43 r
P an c re at ic o-duode nal , 40 r
Int e m e t at a sa , 1 06 r l
P eric ardi ac o ph re ni c , 30, 4 1
-
r r l
I n t e st e na syn c h ond oses, 35 r
Pe rin eal 1 1 1 , Kn ee j oint , 1 02
-

P h reni c 7 2 , r
L a yn g ea , 1 80 l
P hr enic o -
ab domi n a l , 72 M an di b u a , 193 l r
Plant ar r
a ch , 1 01 M r
e t at a so ph a ang e a , 1 06 -
l l
i l
di g t a , 101 i r
P is f o m , 1 44
m et at arsal , 101 i
R ad o c arpa , 14 3 -
l
Poplit e al , 9 7 ul na , 14 3-
r
P oste rior auric ul ar, 164 r ii
S ac o l ac , 2 2 8-

r ll ar 2 07
c e eb e , r i
S h oul de j o n t , 1 42 -

c erebral 207 , r l
S t e n o c osta , 3 5 -

c ili ary 1 8 8 , Sym ph ysis of t h e pe vis, 2 2 9 l

c irc u mfl e x h u m e ral 1 24 , l r l
T a o c ur a , 1 04
-

c om m uni c at in r r l
T a so m e t at a sa , 105
g 2 08
-
,

de e p t em poral 1 6 5 , i i
T b o fi b ular, 104-

f e m oral 8 1 , r rl
V e te b a , 2 2 7
m e ning e al 1 68 , i l i l
A ry ep g ott c f o ds, 1 7 6
-

Proper dig it al 88 , e i ri
Aryt n o d c a t l ag e s, 1 7 5
Proxim al radial c oll ateral 12 4 12 9 , , i e
A udi t v e t ub of E u st ac hi us , 1 74,
ul nar c oll at eral 1 2 4 , r il
A udi t o y oss c e s, 2 3 1
R adi al 1 39 ri l r
Au c es of h ea t , 4 9
R e nal 7 3, il
A x l a, 4
2 36 IND E X
GA LL B LA D D E R , 36 , 6 4
-
L A CHR YMA L 15 5 r
c a un c e, l
GA N GLIA : duc t s, 1 55
Caudal m e se nt eric , 26 g and, 1 85 l
Ciliary, 1 8 7 Lamina c h o o c api la is , 1 90 ri -
l r
Coeli ac , 6 6 f usc a, 1 9 0
Crani al c erv ic al , 16 7 t e m ina is , 2 1 5r l
m esen t eric 2 5 , 66 , v asc ul osa , 1 9 0
First t h orac ic , 6 1 r
L a g e in t est in e , 1 9
Gasseri an 1 9 7 , r l r
L a yn g ea p omi nenc , 1 75 e
J ugul ar, 1 6 6 r
L a yn x , 1 7 4
N odose, 16 6 r l r r
L ate a ape tu e ( of f ourt h v ent c e ) , 2 2 6 ri l
O tic , 1 8 4 r
g oov e ( of m id b a n ) , 2 2 0 -
r i
S ph eno palatine , 1 83 -
r
ecess ( of f our t h v ent c e ) , 2 2 6 ri l
S pin al 2 03 , v en t c e , 2 15 ri l
Gel at inous sub st anc e of R ol ando 2 05 , f ri
Le t at um of h e a t , 5 3 r
Gen ic ul at e b odies 2 20 , ri l
v en t c e of h e a t , 5 4 r
Gl osso epig l ott ic f old 1 7 3
-
, i r
Lent f o m n u c eus , 2 2 1 l
pal at in e arc h 1 69 r
Le sse om en t um , 2 3
-
,

Glott is 1 7 6 , LIGA M E N T S
Great er o m entum 1 8 2 3 , , Alar 2 2 8 ,

Grey c om missures ( of spin al c ord) 205 , Arc uat e 2 2 9 ,

Groov e s of spin al c ord 2 03 , B road ( of u t erus ) 68 ,

Calc an eo c ub oid 1 05 -
,

fi b ul ar, 1 04 -

HA R D E R S Gland 1 8 8
’
,
-n a vi
c ul a , 105 r
H ard palate 17 1 ,
l er l
Col at a s of c a pus, 144 r
H eart 48 ,
ri r i
C c o t h y o d, 1 7 5 , 1 7 7
-

H epat ic duc ts 6 5 ,
r i
C u c ate, 1 03
Hilus of kidn ey 7 0 ,
Cub oide o n av c ul a , 1 05 -
i r
H in d brain 2 2 2
-
,
l i
D e t o d, 1 04
Hippoc am pal fi ssure 2 13 ,
i
D ent c ulat e , 2 02
H ippoc am pus 2 16 ,
l l
D orsa at ant o oc c p t al m e m bran e, 19 4, 227 -
i i
H yaloid c an al 19 2 ,
c ost o t ran s v e se , 2 2 8 -
r
fossa, 19 2 l
on g t u din a , 22 7 i l
m e m b rane , 1 90 ,
r l
t a sa , 1 04
H ypoglossal trigone , 22 6 i r l r l
F bul a c o l at e a , 103
Hypoth al am us 2 1 8 ,
r l l
Gast o i en a , 1 8 -

Hyo th y o d, 1 7 5 , 1 7 7
r i
-

l r
I n g uin a ( of P oupa t ) , 10

ILE UM , 19
rri l r
I nt e a t c u a , 228

I nc is or p apill a, 1 7 2
tr r l
I n e c a pa , 1 44
In c is ors 17 1
r l r r
I nte n a p rope ste nal, 35

I n c us, 2 3 1
,
r r
I nte o sse ou s m em b ane ( of o e a m ) , 14 3 f r r
Inguinal c anal, 1 4 ( of t h e leg ) , 104
I nsul a, 2 1 2
t a sa , 1 06 r l
In t er aryt e n oid c art ilage, 1 7 5
-
r i l
I nt e sp n a , 22 7 , 22 8

I nterior of t h e duoden um , 67
rr re
Inte t ans v e s , 2 2 7
int est ines, 27
r l l l
L at e a at ant a , 2 2 7
kl dne3 7 0
i
L g am en t of nec k of rib 2 2 8
‘

{
4 3 13 3 11 133 fl av a’ 2 2 7
Inte rm e di at e m ass, 2 1 8 8
am e n t u m D U Oh 38 , l 54
Int ern al c ap sul e , 2 1 8 222
Int erpe dun c ul ar f ossa, 2 06 , 2 09
,
n ong Plan t al
j g
105 ‘

In t er v e ntric ul ar f oram e n of M onro,

s ac o i h ac , 2 2 9r -

h rs , 19 1
r
N avi c ul a c une f o m , 105 -
i r
Ist h m us f auc i um , 17 0
el r
P at l a , 1 02
e
P c t in at of is, 1 9 1 e ir
Pisif o m , 1 44 r
l
P an ta , 1 05 r
J EJ U N UM ’ 1 9 l
P u m on a y , 3 4 r
l
R adi a an nu a , 1 43 l r
ll r l
c o at e a , 1 43 , 1 44
K m N E Y s , 69 i
R ad at e , 228
 IND E X 23 7

Lig ame nts : Radiate terno c ostal

s -
, 35 M odiol us 2 30 ,

i
R ad o c a pa , 14 4 -
r l M ol ars 17 1
,

R ound ( of h ip ) , 8 6 M outh 169

,

( o f u e us ) , 6 8 tr Musc nns
r t r
S ac o ube o us, 2 2 9
-
A bduc tor of t h e fil th dig i t 99 , 14 1 ,

r r ii
S h o t sac o l ac , 22 9 -
lle
p o x , 1 34, 14 1
r i l
S up asp na , 2 2 7 A dduc tor of t h e f r
emu , 79

r l
S uspen so y of en s, 1 9 2 i
fi f th d g i t , 100, 1 4 1
l l
T a o c a c ane an , 104, 1 05
-
l
p o le x , 14 1
- fi b ular
, 104
se c on d di g t , 10Ci
) , 14 1
ri l
T ec to a m e m b ane , 2 2 8 r A n c on e u s 1 2 8 ,

r
T e m po o m and bu a , 1 93 -
i l r A no -
r 1 16
v ul v a ,

T h yr o ep g ott c , 1 80
-
i l i A n t erior ti b i al 8 9 ,

i i l
T b a c o ate a , 1 03 ll r l A ntitrag ic us 1 5 2 ,

r r
T ansv e se ( of den s ) , 2 2 8 A ryt enoid 1 7 8 ,

( of h ip j o n ) , 8 6 -
i t A uric ul ar 1 5 1 ,

ri l r li r
T ang u a ( of v e ) 65 B ic eps brac h ii 1 2 0 ,

l r l r l
U n a c o l ate a , 14 3, 1 4 4 f e m or is 8 2 ,

V e ntral atlant o oc c ipit al m e mbrane -

, 2 27 B i v enter c ervic is 1 5 3 ,

l ongitudin al 2 2 7 ,
Brac h ialis 1 28 ,

s ac ro ili ac 2 29 -
,
Brac h io c e ph alic 1 18 -
,

V e ntric ular 1 8 0 , radial 1 30 -

,

Voc al 1 79 , B uc c inat or 156 ,

L i m iting sulc u s 2 2 6 ,
B ul bo c av ernous 9 1 10
-
, ,

Linea al ba 1 3 , Cani n e 15 6 ,

L ing ual p apill ae 1 7 2 ,

C apsularis 86 ,

sep t u m , 1 73 Cerat o h yoid 1 66-

,

Lips 1 7 0
, Cil iary 1 90 ,

L i v er 3 5
, Cl e ido c erv ic al 1 18
-
,

L ob es of li v er 6 3 , m ast oid 1 1 8
-
,

L ong it udin al fi ssure ( of brain ) , 2 06 Coc c yg e us, 1 07 , 146

g oo v er ( of h e art ) , 50 Co mm on e x te n sor of t h e di g its, 89 , 1 30
Lum b ar en lar ge m en t ( of spin al co rd) , 2 02 Co m ple x us, 1 5 3
L u n g s 42 , Corac o b rac h i al , 1 2 1
-

Lym ph glands -
, 4, 1 0, 25 , 2 7 , 4 8 , 7 3, 8 3, 1 1 0, 1 4 8 Corrug ator of e ye bro w, 1 55
Cric o p h aryn g eus, 1 6 6
-

t h yr o d, 1 7 7
-
i
Cut ane o us, 1 1 7
M A LE e x ternal ge n ital parts 5 ,
D eep fl e x or of t h e d g ts, 96, 99 , 1 3 6 i i
M alle us 2 3 1 , g ute a , 8 3 l l
M am m ary g lan ds 1 , p ec o a , 2 t r l
M am m ill ary b o dy 2 06 2 09 , , i
Delto d, 12 6
Max ill ary sinus 2 00 ,
i r
D aph ag m , 7 1
M e at us n asi 19 9 ,
i ri
D g as t c , 1 6 2
Medi al em inenc e ( of fourth v entric le ) 2 2 6 ,
r l ri r i
Do sa c c o a yte no d, 1 7 8 -

M edian fi ssure ( of spin al c ord) 2 03 ,

se rrat us, 1 4 5
l on g it udinal fi ssure ( of m e dulla) 2 09 ,
r
s t aigh t ( of t h e h e ad) , 1 54

s e p t um ( of sp i n al c ord ) 2 05 ,
r i i
E x t en so of t h e fif t h d g t , 90
Mediastin al sept um 3 1 3 4 , ,
r r
E xt e nso s of t hir d, f ou t h an d fif t h d g t s, 1 32 i i
Medulla O blon g at a 206 2 22 , ,
r l r r
E x te n a c e m ast e , 6
Me dull ary striae 2 18 ,
q l
o bli ue ab dom in a , 1 0

v el a 2 2 5 ,
r r
o b tu at o , 8 2

Me m brana nic titans 1 55 1 8 8 , ,

r i
p t e yg o d, 18 2
t ym p an i 2 2 9 2 30 , ,
r i
Gast oc n e m us, 9 4
M em branous labyrinth 2 30 , Ge m elli 8 3 ,

Menisc i 103 , Gen io g lossal 1 62

-
,

Mesent ery 1 9 2 3 , , h yoid 1 6 3

-
,

M esoc ol on 2 3 , Grac ilis 7 7 ,

M esom e trium 68 , H elic is 15 2 ,

Mesosalpinx 6 8 , Hyo e pig l ot tic 1 80

-
,

M esov arium 6 8 , g lossal 16 3

-
,

Mid brai n 2 19
-
, ph aryng eus 16 6
-
,
23 8 IN D E X
M u l s Iliac us 74
sc e : , M usc le s Proper ext ensor of t h e sec ond dig i t 133 ,

Ili o c ost ali s 1 45

-
, P soas m aj or , 74
-
p soas, 74 , 8 0 m inor, 74
ii
I nc s v e, 1 5 6 P t e ryg o ph aryng e u s, 16 6
-

ri r li q e
I nfe o o b u ( of e ye ) , 1 8 7 Q u adrat e of upper lip 156 ,

fr
In aspin ous , 12 6 Q uadrat us f e m ori s , 82
r l
I n t e c ost a , 2 9 l um b orum , 7 4
r e
I n t e m e di at v ast us , 8 6 p an t ae, 99 l
r l lq
I nt e na o b i ue ab dom n a , 1 1 i l ri
Q uad c e ps fe m o s , 86 ri
o b t urat o , 8 5 , 1 12 r R ad a i le
x t e n so of t h e c a p us , 1 3 0 r r
pt e yg o d, 18 1 r i fl e x or of t h e c a pu s 1 3 5 r ,

r
I nt e osse ous , 1 00, 14 1 R e c t us f e m o s , 86 ri
rr
In t e t an sv e se , 15 4 r r r
R e t ac t o ( of e ye ) , 1 8 7
I sc hi o c av e n ous , 1 10
-
r of t h e p e n s , 1 1 0 i
-ur e t h a
, 1 10 rl R h om b o d, 1 1 9 i
l i
J ug u o h yo d, 1 66
-
i ri
R so u s , 1 5 6
r l ri r
L at e a c c o a yt e no d, 1 7 9 -
i r
S ac o c oc c yg e a , 1 4 6
-
l
r i
st a g h t m u sc e of t h e h l ead
, 18 1 r ri
S a t o us , 7 7
83
v ast u s, l
S c a e n u s, 2 8
i i
L at ss m u s do s , 10, 1 20 ri l r
S c ut u a , 1 5 1
Le v at o ani, 108r i r
S em m em b anosus, 7 9
of sof t p a at e , 1 65 l i i i
S em sp nal s c ap t is , 1 5 3 i
of t h e u p p e e y i d, 1 5 5, 1 86 r el do s e t c e v c s, 145 1 53 ri r i i
li p , 1 5 6 S e m it endin osu s, 80
e r
L v at o s of t h e r b s , 14 6 i r e
S h o t x t en sor of t h e d g ts, 9 1 i i
i
L n g ua , 1 7 3 l fi e x or of t h e d g t s , 9 8 i i
Long ab duc t o of t h e po e x , 1 3 4 r ll fif th dig t , 142 i
e x t e n so r
of t h e di g t s , 89 i po x , 1 4 1 lle
h a ux, 9 1 ll p e on e a , 90 r l
p o l e x , 1 33 l i r
S ph nc t e of t h e anus , 1 08
fl e x or of t h e di g t s, 96 i eyel ds, 1 55 i
h a l ux , 9 6 l i p s, 1 5 6 l
i i
L on g ss m us c ap t s et at ant s, 153 ii l i pupil , 19 1
c e v i c s , 1 53 r i v u v a, 1 16 l
do s 145 ri . l i
S p en u s , 1 5 2
r
L ong p e one a , 90, 102 l e i
S t ap d us, 2 3 1
L on g us c ap t s, 1 8 1 ii r
St e ne c eph a c , 1 18
-
li
l
c o li , 1 8 1 h yo d, 148
-
i
ri l
Lu m b c a , 99 , 14 1 t h y o d, 14 8
-
r i
M l r
a a , 15 6 r i
S t a g h t abdom n a , 1 2 , 1 3 i l
M r
a s se t e , 1 5 6 , 1 5 9 m u sc e s of t h e eye, 1 8 7 l
M i l
e d a v a s t us , 7 9 l l
S t y o g os s a , 1 6 2
-
l
Mi l l
dd e g ut e a , 83 l -h
yo d, 1 62 i
Mult ifi dus , 145 , 15 4 -
ph a yn g e u s, 166 r
M l
y o h yo d, 1 49
-
i S ub m u lt ifi du s, 1 45
N aso lab a , 1 5 6
-
i l l r
S ub sc apu a , 1 2 0
li l
O b q u e m u s c es of t h e h e ad, 1 54 er i l
S up fi c a fi e xor of t h e d g t s, 1 35 i i -

i i l
O c c p ta , 1 5 2 g ut e a , 82 l l
r
O m o t an s v e se , 1 19
-
r p ec t o a , 2 r l
O pp on e ns p o c s , 14 1 lli i ri r
S upe o ob i q u ( of eye ) , 1 8 6 l e
il r
P a p l a y ( of h e a t ) , 5 3 r i
S up nat o , 1 3 4 r
i
P e c t nat e ( of h e a t ) , 5 1 r r
S up asp n ous , 12 6 i
i
P ec t ne us , 7 9 T e m po a , 1 60 r l
r
P h a yng o pa at ne, 1 66 -
l i e r
T nso fasc ae at ae, 82 i l
iri
P f orm s , 83 i of t h e f a sc a o f t h e o e a m , i f r r
l
P an t a s , 9 4 ri sof t
p a ate , 1 6 5 l
li
P o p t e a , 96 l t ym p an , 2 3 1 i
ri r i i l
P os t e o t b a , 9 6 r
T e es m aj o , 12 0 r
r
P e pu t a , 8 i l m no , 1 2 7 i r
r r r
P onat o q uad at us, 1 3 7 r
T h y o h yo d, 1 63
-
i
r
t e es, 1 3 5 r
p h a yng eus, 1 66
-
fl fi IN D E X
Ne r v e s : U l nar
5 , 12 3 , 1 3 7 , 142
, Prost at e 109 ,

V ag us, 5 8 149 , 1 66 , 2 1 1
. F ub o i l fold 107
-
v es c a ,

r l
V e n t a b u c c a , 15 8 l P ul monary lig am en t 3 4 ,

( e soph a e a t un k, 5 8 ,
g l r se m il un ar v al v e s ,

t h o ac c , 5 r i P unc t a lac rim alia 1 5 5 ,

i i
V d an , 1 9 8 Pylor us 38 ,

r i i l
V ola d g t a , 142 P yram id 209 2 2 2 , ,

m et ac a pa , 13 7 r l Pyr iform l ob e 2 10 ,

i
Z yg om at c , 1 5 8 , 1 8 3 s in u s, 176

O C ULO M O T O R g roo v e , 2 2 0
-
R E C E S S of t h e I nfun di b ul um ,

( Esoph ag u s, 5 9, 1 5 0 R e c t o u t erin e e x c a v at ion, 6 8

-

O lfac tory b ul b , 2 10 R e c t um , 107 , 1 15

l ob e, 2 1 0 R e st if orm b o dy, 2 2 3
trac t 2 10 , R e t in a, 1 9 1
t ub erc le 2 10 , R hi n al fi ssure 2 1 2 ,

O m e nt al b ur sa 1 8 2 4 , R ig h t atri um ( of h e art ) , 5 1
O p tic c h i asm a 206 , 2 09 v e n tric l e ( of h e ar t ) , 5 2

p ap ill a, 1 9 1 R im a c orn e ali s, 1 8 9

rec e ss, 2 19 R oot of l ung 46 ,

t rac t s, 2 09, 220

O ra serrat a, 1 9 1 S A C C UL E 2 30 ,

O rb ic ul u s c il iaris 1 90 , S aliv ary papill a 1 7 0 ,

O rb i t , 18 4 S c ala t ym pan i 2 30 ,

O rb i t al b and, 1 8 4 v est i b u li 2 30 ,

O sse ou s l ab yr in t h , 229 S c l e ra 1 8 9 ,

O st iu m art eri osu m ( of h e art ) 5 3 , , S c r ot u m 5 ,

v e n osu m ( of h e art ) , 5 3 S c ut if orm c artil age 1 5 0 ,

O v arian b ur sa, 6 8 S e c t ion s of spinal c ord 205 ,

O v ary, 6 8 S e m ic ir c ular c an als 2 30 ,

duc t s, 2 30
PA N C R E A S 3 3 , l
S e m i una v alv e s, 5 6 r
P anc reat ic duc t ( of VVir sung ) 3 9 , S ept um of t h e n ose, 1 98
P arafl oc c ulus, 2 2 4 l
pe l uc du m , 2 1 5 , 2 17 i
r i
P a ot d duc t , 1 5 7 ve nt c u o u m , 5 2 ri l r
l
g an d, 15 6 S h e at h of st a gh t abdom in a m usc r i l le
l
P e vi s ( f em a e ) , 1 14 l i
S n uses of du a m at e , 1 94 , 1 97 r r
l
( m a e ) , 106 l
S m a l in test ine, 1 9
i
of k dn ey, 7 0 t
S of pa at e, 1 68 l
i
Pe n s , 8 l
S o e of t h e p e s , 9 7
ri r i
P e c a d um , 3 1 , 4 7 li r l
S o t a y ym ph nodu es, 2 7 -
l
ri r i l l
P e c h o o da ym ph spac e , 1 89 -
r i
S pe m at c c ord, 7
ri r i
P e o b t a , 1 84 i l r
S p n a c o d, 202
ri
P e t on e u m , 2 2 , 6 5 ir l l i
S p a am n a , 2 30
r l l
P e t o u s ob u e , 2 2 4 l
S p een 3 6
r l i
P h a yng o p a at n e a c h , 1 69
-
r S t apes , 2 3 1
r
P h a yn x , 1 7 3 S t om ac h , 3 7
il r
P h t um , 1 7 0 ri
S t a t e m n a s, 2 18 r i li
r
P ia m at e , 2 02 2 07 , r r
S t uc tu e of t h e b adde , 109 l r
i l
P n e a b ody, 2 1 8 in testine s 27 ,

r e c e ss, 2 19 oesoph ag u s , 5 9
l r
P e u a, 3 1 st o m ac h , 6 6
P o ns , 2 06 , 2 2 3 wall of h e art , 5 7
r
P o t a of v e , 6 5li r S ub arac h n oid c ist erns 2 07 ,

i r
P os t e r o c o m m s s u e , 2 1 9 i r spac e , 2 02 , 207
f o v ea 226 , S r l
ub du a c av t y , 194 , 2 01 i
m e dulla y v e u m , 2 2 3 r l S l
ub i ng ua c a un c e , 1 6 1l r l
r r
p e f o a t e d s u b s t a n c e , 2 99 duc t s, 16 1
r l r
P em o a s , 17 1 g lan d, 1 6 1
r
P e puc e , 7 S il r
ub m a x la y du c t , 1 6 ]
r
P om on t o y, 2 3 1r g and, 1 6 1 l
 IN D E X 24 1

S ul c i o f brain 2 1 2 , Ve i n s : Crani al i l 1 12 ves ca ,

S uprapi ne al rec e ss 2 19 , D eep c irc u m fle x iliac 7 3 ,

S upraren al gl ands 70 , fac ial 1 5 9 ,

S upraton sill ar fossa 1 69 , D orsal dig it al 8 7 ,

m et at arsal 8 7 ,

TA P E T U M 190 , v e i n s o f pe n i s 9 ,

T arsus ( of eyelid ) 1 55 ,
E x t ernal iliac 7 6 ,

T ee th 1 7 0, j ug ul a 14 6 r,

T eg m en t um 2 2 0 , m a ill ary 1 4 7 15 9
x , ,

T e n t orium c ere bell i 1 9 6

-
, F ac ial 1 59,

T erm inal c res t ( of h e art ) 52 , F em oral 7 9 ,

g roo v e ( o f h e art ) 5 2 , Gre at sa p h e n o u s 7 7 ,

T e st i s 7 ,
H epat ic 74 ,

T h alam us 2 1 8 ,
H ypog astric 1 12 ,

T h ird v entric le 2 1 8 ,
Ili o l um bar 1 12
-
,

T h orac ic duc t 6 1 7 4 , , I nf erior l ab i al 1 5 9 ,

T h orax 3 1 , I n n o m in ate 48 ,

T h ym u s 4 2 ,
I n t erc ost al 2 9 62 , ,

T h yr oid c artil ag e 175 , In t ernal j ug ul ar 1 48 1 68 , ,

gl an d 1 50 ,
m am m ary 42 1 4 8 , ,

T on g ue 1 7 2 , Ling ual 15 9 ,

T onsil ( p alat in e ) 1 69 ,
Lum b ar 7 3 ,

T onsill ar sin u s 1 69 ,
M edi an b asili c 1 2 6 ,

Trab ec ul ae c arn e ae 52 , c e ph ah c ,
126
T rac h ea 57 M 9 , , r r
( of f o e a m ) , 1 2 9
Tran sv erse c ere bral fi ssure 2 06 ,
Mi le
dd h aem o h o da , 1 1 2 rr i l
pe dun c ul ar f asc ic ul us 2 2 1 ,
i i l i
O c c p t a s nu s, 1 94
sin u s of p eric ardi um 48 ,
r
of h e a t 5 1

v e si c al f ol ds 1 07 , p eni s , 1 1 2
Tric uspid v alv e 5 3 , i
P hr en c , 7 4
T uber c in ereu m 206 2 09 , , P h r enic o a b do m n al, 7 3
-
i
T u b erc le of L0 “ er 52 , ri l
Pe nea , 1 1 2
T uni c a v agin alis 7 , r l i
P e t osa s n u se s, 1 9 7
T ym panic c av it y 2 30 , r l
P o t a , 40
l
R adi a , 1 2 9
U MB ILI C U S 1 3 , R efl e x , 1 5 9
Ure t er 7 0 ,
l
R e na , 73
Ure t h ra 109 1 15 , , S i l i
ag tt a s n u s , 1 9 4

U rin ar y b l adder 1 08 1 1 5 , , S l
m al saph e nou s, 87
i l
U ro g en t a sin u s , 1 16
-
S r
p e m at ic , 7 3
ri
U t e ne t ub e , 68 S l
pin a , 2 0
r
U t e u s, 6 7 , 1 15 S r i l
upe fi c a t e m po a , 1 60 r l
ri le
U t c , 2 30 S up e o ri r l i l
ab a , 1 59

Tr r i
an sv e se s n u se s , 1 9 4

VA G I N A 1 15 ,
r
U ln a , 1 2 9
V all at e papill ae 1 7 3 ,
V en a az yg os, 4 8 , 6 2 , 74
V al v e of t h e c olon 2 7 ,
ri l l r
V en t c e of a yn x , 1 7 6, 1 7 9
v e n a c a v a, 52 i r l
V e nt r c ula f o ds, 1 7 6
VE IN S i l
V e st b u e of t h e e ar, 2 30
A xill ary 4 , , 12 6 a
yn x , 1 7 6 l r
B asil ar ple x us 1 9 7 ,
n ose , 2 00
B asili c 12 6 ,
i
Vill , 27
B uc c in at or 159 ,
ir
V t eou s b ody, 1 9 1
Ce ph alic 12 6 ,
l
V oc al fo ds, 1 7 6
Caudal epig astric 12 ,
r l
V om e o n asa c a t ag e , 2 00
-
r il
g l ut e al 1 1 2 ,
or g an , 2 00
v en a c av a, 4 8, V ul v a , 1 1 6
Cav ern ou s sin us, 1 97
Com m on ili ac , 73 WHIT E c om mi ssur e ( of spinal rd)
co , 2 05
Cran i al e pig astric 12 ,

l
g ut ea , 1 12 l Z O N UL A R spac e s 19 2 ,

v e n a c av a, 4 8 Z yg om at ic g l an d, 1 8 2
 P RI NT E D BY

S P OT TIS WOO D E A N D C O . LTD C O LC HE S T E R

LO ND ON A N D E TO N